SAMSON. Control Valves for Industrial Processes Volume 2

SAMSON Control Valves for Industrial Processes Volume 2

Control Valves for Industrial Processes Volume 2 Catalog 2008 Overview Series 240 Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Up to PN 40 (Class 300) Up to DN 250 (NPS 10) Up to 450 C Volume 1 Rotary Valves for Industrial Processes Series 250 Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Up to PN 400 (Class 2500) Up to DN 500 (NPS 20) Up to 500 C 33 Series 280 Steam-convertering Valves 195 Actuators 223 Positioners Volume 3 Limit Switches Volume 3 Accessories Volume 3 Information Sheets 259 Appendix 317 1

Contents Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Steam-convertering Valves Series 250 Pneumatic and electric control valves for process engineering and industrial applications Nominal pressure: PN 16 to PN 400 (Class 150 to 2500) Valve size: DN 15 to DN 500 (NPS ½ to NPS 20) Temperature up to 500 C (+930 F) Information Sheet Series 240, 250, 280 Valves and valves for special applications 7 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 Globe Valve Type 3251 35 ANSI version 45 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3253-1 and Type 3253-7 Three-way Valve Type 3253 59 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Globe Valve Type 3254 67 ANSI version 77 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Angle Valve Type 3256 91 ANSI version 101 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3252-1 and Type 3252-7 High Pressure Valve Type 3252 115 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3259-1 and Type 3259-7 Angle Valve Type 3259 High Pressure Valve acc. to IG standard 123 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3510-1 and Type 3510-7 Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 131 ANSI version 139 Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe and angle valve with welding ends 147 Globe and angle valve with flanges 155 Control Valves with Ceramic Valve Trims 165 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3258-1 Angle Valve with Split Body Type 3258 169 Flow Dividers St I and St III for Control Valves 173 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim 175 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-3 Trim 187 Silencer Type 3381 191 Series 280 Pneumatic and electric steam converters for process engineering and industrial applications Nominal pressure: PN 16 to PN 630 (Class 150 to 2500) Valve size: DN 50 to DN 500 (NPS 2 to NPS 20) Temperature up to 560 C (+1040 F) Pneumatic Steam Converter Type 3281-1 and Type 3286-1 Steam-converting Valve Type 3281 and Type 3286 197 Pneumatic Steam Converter Type 3284-1 Steam-converting Valve Type 3284 205 Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C3 213 Type 994-0001 Water Bath Desuperheater for desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature 219 Actuators Pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators for control valves and butterfly valves Information Sheet 223 Pneumatic Actuators up to 700 cm 2 Type 3271 and Type 3277 227 Pneumatic Actuators 1400, 2800 and 2 x 2800 cm 2 Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 233 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 239 Electric Linear Actuator Type SAM 241 Electrohydraulic Actuators Type 3274-11 to -23 245 TROVIS-VIEW Software 253 Information Sheets Materials and pressure-temperature diagrams 259 Valve flow coefficients 283 Appendix SAMSON Product Range 317 SAMSON Subsidiaries, Agencies and Service Facilities Worldwide 319 Index 323 3

Data Sheet Summary B 016 EN Type 994-0001 Water Bath Desuperheater for desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature 219 T 6661 EN TROVIS-VIEW Software 253 T 8000-1 EN Information Sheet Series 240, 250, 280 Valves and valves for special applications 7 T 8000-2 EN Information Sheet Materials and pressure-temperature diagrams 259 T 8000-3 EN Information Sheet Valve flow coefficients 283 T 8051 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 Globe Valve Type 3251 35 T 8052 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 Globe Valve Type 3251 ANSI version 45 T 8053 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3252-1 and Type 3252-7 High Pressure Valve Type 3252 115 T 8055 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3253-1 and Type 3253-7 Three-way Valve Type 3253 59 T 8059 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3259-1 and Type 3259-7 Angle Valve Type 3259 High Pressure Valve acc. to IG standard 123 T 8060 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Globe Valve Type 3254 67 T 8061 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Globe Valve Type 3254 ANSI version 77 T 8065 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Angle Valve Type 3256 91 T 8066 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Angle Valve Type 3256 ANSI version 101 T 8070 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3258-1 Angle Valve with Split Body Type 3258 169 T 8071 EN Control Valves with Ceramic Valve Trims 165 T 8081 EN Flow Dividers St I and St III for Control Valves 173 T 8082 EN Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim 175 T 8083 EN Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-3 Trim 187 T 8084 EN Silencer Type 3381 191 T 8091 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3510-1 and Type 3510-7 Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 131 T 8091-1 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3510-1 and Type 3510-7 Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 ANSI version 139 T 8251 EN Pneumatic Steam Converter Type 3281-1 and Type 3286-1 Steam-converting Valve Type 3281 and Type 3286 197 T 8254 EN Pneumatic Steam Converter Type 3284-1 Steam-converting Valve Type 3284 205 T 8300 EN Information Sheet 223 Pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators for control valves and butterfly valves T 8310-1 EN Pneumatic Actuators up to 700 cm 2 Type 3271 and Type 3277 227 T 8310-2 EN Pneumatic Actuators 1400, 2800 and 2 x 2800 cm 2 Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 233 T 8312 EN Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 239 T 8330 EN Electric Linear Actuator Type SAM 241 T 8340 EN Electrohydraulic Actuators Type 3274-11 to -23 245 T 9933 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe and angle valve with welding ends 147 T 9933-1 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe and angle valve with flanges 155 T 9934 EN Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C3 213 5

Series 240 250 280 Pfeiffer W&T Pneumatic and Electric Control Valves Information Sheet Part 1 DN 10... 500 PN 10... 400 200... 500 C NPS ¼... 16 Class 125... 2500 325... 930 F DN 15A... 250A JIS 10K/20K 200... 500 C Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 7

Contents SAMSON control valves Series 240, 250, 280, W&T and valves for special applications 9 Table 1a Series 240 Control Valves and valves for special applications 10 Table 1b Series 250 Control Valves and W&T Valves 11 Table 1c Steam-converting Valves - Series 280 and W&T 11 Series 240 Type 3241 Globe Valve 12 Type 3241 in forged steel version 12 Type 3241-Gas, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for gases 12 Type 3241-Oil, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for liquid fuels and liquified petroleum gas in the liquid phase 12 Type 3241 Control Valve with safety function, typetested 13 Type 3244 Three-way Valve 13 Valves for special applications Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve 13 Type 3249 Control Valve for aseptic service 13 Type 3345 Diaphragm Valve 14 Type 3347 Control Valve for food processing 14 Type 3351 Pneumatic On-off Valve 14 Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve 14 Series 250 and W&T Type 3251 Globe Valve 15 Type 3252 High-pressure Valve 15 Type 3253 Three-way Valve 15 Type 3254 Globe Valve 15 Type 3256 Angle Valve 16 Type 3259 Angle Valve 16 W&T Type RVG Control Valve 16 Lined globe vlaves Pfeiffer Type BR 1a with PTFE lining 16 Pfeiffer Type BR 1b with PFA lining 16 Series 280 and W&T Type 3281 and Type 3286 Steam-converting Valves 17 Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve 17 W&T Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve 17 Control valve details Valve bodies and styles Globe valve 18 Three-way valve 18 Angle valve 18 Cryogenic valve 19 Valve for food processing 19 Diaphragm valve 19 On-off valve 20 Micro-flow valve 20 Steam-converting valve 20 Valve bonnets Packing 20 Steam line connection 21 Seat and plug trims 21 Seat leakage rate 22 Table 2 Plug sealing and seat leakage rate 22 Pressure balancing 22 Control valves with ceramic trims 22 Flow dividers 22 AC trims and silencer 23 Additional components Bellows seal 23 Insulating section 23 Heating jacket 24 Face-to-face dimensions Globe and angle valves acc. to DIN and ANSI 24 Types of pipe connections 24 Valve-specific parameters K VS coefficient 25 Rangeability 25 Inherent characteristic 25 Actuators Pneumatic actuators 26 Electric actuators 26 Electrohydraulic actuators 26 Hand-operated actuators 26 Accessories for control valves Positioners 27 Limit switches 27 Position transmitter/potentiometer 27 Solenoid valves 27 Lock-up valve 27 Pneumatic remote adjuster 27 Supply pressure regulators 27 Supply pressure regulators with air filter 27 Pneumatic volume booster 27 Valve sizing Calculating the K V coefficient 28 Selecting the valve 28 Noise prediction x Fz factor 29 Table 3 Series 240 and 250 29 Gases and vapors 30 Liquids 30 Materials conforming to DIN and ANSI/ASME Table 4 Materials 31 Selection and ordering Selection and sizing of the control valve 31 Ordering text 31 Specification sheet for control valves 32 8 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

SAMSON control valves Series 240, 250 and 280 Control Valves include pneumatic and electric globe valves, three-way valves, and angle valves. Their application range covers control tasks in process engineering and industrial applications as well as in supply and power plant engineering. The modular system allows easy retrofitting and servicing. The control valves consist of the valve and the actuator. They can be equipped with pneumatic, electric, electrohydraulic, or hand-operated actuators. For controlling purposes and travel indication, accessories such as positioners, limit switches and solenoid valves can either be attached directly (see page 27 and Information Sheet T 8350 EN) or according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR rib). The valve bodies are available in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, cast steel, cast stainless or cold-resisting steel, forged steel or forged stainless steel as well as in special materials. All parts of the valve and the pneumatic actuator housing in the completely corrosion-resistant version are made of stainless steel. Refer to the associated data sheets for details. Series 240 Series 240 Control Valves are available in nominal sizes ranging from DN 15 to DN 300 (NPS ½ to 12) and up to a nominal pressure PN 40 (Class 300). Control valves in the standard version are suitable for temperature ranges between 10 and +220 C (15 and 430 F). An insulating section allows the temperature range to be extended to 200 and +450 C ( 325 and +840 F). The plug stem is sealed either by a self-adjusting PTFE V-ring packing or an adjustable packing. To meet stricter emissions control requirements, a stainless steel bellows is used. The Type 3241 Control Valve can be equipped with a heating jacket that may also include the bellows. Series 250 Series 250 Control Valves are used when large nominal sizes and/or high pressures are involved in process engineering, power plant or supply engineering. In addition to globe, three-way and angle valves, four-flanged valve bodies with bottom plug stem guides, and valves with axial multi-stage throttling plugs, customized valve constructions to meet customer specifications can be engineered as well. The valves are manufactured in nominal sizes from DN 15 to DN 500 (NPS ½ to 16) and for nominal pressures between PN 16 and PN 400 (Class 150 to 2500). The standard versions of these control valves are suitable for temperatures ranges between 10 and +220 C (15 and 430 F). This temperature range can, however, be extended by using an adjustable high-temperature packing to a temperature range between 10 and +350 C (15 and 660 F) and by using a bellows seal or an insulating section to a temperature range between 200 and +500 C ( 325 and +930 F). Welland & Tuxhorn valves The Type RVG Pneumatic Control Valve from Welland & Tuxhorn is used in power plants and in the petrochemical industry to control feedwater and other liquids. The valves are manufactured with globe-pattern and angle-pattern bodies in nominal sizes DN 25 to DN 150 (NPS 1 to 6) with nominal pressures PN 16 to PN 400 (ANSI Class 150 to 2500). Series 280 and W&T Series 280 Steam-converting Valves are used to reduce both the steam pressure and steam temperature to optimize plant operation and heat efficiency in process plants, for example, in refineries, food and beverage, tobacco or pulp and paper industries. Steam-converting valves are based on Series 250 Valves fitted with a flow divider St III and an additional spray water connection. They are available in nominal sizes ranging from DN 50 to DN 400 (NPS 1 to 16), with nominal pressures of PN 16 to PN 400 (Class 150 to 2500) and for temperatures up to 500 C (930 F). The Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve from Welland & Tuxhorn is designed for high-pressure ranges and can be engineered with varying inlet and outlet sizes. The inlet nominal sizes range from DN 80 to DN 500 and the outlet nominal sizes from DN 100 to DN 1600. Large amounts of spray water can be injected thanks to the integrated atomizing steam cooler. The valve can be operated in a wide load range. Valves for special applications These valves have been developed for special requirements including cryogenic valves, valves for food processing, diaphragm control valves and micro-flow control valves. Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 9

Table 1a Series 240 Control Valves and valves for special applications Control valve Series 240 For special applications Type 3241 DIN ANSI Gas Oil TÜV 3244 3248 3249 3345 3347 3351 3510 Data Sheet T EN 8015 8012 8020 8022 8016 8026 8093 8048 8031 8097 8039 8091 Globe valve Three-way valve for mixing or diverting service Angle valve DIN Standard version ANSI Special applications Nominal sizes JIS Low flow rates Typetested for gas, DIN EN 161 Liquid fuels, DIN EN 264 Typetested acc. to DIN 32730 On-off valves Pharmaceutical/food industries Cryogenics DN 15... 300 15--- 150 15... 100 15... 150 15... 150 15... 150 15... 80 15... 150 15... 125 15... 100 10, 15, 25 NPS ½...12 ½...6 ½...6 ½...6 ½...3 ½...6 ½...5 ½...4 ¼...1 PN 10...40 40 16, 40 16...40 16...40 16...40 10 10, 16 16 16...40 40...400 Class Nominal pressure 125, 300 300 150, 300 150, 300 150 psi 125/150 240 psi 150, 300 300... 2500 JIS 10/20 KRF Perm. temperatures and differential pressures Refer to associated data sheet Cast iron, EN-JL1040 Spheroidal graphite iron, EN-JS1049 Cast steel, 1.0619 Cast stainless steel, 1.4581 1.4404 Forged steel, 1.0460 Forged stainless steel, 1.4571 Body ASTM A 126 B, cast iron material ASTM A 216 WCC, carbon steel ASTM A 351 CF8M, stainl. steel 351CF8 GX5CrNi19-10, 1.4308 G20Mn5, 1.6220 (formerly 1.1138) Special materials Metal sealing Plug Lapped-in metal Soft sealing Pressure-balanced Diaphragm seal Insulating section Option Bellows seal Heating jacket Low-noise (flow divider) End connections Flanges Welding ends Special end connections Data Sheet T EN 8015 8012 8020 8022 8016 8026 8093 8048 8031 8097 8039 8091 10 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Table 1b Series 250 Control Valves and W&T valves Type 3251 3252 3253 3254 3256 3259 W&T RVG BR 1a BR 1b Data Sheet T EN 8051 8052 8053 8055 8060 8061 8065 8066 8059 9933 TB 01a TB 01b Globe valve Three-way valve for mixing or diverting service BR 1d* Angle valve DIN IG Standard version ANSI Nominal sizes Nominal pressure Class 150... 2500 Perm. temperatures and differential pressures Body material Plug Option End connections DN 15...200 15...25 15...400 80...500 15...200 16...90 25...150 25...150 25...80 NPS ½...8 ½...1 ½...12 3...16 ½...8 1...6 1...6 3...1 PN 16...400 40...400 10...160 16...400 16...400 325 16...400 10/16 10/16 300... 2500 150... 2500 Refer to associated data sheet 150... 2500 Cast steel, 1.0619 G17CrMo5-5, 1.7357 Cast stainless steel, 1.4581 1.4404 ASTM A 216 WCC ASTM A 217 WC6 150... 2500 ASTM A 351 CF8M A316L Special materials 1.4571 150... 2500 150 lbs 150 lbs 0.7043/ PTFE Metal sealing Lapped-in metal Soft sealing Pressure-balanced Ceramic trim Insulating section Bellows seal PTFE PTFE Heating jacket Low-noise (flow divider) Flange Welding ends Special end connections 0.7043/ PFA Data Sheet T EN 8051 8052 8053 8055 8060 8061 8065 8066 8059 9933 TB 01 a TB 01 b Table 1c Steam-converting Valves of the Series 280 and W&T Type 3281 3284 3286 W&T DUV-C3 Nominal sizes DN 50 200 100 400 50 200 Inlet: 80... 500 Outlet: 100...1600 NPS 2 8 4 16 2 8 Inlet: 3... 20 Outlet: 4... 64 Data Sheet T EN 8251 8254 8251 9934 Technical data (DIN/ANSI) acc. to Type 3251 Type 3254 Type 3256 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 11

Series 240 Type 3241 Globe Valve (T 8012 EN to T 8022 EN) This valve is used for a wide range of applications in process engineering and industrial plants as well as in supply and power plant engineering. Standard valves are available conforming to DIN, ANSI und JIS standards. Valve bodies are manufactured in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, cast steel, cast stainless or cold-resisting steel. Nominal size DN 15 300 NPS ½ 12 Nominal pressure PN 10 40 ANSI Class 150 300 JIS 10/20 K Temperature range 200 +450 C 320 +800 F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. Further versions are available with adjustable packing, bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket or flow divider to reduce noise emissions. Type 3241 in forged steel version (T 8015 EN) Valve body and bonnet made of forged steel 1.0460 (C22.8) or forged stainless steel 1.4571. Nominal size DN 15 80 Nominal pressure PN 16 40 Temperature range 200 +450 C Further specifications and versions are the same as for the Type 3241 Valve in cast version (see above). Type 3241-Gas, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for gases (T 8020 EN) The safety shut-off valves for gas typetested according to DIN EN 161 can also assume the function of a control valve (DIN-DVGW-typetested). The valve is equipped with a solenoid valve and a strainer. The plug stem is sealed by a corrosion-resistant steel bellows fitted with a test connection and a backup self-adjusting packing. The valve bodies are available in cast steel, cast stainless steel, and forged steel. Nominal size DN 15 150 NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN 40 ANSI Class 300 Medium temperature Ambient temperature Valve plug with soft sealing. 20 +220 C 20 + 60 C 4 428 F 4 140 F Type 3241-Oil, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for liquid fuels and liquefied petroleum gas in the liquid phase (T 8022 EN) Control valve typetested acc. to DIN EN 264 as a control and safety shut-off valve for combustion plants burning liquid fuels. The valve is equipped with a solenoid valve and a strainer. The valve bodies are available in cast steel, cast stainless steel 1.4571 or forged steel 1.0460. Nominal size DN 15 100 NPS ½ 4 Nominal pressure PN 16 and PN 40 ANSI Class 300 Max. medium temp. Ambient temperature 350 C 15 +60 C 662 F 5 140 F Valve plug with soft sealing or lapped-in metal. Further versions available with bellows seal. Type 3241-7 with forged steel valve body Type 3241-1 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3241-Gas with bellows seal and Type 3241-Oil, both with positioner, solenoid valve and strainer 12 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Type 3241 Pneumatic Control Valve with safety function, typetested (T 8016 EN) The control valve typetested according to DIN 32730 can assume the function of a control valve as well as that of a safety temperature limiter or pressure limiter. The standard version is suitable for water and steam up to 220 C, the version with insulating section up to 350 C. The control valve is equipped with a Type 3701 Solenoid Valve. Valve bodies available in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, cast steel or cast stainless steel, forged steel and forged stainless steel. Nominal size DN 15 150 Nominal pressure PN 16 40 Perm. temperature 200 +350 C Valve plug with metal sealing. Type 3244 Three-way Valve (T 8026 EN) Control valve for mixing and flow-diverting service according to DIN or ANSI standards. Mixing or diverting service is determined by the arrangement of the valve plug at the factory (see valve body on p. 18). Valve bodies available in cast iron, cast steel, or cast stainless steel (according to DIN or ASTM specifications). Nominal size DN 15 150 NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN 10 40 ANSI Class 150 300 Temperature range 200 +450 C 325 800 F Valves for special applications Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve (T 8093 EN) Control valve used for liquid gases in the field of cryogenic engineering. Installation in cold box or in vacuum-insulated pipelines. Nominal size DN 15 150 * NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN 10 100 ANSI Class 150 600 Temperature range 200 +220 C 459 428 F * DN 200/NPS 8 and DN 250/NPS 10 on request Valve plug with metal sealing. Bellows seal with backup packing. Special version with aluminum valve body. Type 3249 Control Valve for aseptic service (T 8048 EN) Angle valve for food processing and pharmaceutical industries according to DIN or ANSI standards. PTFE-coated EPDM diaphragm serves as external sealing; additional test connection and backup packing. Nominal size DN 15 80 NPS ½ 3 Maximum pressure 10 bar 150 psi Temperature range 10 +130 C 14 266 F Versions are available with threaded coupling, conical coupling and slotted round nut or flanges, as well as flanges or clamp weld-on coupling conforming to ANSI requirements. Valve plug with metal sealing. Further versions are available with adjustable packing, bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, or additional handwheel. Type 3241-1 typetested Type 3249 Angle valve for aseptic service Type 3244-7 Three-way Valve Type 3248-1 Cryogenic Valve in globe-pattern and aluminium angle-pattern Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 13

Type 3345 Diaphragm Valve (T 8031 EN) Control valve for viscous, corrosive and abrasive fluids according to DIN or ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, or cast stainless steel with or without lining. Valve diaphragm made of butyl, FPM (FKM), or ethylene propylene (also with PTFE protective facing). Nominal size DN 15 150 NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN 10 ANSI Class 150 300 Temperature range 10 +100 C 14 212 F Versions for higher temperatures or with FDA approval for the food processing industry available on request. Type 3347 Control Valve for food processing (T 8097 EN) Angle valve for food processing and pharmaceutical industries as well as for in the field of biochemistry equipped with weld-on, screw or clamp connections. Suitable for CIP cleaning. Nominal size DN 15 125 NPS ½ 5 Maximum pressure 16 bar 240 psi Temperature range 10 +150 C 15 300 F Version available in full-mold cast body with threaded end connections complying with 3A und EHEDG regulations. Type 3351 Pneumatic On-off Valve (T 8039 EN) Valve for on/off service with tight shutoff for liquids, non-flammable gases and steam. Valve bodies available in cast iron, cast steel, or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN 15 100 NPS ½ 4 Nominal pressure PN 10 40 ANSI Class 150...300 Medium temperature Ambient temperature 50 +250 C 10 90 C 20 482 F 14 194 F Valve plug with both metal sealing and soft sealing simultaneously. Self-adjusting PTFE V-ring packing. Further versions are available with insulating section, bellows seal, or additional handwheel. Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve (T 8091 EN) Control valve with either stainless steel globe- or angle-pattern body designed to control very low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research facilities. Nominal size DN 10, 15, 25 NPS 14, 38, 12 Nominal pressure PN 40 400 ANSI Class 150 2500 Temperature range 200 +450 C 328 842 F Further versions are available with insulating section or bellows seal. Type 3510-7 Micro-flow Valve Type 3347-7 Valve for food processing Type 3351-1 On-off Valve Type 3345-1 Diaphragm Valve 14 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Series 250 and W&T Type 3251 Globe Valve (T 8051/52 EN) Control valve for applications in process engineering and industrial plants as well as in supply and power plant engineering. Suitable for large nominal sizes and/or high pressures according to DIN and ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in high-temperature, cold-resisting or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN 15 200 NPS ½ 8 Nominal pressure PN 16 400 ANSI Class 150 2500 Type 3253 Three-way Valve (T 8055 EN) Control valve for mixing or flow-diverting service. Valve bodies available in cast iron, high-temperature, cold-resisting or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN 15 400 NPS ½ 16 Nominal pressure PN 10 160 ANSI Class 300 2500 Temperature range 200 +500 C 325 930 F Valve plug with metal sealing. Further versions are available with bellows seal or insulating section. Temperature range 200 +500 C 325 930 F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. Further versions are available with bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, flow divider to reduce noise emissions, or pressure-balanced plug. Type 3252 High-pressure Valve (T 8053 EN) Control valve with either globe- or angle-pattern body to control low flow rates in process engineering applications. Valve bodies available in cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN 15 25 NPS ½ 1 Nominal pressure PN 40 400 ANSI Class 300 2500 Temperature range 200 +450 C 320 800 F Valve plug with metal sealing. Further versions are available with bellows seal or insulating section. End connections with female thread, welding ends, or flanges. Other valve body materials available on request. Type 3254 Globe Valve (T 8060/61 EN) Control valve for process engineering applications according to DIN or ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in cast iron, high-temperature, cold-resisting or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN 80 500 NPS 3 16 Nominal pressure PN 10 400 ANSI Class 150 2500 Temperature range 200 +500 C 320 930 F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. The valve has an additional plug stem guide in the bottom body flange. Further versions are available with bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, flow divider to reduce noise emissions, or pressure-balanced plug. Type 3251 Globe Valve Type 3252 High-pressure Valve Type 3253 Three-way Valve Type 3254 Globe Valve Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 15

Type 3256 Angle Valve (T 8065/66 EN) Control valve for process engineering applications according to DIN or ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in high-temperature, cold-resisting cast steel or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN 15 200 NPS ½ 8 Nominal pressure PN 16 400 ANSI Class 300 2500 Temperature range 200 +500 C 325 930 F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. Further versions are available with bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, flow divider to reduce noise emissions, or pressure-balanced plug. Type 3259 Angle Valve (T 8059 EN) Control valve for industrial plants with high pressure requirements according to the IG standard Nominal size DN 16 90 * Nominal pressure PN 325 Temperature range 200 +450 C * Nominal size DN 120 on request The valve body is made of forged stainless steel and the end connections are designed as screwed-on flanges with lens ring gaskets. Valve plug with metal sealing or lapped-in metal. W&T Type RVG Control Valve (T 9933 EN) Single- or multi-stage control valve for power plant applications or the petrochemical industry for feedwater and steam. Valve bodies available in forged steel in globe- or angle-style or Z-style bodies according to DIN or ANSI standards. Application as feedwater, spray or recirculation valve. Nominal size DN 25 150 NPS 1 6 Nominal pressure PN 16 400 ANSI Class 150 2500 Temperature range 200 +450 C 328 +842 F Lined valves Valves suitable for corrosive media, in particular, to meet high requirements in chemical plants. Streamlined valve body made of spheroidal graphite iron EN-JS1049. Exchangeable PTFE valve seat and PTFE plug, plug stem sealed by a special PTFE bellows and an additional packing with test connection. Pfeiffer Type BR 1a Globe valve with 5 to 8 mm isostatic PTFE lining Nominal size DN 25 150 NPS 1 4 Nominal pressure PN 10 16 ANSI Class 150 Temperature range Up to 200 C Up to 390 F Pfeiffer Type BR 1b Globe valve with 4 to 5 mm thick PFA lining (TB 01a EN) (TB 01b EN) Nominal size DN 25 80 NPS 1 3 Nominal pressure PN 10 16 ANSI Class 150 Temperature range Up to 200 C Up to 390 F Other linings and materials available on request. Pfeiffer Type BR 1a PTFE-lined Globe Valve Type 3256 Angle Valve Type 3259 Angle Valve acc. to IG standard W&T Type RVG Globe Valve Pfeiffer Type BR 1b PFA-lined Globe Valve 16 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Series 280 Control valves for process engineering or for heat efficiency to reduce steam pressure and steam temperature simultaneously. Type 3281 and Type 3286 Steam-converting Valves (T 8251 EN) Globe valve (Type 3281) or angle valve (Type 3286) according to DIN or ANSI standards. Nominal size DN 50 200 NPS 2 8 Nominal pressure PN 16 400 ANSI Class 300 2500 Temperature range Up to 500 C Up to 930 F Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve (T 8254 EN) Globe valve with four-flanged body and double-guided plug stem according to DIN or ANSI standards. W&T Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve (T 9934 EN) Steam-converting valve for power plant engineering and industrial processes. Inlet DN 80 500 PN 16 630 Outlet DN 100 1600 PN 16 100 NPS3 20 Class 150 2500 NPS4 64 ANSI Class 150 900 Temperature range Up to 560 C Up to 1040 F Valve bodies available in forged steel 1.0460 (A105), heat-resisting forged steel 1.5415, 1.7335/A 182 F12 or 1.7380/A 182 F22. Special features include at least two-staged controlled perforated plug, at least one uncontrolled attenuation plate and an integrated atomizing steam cooler. Nominal size DN 100 400 NPS 4 16 Nominal pressure PN 16 400 ANSI Class 300 2500 Temperature range Up to 500 C Up to 930 F Type 3281 Steam-converting Valve Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve W&T Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 17

Control valve details Valve bodies and styles The valve body, valve bonnet and, in some cases, the bottom flange are subject to internal stress caused by the process medium flowing through the valve. Consequently, the valves must be designed to be sufficiently resistant to mechanical and chemical stress. Under the influence of the operating temperature, the material strength changes. This behavior can be improved by combining certain alloys. For this reason, heat-resisting materials are used at high temperatures ( e.g. according to DIN EN 10213-1) and cold-resisting materials are used for cryogenic service. The materials table on page 31and the AD Specification Sheet W 10 provide a summary. Globe valve (T 8015 EN, T 8060 EN) Globe valves allow easy installation in straight pipelines. For nominal pressures up to PN 40 and nominal sizes up to DN 300, three-flanged bodies of the Series 240 are mainly used. The plug stem is guided in the valve bonnet, and the V-port plug in the screwed-in seat. The ports of the V-port plug are asymmetric in order to suppress any oscillations. Three-way valve (T 8026 EN) Three-way valves are used for mixing or flow-diverting service. Mixing service with Type 3244 Three-way Valve The mode of operation depends on how the two plugs are arranged. The direction of flow is indicated by arrows. Flow-diverting service with Type 3244 Three-way Valve Type 3241 Globe Valve To handle higher load levels and when larger seat diameters are used, the Type 3254 Globe Valve of the Series 250 is provided with an additional plug stem guide in the bottom flange. Angle valve (T 8065 EN) Angle valves are ideally installed when a vertical pipeline and a horizontal pipeline need to be connected. The process medium is only diverted once. Angle valves allow the condensate to be optimally treated, and are practically entirely self draining. In case the process medium is in the flow-to-close direction, wear in the valve outlet can be reduced by the use of an anti-wear sleeve. For process media containing solids, the outlet of the Type 3256 Control Valves can additionally be fitted with a ceramic wear-resistant pipe. Additional plug stem guide in Type 3254 Type 3256 Angle Valve 18 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Cryogenic valve (T 8093 EN) Plants that produce liquefied, cryogenic air separation gases, often use vacuum-insulated pipelines to prevent environmental heat being transferred to the medium. The control valves can be integrated in the vacuum jacket by means of a connecting flange. The valve is designed to widely prevent thermal conduction to the effect that the stem remains free of ice. A bellows seal serves as the primary sealing. The jacketed pipeline is evacuated of air and sealed off after installation of the components. The cryogenic extension bonnet of the control valve is often welded to the jacketed pipeline via a flange, meaning considerable work would be involved to remove the valve from the pipeline. However, to make maintenance possible, the internal parts can be accessed via the cryogenic extension bonnet without having to remove the valve from the pipeline. Valve for food processing (T 8048 EN, T 8097 EN) Valves for food processing are angle valves made of stainless steel. The internal surfaces exposed to the process medium are machined to a fine finish or polished. The valve bodies are self-draining and can be cleaned (CIP) or sterilized (SIP) without having to be disassembled. The stem of Type 3249 is sealed by a special diaphragm, preventing bacteria from being trapped. Type 3249 Valve for food processing The Type 3347 Control Valve is available with welding ends, a threaded or a clamp connection according to ISO 2852, and with a steam line connection if higher purity requirements are to be met. Type 3347 with steam line connection Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve Diaphragm valve (T 8031 EN) For viscous or corrosive media possibly containing solids, diaphragm control valves that are free of dead space and without stuffing boxes are an economical solution. The diaphragm may be made of rubber, nitrile, butyl or PTFE. The valve body may additionally be lined with rubber or PTFE. Type 3345 Diaphragm Valve Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 19

On-off valve (T 8039 EN) The valve for on-off service is used for tight shutoff of liquids, non-flammable gases and steam. As the valve plug is equipped with both a metal sealing and a soft sealing, the leakage flow rate class VI is achieved. Valve bonnets The valve bonnet closes the valve at the top and provides room for the stuffing box and the plug stem guide. The valve bonnet and the yoke of Series 240 Valves are incorporated in one piece. The valve bonnet and the yoke of Series 250 and 280 Valves are bolted together. The NAMUR rib standardized in IEC 60534-6 located on the yoke allows easy, standardized attachment of a positioner or other accessories. The valve bonnet is a pressure-bearing part that is exposed to the process medium, therefore its material is subject to the same design requirements as the valve body. Type 3351 On-off valve Micro-flow valve (T 8091 EN) Micro-flow valves are used for very low flow rates (K V coefficients <1.6 to 10 5 m 3 /h). The parts exposed to the process medium are made of stainless steel 1.4571. All valve parts are made of semi-finished products. As a result, special materials can be used in a particularly cost-effective manner, and the valve covers a wide range of applications. Packing The plug stem is sealed by the packing. Versions with bellows seal or insulating section or when the packing functions as a backup packing use the standard packing. The temperature range of the standard packing is between 10 and 220 C and can be extended when an insulating section is fitted on the valve bonnet. Valve bonnet of Series 240 Valves Other packings can be installed for special applications. Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve Steam-converting valve (T 8251/4 EN) Steam-converting valves are used to reduce the steam pressure and the steam temperature simultaneously. A connecting pipe supplies the spray water to the flow divider St III. At its inner wall, the spray water comes into contact with the steam flow. The steam flow and the entrained water are mixed in the narrow wire mesh of the flow divider. As the supplied spray water does not come into contact with the valve body, neither erosion nor thermal shock occur. The flow divider ensures low-noise and low-vibration operation. Packing forms Standard packing Temperature range 10... +220 C Self-adjusting, spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon for nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 150. Self-adjusting PTFE-carbon/PTFE-silk packing for nominal sizes DN 200 to DN 500. Suitable for all applications that require a high level of sealing performance, yet requiring hardly any maintenance. Valve bonnet for Series 250 Valves Type 3281Steam-converting Valve 20 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Form A Adjustable, cavity-free PTFE-silk/PTFE-carbon packing. Especially suitable for process media that crystallize out or polymerize. Form B Adjustable, cavity-free PTFE-silk/pure PTFE packing. PTFE-silk for nominal sizes DN 200 to DN 500. Suitable for process media that crystallize out or polymerize and in case carbon particles would contaminate the process medium. Form C Adjustable, cavity-free packing made of woven PTFE-silk. Application for all chemicals including hot acids and alkaline solutions. Form D Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of pure PTFE. Suitable for pure process media in case carbon particles would contaminate the process medium. Form H Adjustable high-temperature packing made of graphite and carbon rings. Especially suitable for superheated steam. Form S Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon with BAM approval (German Institute for Materials Research and Testing). Suitable for oxygen service (only when BAM-approved lubricant is used). Form W Adjustable, cavity-free packing made of PTFE-graphite thread and carbon for fresh and service water. The carbon bushings serve as wipers. Especially suitable for hard water and any process media that may cause deposits forming on the plug stem. NACE standard Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon conforming to NACE standard. Suitable for sour gas/sour water. ADSEAL Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon with ADSEAL emergency adjusting function. Packing versions for extended application conditions available on request. Steam line connection The Type 3347 Control Valve can be provided with a valve bonnet including a steam line connection to meet the requirements regarding purity in the food processing and pharmaceutical industries. Steam or a sterilizing liquid flushes the plug stem between the two PTFE V-ring packings to prevent bacteria from being trapped. Steam line connection in Type 3347 Seat and plug trims The design of the seat and the plug determines the K VS coefficient and the characteristic as well as the seat leakage rate of a valve. The drawings show seat-guided V-port plugs with asymmetric ports with metal sealing and soft sealing. Metal sealing Soft sealing The seat, plug, and plug stem are made of stainless steel. In some cases, the trim elements are subject to high stress due to high differential pressures, cavitation, flashing, or in cases where the process media contains solids. In order to increase the service life, seats and plugs with metal sealing can be provided with a Stellite hard facing, and plugs up to DN 100 can be made of solid Stellite. The seats are screwed into place, allowing them to be easily exchanged. They may also be made of other materials. Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 21

Seat leakage rate The seat leakage rate is determined according to DIN EN 1349 which specifies the maximum amount of the test process medium (gas or water) that may flow through the closed control valve under test conditions. For special applications (e.g. using Type 3241-Gas or Type 3241-Oil) or with shut-off valves (Type 3351), a high leakage rate class can be achieved by using a lapped-in metal or a soft sealing. Table 2 Plug sealing and seat leakage rate Seat/plug sealing Leakage rate class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Seat leakage % of K VS Metal sealing IV 0.01 Lapped-in metal up to DN 80 IV-S2 0.0001 Control valves with ceramic trims (T 8071 EN) Control valves with extremely resistant ceramic trims are used when the valve body and the trim are subject to considerable erosion and abrasion. The following valves can be fitted with ceramic trims: Type 3251 Globe Valve, Type 3256 Angle Valve. The Type 3256 Angle Valve can be fitted with a ceramic wear-resistant pipe. When the process medium flows in the flow-to-close (FTC) direction, this version is suitable for extreme erosive and abrasive conditions caused by process medium containing solids. Details on ceramic materials and their properties are available on request. Lapped-in metal in DN 100 or larger IV-S1 0.0005 Soft sealing VI 0.3 Δp f L 1) PTFE ring with pressure balancing Graphite ring with pressure balancing IV 0.01 III 0.1 1) Leakage factor f L according to DIN EN 1349 Pressure balancing If the actuator force is not sufficient to handle the differential pressure, pressure-balanced plugs are a good solution. The plug is designed to function as a piston. The upstream pressure p 1 is transferred to the back of the plug via a borehole in the bottom of the plug. The forces acting on the plug are compensated for with exception of the area around the plug stem. Pressure-balanced plugs are additionally sealed with a PTFE ring or a graphite ring. The pressure-balanced components are subject to wear. As a result, the seat leakage rate (see Table 2) and the amount of maintenance needed for these valves increase. Pressure-balanced plugs should not be used, if at all possible, for high-temperature process media or for media that contain solids or crystallize out. In these cases, we recommend to use a more powerful actuator. Type 3256 Angle Valve with ceramic trim and wear-resistant pipe Low-noise operation Flow dividers (T 8081 EN) The flow dividers St I and St III serve to reduce the noise emission of gases and vapors. The process medium reaches its maximum velocity after passing the restriction between seat and plug. Before it starts to create a noise-intensive, turbulent mixing zone, the process medium hits the inner wall of the flow divider. The flow is divided and a low-noise impulse exchange with the surrounding medium takes place. Flow divider St I and St III Plug with pressure balancing The valve-specific correction values for gases and vapors are required for noise calculation according to VDMA 24422, Edition 1989 and DIN EN 60534 when flow dividers are used. Refer to the diagrams on page 30 for details. For further details regarding noise calculation, refer to the DIN EN 60534 standard or contact us and we will perform these calculations for you. The K VS coefficient of the valve trim is reduced on using a flow divider. The associated data sheets include the K VS I for the flow divider St I and K VS III for the flow divider St III. 22 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

AC trims (T 8082/3 EN) AC-1 and AC-2 Trims are optimized trims for low-noise pressure letdown of liquids at differential pressures up to 40 bar. The seat is raised and the parabolic plug is additionally guided in the seat. The AC-2 Trim additionally has up to four attenuation plates. Additional components Bellows seal In case, stricter emissions control requirements must be met, e.g. TA-Luft or in vacuum applications, a metal bellows is used to seal the plug stem. The plug stem is additionally sealed with a packing at the top flange. This packing serves as a backup packing. The metal bellows can be monitored for leakage or a sealing medium can be applied by means of a test connection. The bellows seal can be used for valves of Series 240 from 200 to +400 C, and Series 250/280 from 200 to +450 C. AC-1 Trim AC-2 Trim The three-staged AC-3 Trim is used for differential pressures up to 100 bar. Optionally, stellited hard facings or hardened trims are available. Metal bellows seal Insulating section The application range of a standard packing can be extended to an operating temperature of less than 10 C or over +220 C by using an insulating section. Type 3251 with AC-3 Trim Silencer The silencer acts as a fixed restriction that can be installed downstream of the valve with one to five attenuation plates for applications with gases or vapors. The silencer increases the backpressure downstream of the valve which leads to a reduction in the valve outlet velocity and sound pressure level. Insulating section Type 3381 Silencer attached to Type 3241 Valve Sandwich version for mounting between flanges when one attenuation plate is used Body accommodating 2 to 5 attenuation plates that can be flanged onto a valve Extended nominal size of the outlet The temperature ranges of the various valves series are: Series 240 200... +450 C Long insulating section 50... +450 C Short insulating section Series 250 200... +500 C Series 280 max. +500 C The temperature ranges specified above may be restricted by the materials used as per the pressure-temperature diagram (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN). Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 23

Heating jacket Some process media only flow easily above a certain temperature. Below this temperature they start to solidify or crystallize out. The valve bodies are fitted with a heating jacket to ensure that the process medium remains at a certain temperature and can flow freely. The valve bonnet may also be equipped with a heating jacket when the plug stem is sealed by a bellows seal. Class Types 3241, 3251, 3254, 3281 and 3284 Globe Valves 600 DIN EN 558-2, Series 39 (ISA 75.03) 900 ASME B 16.10, Class 900, column 5 1500 ASME B 16.10, Class 1500, column 5 2500 ASME B 16.10. Class 2500, column 4 Type 3256 and Type 3286 Angle Valve 125/150 DIN EN 558-2, Series 40 250/300 DIN EN 558-2, Series 41 600 DIN EN 558-2, Series 42 900 ASME B 16.10, Class 900, column 7 1500 ASME B 16.10, Class 1500, column 7 2500 ASME B 16.10, Class 2500, column 6 Versions with welding-neck ends are not standardized. Consult SAMSON first concerning their face-to-face dimensions.. Type 3241 with heating jacket and with bellows heating A heat transfer medium flowing between valve body and heating jacket ensures that the process medium is kept at a certain temperature. If steam is used as heating transfer medium, proper condensate discharge must be ensured. Versions with connecting flange heating or enlargened connecting flanges for the body are available on request. Face-to-face dimensions SAMSON control valves with flanges have the same face-to-face dimensions as valves with welding ends. The face-to-face dimensions are defined according to DIN EN as follows: Types 3241, 3251, 3254, 3281 and 3284 PN Globe Valves 10... 40 DIN EN 558-1, Series 1 63...100 DIN EN 558-1, Series 2 160 DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F2 250 DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F3 320 DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F3 400 Consistent with ASME B16.10 Class 2500, column 4 Type 3256 and Type 3286 Angle Valves 10... 40 DIN EN 558-1, Series 8 63...100 DIN EN 558-1, Series 9 160 DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F 33 250 0.5 x values from DIN 3202 Part 1 320 (edition 09.84), Series F 3 400 Consistent with ASME B16.10, Class 2500, column 4 (halved values) ANSI valves with flanges or welding ends Types 3241, 3251, 3254, 3281 and 3284 Class Globe Valves 125/150 DIN EN 558-2, Series 37 (Class 150: ISA 75.03) 250/300 DIN EN 558-2, Series 38 (ISA 75.03) Types of pipe connections Flanged connections are most frequently used in industrial plants as they allow easy mounting and removal of valves and their milled facings provide excellent sealing reliability and quality. A summary of DIN flanges, their connection dimensions and types of flange faces for valves up to PN 100 is provided in DIN EN 1092-1 and 1092-2, for valves with PN 160 or higher in DIN 2500, DIN 2501, and DIN 2526. The standard version of SAMSON valves has flanges with raised faces in Form B1. Other flange forms are available on request. DIN flanges in Form B1 (Raised Face) Form C (Tongue) Form D (Groove) Form E (Male Face) Form F (Female Face) The US standard for flanges is ANSI/ASME B16.1 for Class 125 and ANSI/ASME B16.5 for higher pressure ratings. The standard version of cast iron valves with a pressure rating of Class 125 has flanges with flat faces. Valves with a pressure rating of Class 300 have flanges with raised faces (0.06 height), and valves with higher pressure ratings have flanges with raised faces (0.25 height). Other versions are possible. More details available on request. For critical process media and/or high pressure ratings, the valve bodies can be supplied with welding ends or welding-neck ends. 24 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

For control valves according to DIN standards, the welding ends conform to EN 12627. For control valves according to US standards, the welding ends are specified in ASME/ANSI B16.25. For installation methods according to US standards, valves of the Series 240 are available with NPT female thread in sizes ½ to 2. Valve-specific parameters K VS coefficient The necessary K V coefficient is calculated according to DIN EN 60534 from the specified operating data. The K VS coefficient is specified in the data sheets to identify the valves. It corresponds to the K V coefficient at the rated travel H 100. In order to increase control accuracy and with regard to manufacturing tolerances, the selected K VS coefficient must be higher than the K V coefficient. Inherent characteristic The characteristic shows the relationship between the K V flow coefficient and the travel (H). Control valves are either designed with an equal percentage (2) or with a linear (1) characteristic. The equal percentage characteristic can be identified by equal increments of travel that yield equal percentage increments of the K V flow coefficient. Whereas, in a linear characteristic, equal increments of travel yield equal increments of the K V flow coefficient. Rangeability The rangeability is the quotient of K VS /K VR. K VR being the smallest K V where the characteristic still lies within the permissible gradient tolerance of the characteristic (DIN EN 60534 Part 2-4). Valve characteristic: 1- linear, 2 - equal percentage Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 25

Actuators Actuators convert the control signal issued, for example, by a positioner into a travel motion carried out by the control valve (plug stem with valve plug). We supply pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators as well as hand-operated actuators (see Information Sheet T 8300 EN). Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator Pneumatic actuators These are used for pneumatic or electropneumatic control equipment. Pneumatic actuators are diaphragm actuators with a rolling diaphragm and internally fitted springs. The benefits of pneumatic actuators include their low overall height, strong positioning force and fast response. Different signal pressure ranges are available. Pneumatic actuators are suitable for use in hazardous areas as well as featuring a fail-safe action: Upon air supply failure, the control valve is either closed or opened. The Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuators allow direct attachment of positioners or limit switches. This prevent the travel linkage from being misaligned as it is located within the yoke below the actuator housing. Pneumatic actuators can additionally be equipped with a handwheel (see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN). Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with additional handwheel Type 3275 Pneumatic Piston Actuator Electric actuators If compressed air is not available, electric actuators with strong positioning forces and large travels may be used. These actuators are self-locking. Electric actuators are connected to three-point stepping controllers, electric positioners issuing analog signals or over a reversing contactor unit (see T 8330 EN). Type 3374 Electric Actuator Electrohydraulic actuators These actuators are connected to an analog signal via three-point stepping controllers or electric positioners. Versions with fail-safe action are available (see T 8340 EN). Hand-operated actuators They are attached to Series 240 and 250 Control Valves which are used as hand-operated control valves with rated travels of 15 or 30 mm (see T 8312 EN). Hand-operated actuators with larger travels are available on request (Type 3273-5/6). Type SAM Electric Actuator with manual override Type 3274 Electrohydraulic Actuator Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator 26 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Accessories for control valves SAMSON control valves can be equipped with several additional accessories. These accessories are, for example, used for actuator control and travel indication. They are attached either according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR rib) or directly in conjunction with the Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (see T 8310-1 EN). For direct attachment, the entire travel linkage is located in a closed housing in order to prevent contamination, misalignment as well as personal injury (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Positioners Positioners (p/p or i/p) compare the signal of pneumatic or electric control equipment to the travel (manipulated variable) of the control valve. They issue a pneumatic signal pressure as the output variable. The positioners can be used in standard operation or in split-range operation (see T 8351 EN ff.). Positioners from the Series 3730 include an integrated firmware for valve diagnostics which issue alerts for predictive maintenance action (EXPERT and EXPERT +, see T 8388 EN). Smart versions (HART, PROFIBUS-PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus) are configured and operated using a PC or handheld terminal (see T 8380/-82/-83/-84 EN). SAMSON s own TROVIS-VIEW software serves as a standard operator interface to operate these smart positioners (see T 6661 EN). Limit switch, position transmitter or potentiometer Type 3730-2 Positioner Solenoid valve Limit switches Whenever an adjustable limit value is exceeded or not reached, a signal is issued. Inductive limit switches are frequently used. However, versions with electric or pneumatic microswitches are also available (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN). Position transmitter/potentiometer To indicate the travel position of a control valve, the rated travel range is represented by an analog electric signal (see T 8363 EN). Solenoid valves The binary signals from control equipment are converted into binary pneumatic control signals. As a result, the control valve can quickly be brought into its final position. The solenoid valves are used for on-off valves or for control valves with fail-safe position (e.g. Type 3241 typetested, T 8016 EN; T 3701 EN). Lock-up valve Pneumatic remote adjuster Lock-up valve If the supply air pressure falls below an adjusted value, the signal pressure line is shut off. When this happens, the actuator stops in its last position (see T 8391 EN). Pneumatic remote adjuster Manually adjustable precision regulator for the set point adjustment of pneumatic control equipment. Supply pressure regulators Supply pressure regulators provide pneumatic control valves with a constant air pressure (adjustable between 0 and 6 bar) (see T 8546 EN). Supply pressure regulator with air filter They consist of a supply pressure regulator and an air filter holding back foreign particles, oil and/or condensate (see T 8546 EN). Supply pressure regulator without and with air filter Pneumatic volume booster The actuating time can be made shorter for fast control loops by using pneumatic volume boosters. Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 27

Valve sizing Calculating the K V coefficient The K V coefficient is calculated according to DIN EN 60534. The data sheets contain the necessary device-specific specifications. A preliminary, simplified calculation may be made with the help of the working equations listed below. They do not take into account the influence of the connecting fittings or choked flow at critical flow velocities. Selecting the valve After calculating the K V coefficient, the corresponding K VS coefficient of the valve type in question is selected from the data sheet. In case, real operating data are used in the calculation, the following generally applies: K vmax 0.7 to 0.8 K VS. p 1 Pressure upstream of the valve p 2 Pressure downstream of the valve H Travel Q Flow rate in m 3 /h W Flow rate in kg/h ρ Density in kg/m 3 (generally also with liquids) ρ 1 Upstream density in kg/m 3 (with gases and vapors) t 1 Temperature in C upstream of the valve Medium Liquids Gases Steam Pressure drops m 3 /h kg/h m 3 /h kg/h kg/h p 2 > p1 2 Δp < p1 2 p 2 < p1 2 Δp > p1 2 K V = Q ρ 1000 Δp K V = W 1000 ρδp K V = QG 519 ρg T1 Δpp2 K V = W 519 ρg QG W K V = ρg T1 K 2595. p V = 1 2595. p1 T1 Δpp T ρ 1 G 2 K V = W 3162. K V = W 3162. v 2 Δp 2v * p1 Including: p 1 [bar] Absolute pressure p abs p 2 [bar] Absolute pressure p abs Δp [bar] Absolute pressure p abs T 1 [K] 273 + t 1 Q G [m 3 /h] Flow rate of gas, based on 0 C and 1013 mbar ρ [kg/m 3 ] Density of liquids ρ G [kg/m 3 ] Density of gases at 0 C and 1013 mbar v 1 [m 3 /kg] Specific volume (v from steam table) for p 1 and t 1 v 2 [m 3 /kg] Specific volume (v from steam table) for p 2 and t 1 v* [m 3 /kg] Specific volume (v from steam table) for p1 2 and t1 28 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Noise prediction x Fz factor The valve-specific x Fz factor is measured on the valve test bench and provides the basis for noise prediction. When the load of the valve is y = 0.75, this factor indicates the pressure ratio at which cavitation begins. Table 3a Series 240 0.1 0.16 K VS 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 35 60 63 80 100 160 200 250 260 360 630 1000 1500 Seat mm 3 6 12 24 31 38 48 63 80 100 110 125 130 150 200 250 300 Travel mm 15 30 15 30 60 30 60 120 DN x Fz Acoustically determined valve factor 15 0.8 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.6 0.55 20 0.8 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.45 25 0.8 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.45 0.4 32 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.55 0.5 0.45 0.4 40 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.55 0.5 0.45 0.4 0.35 50 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.55 0.5 0.45 0.4 0.35 0.35 65 0.35 0.35 0.25 80 0.35 0.35 0.25 0.25 100 0.25 0.25 0.2 125 0.25 0.2 0.2 150 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 200 0.2 0.2 0.2 250 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 300 0.2 0.2 Table 3b Series 250 0.1 0.16 K VS 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 360 630 1000 1500 2000 2500 Seat mm 6 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 Travel mm 15 30 60 120 DN x Fz Acoustically determined valve factor 15 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.6 0.55 25 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.45 0.4 40 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.5 0.45 0.4 0.35 50 0.6 0.55 0.5 0.45 0.5 0.4 0.35 80 0.55 0.5 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.35 0.25 0.25 100 0.55 0.45 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.25 150 0.3 0.25 0.25 0.2 200 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 250 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 300 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 400 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 29

Gases and vapors The noise emission of single-stage and multi-stage control valves for gases is determined according to DIN EN 60534, Part 8-3. This calculation method, however, does not apply to control valves with noise-reducing equipment such as flow dividers St I and St III. In this case, the calculation must be carried out according to VDMA 24422, Edition 89. The calculation is based upon the jet power reached on expansion. The noise emission is determined by means of an acoustical conversion coefficient η G. Diagram 1 illustrates the difference between the conversion coefficients depending on the differential pressure ratio. This clearly shows the level difference of the internal sound powers and the sound pressure levels to be expected at one meter distance from the pipeline. For a differential pressure ratio of, for example, x = 0.5, the difference in sound pressure levels between a valve with and without flow divider is 20 db. Liquids The noise emission on throttling liquids is calculated according to DIN EN 60534, Part 8-4. This calculation is consistent with the calculation according to VDMA 24422, Edition 89. It is based on the jet power reached in the valve and also on the valve-specific acoustical conversion coefficient η F empirically determined according to VDMA 24423 for turbulent flows as well as the valve-specific pressure ratio x Fz at the beginning of cavitation. The sound power level and the sound level difference at a distance of 1 m for the valves with different x Fz values can be seen in the diagram 2. For a pressure ratio of x F = 0.5, and a valve with x Fz = 0.6, the sound level which is 20 db less than that of a valve with x Fz = 0.3. η G 0 [db] -20 1-40 -60 2 3 1 - Without flow divider 2 - With flow divider St I 3 - With flow divider St III -80-100 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 x Diagram 1 x Fz Diagram 2 30 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Materials conforming to DIN and ANSI/ASME The body materials mainly used and their temperature limits are listed in the table below. The application limits of these materials are included in the associated pressure-temperature diagram in the second part of this Information Sheet (T 8000-2 EN). Table 4 Materials Designation EN material Standard Temp. range [ C] Cast iron EN-GJL-250 EN-JL1040 DIN EN 1561 10... +300 A 126 B ASTM 29 +232 FC 250 JIS Spheroidal graphite iron EN-GJS400-18U-LT EN-JS1049 DIN EN 1563 10... +350 Cast steel (carbon steel) GP240GH 1.0619 DIN EN 10... +400 1) G20Mn5 1.6220 10213-3 40... +300 G17CrMo5-5 1.7357 DIN EN 10213-2 10... +500 2) G12CrMo9-10 1.7380 SEW 595 10... +500 2) A 216 WCC ASTM 29... +427 A 352 LCC ASTM 46... +343 A 217 WC6 ASTM 29... 500 2) A 217 WC9 ASTM 29... +500 2) Consistent with ASTM JIS 29... +427 Cast stainless steel GX5CrNi19-10 1.4308 200 +300 DIN EN GX5CrNi- 1.4581 10213-4 10... +450 MoNb19-11-2 2) A 351 CF 8 ASTM 200 +300 A 351 CF 8M ASTM 200... +450 2) Consistent with ASTM JIS 200... +450 Forged steel P250GH 1.0460 DIN EN 10222-2 10... +400 1) A 105 ASTM 29... +427 Forged stainless steel X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 1.4571 DIN EN 10222-5 200... +450 A 182 F316 ASTM 200... +450 1) Up to 60 C at p max 75 % PN (acc. to AD W10) 2) Higher application temperatures on request Selection and ordering Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the required K V coefficient according to DIN EN 60534. You may use, for example, the SAMSON valve sizing software. This sizing usually is carried out by SAMSON. If real operating data are used for the calculation, the following generally applies: K Vmax = 0.7 to 0.8 K VS. 2. Select the K VS coefficient and the nominal size DN according to the table in the corresponding data sheet. 3. Select the appropriate valve characteristic on the basis of the behavior of the controlled system. 4. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp and select an appropriate actuator using the differential pressure tables included in the associated data sheet. 5. Select the materials to be used with regard to corrosion, erosion, pressure and temperature using the materials tables and the associated pressure-temperature diagram. 6. Select the additional equipment, such as positioners and/ or limit switches. Ordering text The following details are required on ordering: Type of valve... *) Nominal size DN... *) Nominal pressure PN... *) Body material... *) Type of end Flanges/welding ends/ connections welding-neck ends Plug *) Standard, pressure-balanced, With metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Hard facing Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Pneumatic Actuator Version acc. to T 8310-1/-2 EN Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or OPEN Transit time (Specifications only for special positioning time requirements) Process medium Density in kg/m 3 in standard or operating state and temperature in C Flow rate in kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories: Positioner and/or limit switch, position transmitter, solenoid valve, lock-up valve, volume booster, supply pressure regulator *) When no specifications are made, a suggestion is provided by SAMSON Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09 31

Specification sheet for control valves Specification sheet for control valves according to DIN EN 60534-7 - Details that must be specified to select and size the valve 1 Site of installation 2 Control task 7 Pipeline DN... PN... Class... 8 Pipe material 12 Process medium 13 State at the valve inlet - Liquid - Vapor - Gas 15 Operating data 16 Flow rate 17 Inlet pressure p 1 18 Output pressure p 2 19 Temperature T 1 Min. Usual Max. Unit 20 Input density ρ 1 or M 21 Vapor pressure Pv 22 Critical pressure Pc 23 Kinematic viscosity v 31 Calculation of max. flow coefficient K V 32 Calculation of min. flow coefficient K V 33 Selected flow coefficient K VS 34 Calculated sound pressure level db(a) 35 Type... Valve 36 Valve body style 38 Nominal pressure PN... 39 Nominal size DN... 40 Type of end connections - Flange - Welding ends - Weld-neck ends - DIN / -ANSI 43 Type of bonnet - Normal - Insulating section - Bellows seal - Heating jacket Valve body 45 Body/bonnet material 47 Characteristic - Linear - Equal percentage 48 Plug/plug stem material 49 Bushing/seat material 52 Hard facing - None - Partially stellited - Solid Stellite - Hardened 54 Leakage class -%K VS - Class... 55 Packing material - Standard - Form... 57 Actuator type - Pneumatic 60 Effective area cm 2 62 Supply pressure Min.... Max.... 63 Bench range Actuator 64 Fail-safe action - Fail Close - Fail Open - Fail in Position 66 Other type of actuator - Electric - Electrohydraulic - Hand-operated 67 Fail-safe position for three-way valve 68 Additional manual override - No - Yes 70 Positioner 71 Input signal - Pneumatic - Electric Positioner 72 Control valve OPEN at bar ma 73 Control valve CLOSED at bar ma 76 Air connection max. bar 78 Explosion protection - EEx i - EEx d 80 Limit switch Type of limit switch 81 Limit switch - Electric - Inductive - Pneumatic 82 Switching position - CLOSED - % travel - OPEN 83 Switching function - Closing - Opening 84 Explosion protection - EEx i - EEx d 86 Type of solenoid valve 87 Style - 2-way - 3-way Sol. valve 88 If power fails, the valve should be - OPEN - CLOSED - Last position 91 Electric data V Hz W 32 Information Sheet T 8000-1 EN 2007-09

Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Series 250 Pneumatic and electric control valves for process engineering and industrial applications Valve size: DN 15 to DN 500 NPS 1 2 to NPS 20 Pressure rating: PN 16 to PN 400 Class 150 to Class 2500 Temperature: Up to 500 C Up to 930 F 33

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 Globe Valve Type 3251 Application Control valve for processing engineering applications with high industrial requirements Nominal size DN 15 to 200 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 Temperature 200 to +500 C Type 3251 Globe Valve operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3251-1 Control Valve) Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3251-7 Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body optionally made of: Cast steel or Stainless cast steel High-temperature or cold-resisting cast steel Low-noise valve plug With metal sealing With soft sealing or Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures. The control valves have a modular-assembly design and can be equipped with various accessories as follows: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and further accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendations. Refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN for more details. Versions Standard version with PTFE packing suitable for temperature ranges from 10 to 220 C, or with adjustable high-temperature packing suitable for 10 to 350 C, nominal size DN 15 to DN 200, nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Type 3251-1 (Fig. 1) Type 3251 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with an effective area of 350 to 2800 cm 2 (see Data Sheets T 8310-1/-2 EN) Type 3251-7 Type 3251 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with an effective area of 350 or 700 cm 2 (see T 8310-1 EN) Additional versions with Nominal pressures PN >160 to 400 On request Welding ends or welding-neck ends acc. DIN EN 12 627 Flow divider For noise level reduction, see T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8082 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Additional handwheel See T 8310-1/-2 EN ANSI version NPS 1 2 to 8, ANSI Class 300 to 2500 (see Data Sheet T 8052 EN) Fig. 1 Type 3251-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Type 2351-3 Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel (see Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type 3251-2 Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01 35

Principle of operation The process medium flows in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow. Versions with metal bellows seal (Fig. 4) have a test connection which allows the stainless steel bellows to be monitored. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves may be supplied with Flow Dividers St I or St III (refer to Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe positions Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which are activated upon air supply failure. "Actuator stem extends" (fail-close): Upon air supply failure the force of the compression springs causes the valve to be closed. "Actuator stem retracts" (fail-open): Upon air supply failure the force of the compression springs causes the valve to be opened. Fig. 3 Type 3251 Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow divider St I Fig. 2 Type 3251-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3251 Valve with Flow Divider St I and additional metal bellows seal with test connection 36 Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01

Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3251 Globe Valve Material Stainless cast steel Cast steel 1.0619 Cast steel 1.7357 1.4581 Nominal size 1) DN 15... 200 1) 15... 100 150... 200 Nominal pressure PN 16... 160 2) 16... 160 2) 16... 160 16... 100 2) End connection Flanges All DIN EN versions Welding ends DIN EN 12 627 Plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Valve body without insulating section 10... 220 Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Valve body with Insulating section 10... 400 10... 500 10... 450 Bellows seal 10... 400 10... 500 10... 450 Valve plug 3) Standard With metal sealing 200... 500 With soft sealing 200... 220 Balanced PTFE ring 200... 220 Graphite ring 220... 500 Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Valve plug Standard With metal sealing IV With soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 Balanced With metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) Nominal size DN 200 in PN 63 to 100 2) Up to PN 400 on request 3) Only in combination with a suitable body material Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body and flanges 1) Cast steel 1.0619 Cast steel 1.7357 Stainless cast steel 1.4581 Seat and plug 2) With metal sealing 1.4006/1.4008 1.4571/1.4581 Seal ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 2.4610 Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE with carbon, spring of 1.4310 or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 1.7335 1.4571 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 1.7335 1.4571 Metal bellows 1.4571 Heating jacket 1.4541 1) See also Pressure-Temperature Diagrams (T 8000-2 EN). Materials suitable for temperatures over 500 C: 1.7380; suitable for cryogenic applications: 1.6220 or 1.4308. 2) Seats and plugs with metal sealing are also available either stellited or plug made of solid Stellite. Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01 37

Table 3 K vs coefficients available Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Dividers St I (K vsi) and St III (K vsiii) Kvs 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 360 630 KvsI 1.45 2.2 3.6 5.7 9 14.5 22 36 57 90 144 225 320 560 KvsIII 3 4.8 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 270 Seat mm 6 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 125 150 200 Rated travel mm 15 30 60 Table 3b Versions without flow divider Kvs 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 360 630 DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I KvsI 1.45 2.2 3.6 5.7 9 14.5 22 36 57 90 144 225 320 560 DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III KvsIII 3.0 4.8 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 270 DN 50* 80 100 150 200 * Version DN 50 and St III not available with bellows seal. 38 Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to the maximum Values in parentheses apply to half rated travel Table 4a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) 350 0.4...1.2 Bench range 700 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 0.4...2.0 (bar) (0.8...1.2) for actuator 1400 (cm 2 ) 2800 0.4...1.2 0.8...2.4 1.0...3.0 2x2800 (0.8...1.2) (1.6...2.4) (2.0...3.0) Required supply pressure DN 15 to 40 50 40 to 80 40 to 100 50 to 100 80 to 150 80 to 150 100 to 150 Kvs 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 to 2.5 4 to 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 200 160 100 to 150 250 200 250 150 360 200 360 200 630 0.8...2.4 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 0.6...3.0 0.5...2.5 0.9...1.6 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.1...1.8 (1.25...1.6) 1.4...2.3 (1.85...2.3) 1.1...2.4 1.0...2.1 Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 2.1...3.3 (2.7...3.3) 1.4...2.7 (2.05...2.7) 1.25...2.35 (1.55...2.1) 2.35...3.8 (3.05...3.8) 1.3...2.8 1.1...2.6 2.6...4.3 (3.45...4.3) 1.7...3.2 (2.45...3.2) 1.5...3.0 (1.85...2.6) 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 8.7 22.4 22.4 50.5 36.6 78.4 92.3 141 700 (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) 350 8.1 22 22 49.9 35.9 77.7 91.7 140 700 (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) 350 4.3 12.7 12.7 29.4 21 45.1 54.4 83.6 700 (62.7) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) 350 8.1 8.1 19.2 13.6 30.3 35.8 55.3 700 (41.4) (85.8) (130) (99.7) (147) (166) (188) 700 4.3 10.7 10.7 23.6 17.1 36.4 42.8 65.3 73.3 81.3 1400 (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) 700 6.3 6.3 14.4 10.4 22.5 26.5 40.7 45.7 50.8 1400 (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) 700 8.7 6.2 13.7 16.3 25 28.2 31.3 1400 (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) 700 5.4 8.7 10.3 15.9 17.9 19.9 1400 (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) 700 5.4 8.6 10.2 15.8 17.8 19.8 1400 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) 1400 7.5 4.4 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.6 16.7 2800 (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) 1400 7.4 4.3 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.4 8.7 11.5 2800 (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.3 8.6 11.5 2800 (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) 1400 4 5.2 4.7 6.4 2800 (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01 39

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Table 4b Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) 350 Bench range 700 (bar) 0.2... 1.0 for actuator 1400 (0.2... 0.6) (cm 2 ) 2800 2x2800 Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp at p2 = 0 15 to 40 50 40 to 80 40 to 100 50 to 100 80 to 150 80 to 150 100 to 150 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 to 2.5 4 to 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 200 160 150 250 200 250 150 360 200 360 200 630 350 102 380 400 350 101 380 400 350 22.4 92.1 203 343 700 (106) (245) (400) 350 21.6 91.3 203 342 700 (105) (244) (400) 350 12.4 54.2 121 204 700 (62.5) (146) (280) 350 7.9 35.7 80.1 136 700 (41) (97) (185) 700 10.6 42.7 94.1 158 1400 (49) (113) (216) 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 1400 (30.4) (71) (135) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) 700 10.2 23 39.1 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) 700 10.0 22.9 38.9 1400 (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) 1400 13.6 30 50.6 2800 (15.6) (36.2) (69) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (69) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) 1400 9.4 20.8 35 2800 (10.8) (25) (47.8) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) 1400 5.1 11.5 19.5 2800 (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) Notes regarding the differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Version including valve plug with metal sealing Version including PTFE packing Table 4a and 4b apply to unbalanced valve plugs with a downstream pressure of p 2 = 0 For the maximum differential pressure listed and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate specified in Table 1 is not exceeded All pressures in bar (gauge pressure) The differential pressures specified in Tables 4a and 4b can be restricted by the pressure-temperature diagram. Note regarding the fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": Always use pre-tensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft-sealing plugs or lapped-in metals plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug including a graphite ring are available on request. 40 Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to the maximum Values in parentheses apply to half rated travel Table 5a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 2800 2x2800 0.4...2.0 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 0.5...2.5 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 5b "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) 0.4... 2.0 (0.4... 1.2) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 Actuator DN Kvs cm 2 Δp at p2 = 0 80 700 57.4 155 106 252 57.4 400 63 100 1400 (400) (400) (400) 150 63 80 100 100 150 100 100 160 150 160 200 160 150 250 200 250 150 360 200 360 200 630 700 22.2 62.1 42.2 102 22.2 182 382 1400 (302) (381) (221) (400) 700 48.1 146 96.8 243 48.1 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 18.4 58.3 38.4 98.3 18.4 178 378 1400 (298) (378) (218) (400) 700 37.2 135 85.9 232 37.2 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 13.9 53.8 33.9 93.8 13.9 174 373 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) 700 4.6 20.2 12.4 35.8 4.6 67 145 1400 (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 1400 48.3 128 68.2 168 48.3 368 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 299 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) 1400 42.6 123 62.6 162 42.7 362 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.3 109 265 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) 1400 11.4 42.6 19.2 58.2 11.4 136 292 2800 (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01 41

Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 in standard version Valve DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Length L PN 10... 40 130 160 200 230 310 350 480 600 PN 63...160 210 230 260 300 380 430 550 650 350 cm 2 392 392 404 457 462 482 Height H1 700 cm 2 392 392 404 457 462 482 732 805 for actuator area 1400 cm 2 512 517 537 732 805 2800 cm 2 722 817 890 Height H2 (with foot PN 10... 40 50 60 80 90 100 160 220 250 for DN 100 or larger) PN 63...160 60 70 90 100 120 180 235 270 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm D 280 390 530 770 Height H 1) 82 196 287 617 1134 Height H3 2) 110 190 610 650 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) a2 (for Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) 1) Actuator area 350 cm 2 2) without lifting ring Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly Table 7 Weights for Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 in standard version Valve DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Valve w/o actuator PN 16... 40 15.5 17.5 21.5 38 59 78 201 427 (approx. kg) PN 63...160 20 25 30.5 54 89 116 334 642 w/o Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 handwheel 8 22 70 450 950 (approx. kg) 1) w. handwheel 13 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Type 3277 w/o handwheel 12 26 (approx. kg) 1) w. handwheel 17 31 1) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel H3 ØD a Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a H 100 a2 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L Type 3251-1 Type 3251-7 42 Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01

Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Height H4 for actuator area Weight (kg) w/o actuator for 350 cm 2 593 593 605 727 732 752 700 cm 2 593 593 605 727 732 752 1083 1365 1400 cm 2 782 787 807 1083 1365 2800 cm 2 992 1168 1450 PN 16... 40 19.5 21.5 24 44 65 84 237 492 PN 63...160 24 29 33 60 95 122 370 707 Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Height H4 for PN 16... 40 for actuator area Height H4 for PN 63... 160 for actuator area Weight (kg) w/o actuator for 350 cm 2 590 590 602 836 841 841 700 cm 2 590 590 602 836 841 841 1139 1455 1400 cm 2 891 896 896 1139 1455 2800 cm 2 1081 1224 1540 350 cm 2 590 590 602 836 841 841 700 cm 2 590 590 602 836 841 841 1271 1855 1400 cm 2 891 896 896 1271 1855 2800 cm 2 1081 1356 1940 PN 16... 40 20 22 24 45 66 85 242 532 PN 63...160 25 30 34 61 96 123 375 768 a b H4 c a a b d L Type 3251 with bellows seal or insulating section Type 3251 with heating jacket Dimensions on request Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01 43

Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the K v coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size DN and the K vs coefficient from Tables 3 to 5. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Tables 4 and 5. 4. Select the body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as from the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN. 5. Select additional equipment from Tables 1 and 2. Please submit the following details when ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 Type of connection Flanges/Welding ends Plug Standard/balanced lapped-in metal, with soft sealing or with metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h under normal or operating conditions Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs), for minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 44 Data Sheet T 8051 EN 2008-01

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 Globe Valve Type 3251 ANSI version Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements Valve sizes NPS 1 2 to 8 Pressure rating ANSI Class 150 to Class 2500 Temperatures 200 to 500 C ( 325 to 930 F) Type 3251 Globe Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3251-1 Control Valve) Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3251-7 Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body optionally made of: Carbon steel Stainless carbon steel or High-temperature or cold-resisting carbon steel Low-noise valve plugs optionally with: Metal sealing Soft sealing or Lapped-in metal sealing Balanced for handling large differential pressures The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 428 F) or with adjustable high-temperature (HT) packing for temperatures for 10 to 350 C (15 to 660 F), valve sizes NPS 1 2 to 8, ANSI Class 150 to 900 Type 3251-1 (Fig. 1) Type 3251 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 350 to 2800 cm 2 effective areas (see Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN) Type 3251-7 Type 3251 Valve with Type 3277 Actuator with 350 or 700 cm 2 effective areas (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN) Further versions with Class 1500 and 2500 On request Welding ends or welding-neck ends acc. ANSI B16.25 Flow divider For noise level reduction, see T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8083 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Additional handwheel See T 8310-1/-2 EN DIN version DN 15 to 200, nominal pressure PN 16 to 400, see Data Sheet T 8051 EN Fig. 1 Type 3251-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Type 3251-3 Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel, see Data Sheet T 8312 EN Type 3251-2 Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01 45

Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug position determines the cross-sectional area of flow. The version with the metal bellows seal (Fig. 4) is equipped with a test connection to allow the monitoring of the stainless steel bellows. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves can be equipped with a Flow Divider St I or St III (Fig. 4, see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe positions Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for details), the control valve offers two different fail-safe positions effective upon air supply failure: "Actuator stem extends" (fail-close): Upon air supply failure, the force of the compression springs causes the valve to close. "Actuator stem retracts" (fail-open): Upon air supply failure, the force of the compression springs causes the valve to open. Fig. 3 Type 3251 Globe Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow Divider St I Fig. 2 Type 3251-1 Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3251 Globe Valve with Flow Divider St I and additional metal bellows seal with test connection 46 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01

Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3251 Globe Valve Materials Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Valve sizes NPS 1 2... 6 NPS 8 in Class 600 Pressure rating 1) Class 150... 900 End connection Flanges All ANSI versions Welding ends Acc. to ANSI B 16.25 Plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Temperature ranges in C ( F) Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Valve body without insulating section 10 220 C (14 428 F) Up to 350 C (660 F) with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 29...427 C ( 20...800 F) 29...500 C ( 20...930 F) 200...450 C ( 325...842 F) Bellows seal 29...427 C ( 20...800 F) 29...500 C ( 20...930 F) 200...450 C ( 325...842 F) Valve plug 2) Standard Metal sealing 200...500 C ( 325...930 F) Soft sealing 200...220 C ( 325...428 F) Balanced PTFE ring 200...220 C ( 325...428 F) Graphite ring 220...500 C ( 428...930 F) Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 / ANSI/FCI 70-2-1991 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing IV Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 NPS 4 and larger IV-S1 Balanced, metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) Up to Class 2500 on request. 2) Only in combination with a suitable body material. Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body and flanges 1) Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Seat and plug 2) Metal sealing 1.4006/1.4008 1.4571/1.4581 Seal ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 2.4610 Stuffing box packing V-ring packing, PTFE with carbon, spring of 1.4310 or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows 1.4571 Heating jacket 1.4541 1) See also Pressure-Temperature Diagram (T 8000-2 EN); material for cryogenic service: A 352 LCC. 2) All seats and plugs with metal sealing also available stellited or plug made of solid Stellite. 3) Depending on the valve bonnet material. Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01 47

Table 3 C v and K vs coefficients Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (C v I/K vs I) and St III (Cv III/K vs III) Cv 0.12 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.75 1.2 2 3 5 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 290 420 735 Kvs 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 360 630 Cv I 1.7 2.6 4.2 7 10.5 17 26 42 67 105 170 265 375 650 Kvs I 1.45 2.2 3.6 5.7 9 14.5 22 36 57 90 144 225 320 560 Cv III 3.5 5.6 9 14 23 35 55 90 140 220 315 Kvs III 3 4.8 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 270 Seat mm 6 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 125 150 200 Rated travel mm 15 30 60 in 0.5 1.18 2.36 Table 3b Versions without flow divider Cv 0.12 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.75 1.2 2 3 5 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 290 420 735 NPS DN 1 2 15 1 25 1 1 2 40 2 50 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I Cv I 1.7 2.6 4.2 7 10.5 17 26 42 67 105 170 265 375 650 NPS DN 1 2 15 1 25 1 1 2 40 2 50 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III Cv III 3.5 5.6 9 14 23 35 55 90 140 220 315 NPS DN 2* 50 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 * NPS 2 version (DN 50) and St III not available with bellows seal 48 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01

Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Valve plug with metal sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b apply to unbalanced valve plug with a downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar (psi) For the maximum differential pressures listed and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded All pressures mentioned are in bar and psi The differential pressure stated can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram (see T 8000-2 EN). Overview: Valve versions of the Δp tables Table 4a and 4b: Valve with unbalanced plug without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Table 5a and 5b: Valve with balanced plug with PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" or "Valve OPEN" Table 6a and 6b: Valve with unbalanced plug without metal bellows seal; "Valve OPEN" Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft sealing or lapped-in metal plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug with graphite ring are available on request. Note on fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": Always use pretensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01 49

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Pressures in bar The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) 350 700 1400 0.2...1.0 2800 2x2800 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm 2 1 2 to 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 to 3 1 1 2 to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to 6 0.12 to 1.2 2 to 3 5 to 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 0.4...1.2 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.4...2.0 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 0.8...2.4 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 0.6...3.0 0.5...2.5 0.9...1.6 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.1...1.8 (1.25...1.6) 1.4...2.3 (1.85...2.3) 1.1...2.4 Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Δp when p2 = 0 bar 2.1...3.3 (2.7...3.3) 1.4...2.7 (2.05...2.7) 1.0...2.1 1.25...2.35 (1.55...2.1) 2.35...3.8 (3.05...3.8) 1.3...2.8 1.1...2.6 2.6...4.3 (3.45...4.3) 1.7...3.2 (2.45...3.2) 1.5...3.0 (1.85...2.6) 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 8.7 22.4 22.4 50.5 36.6 78.4 92.3 141 700 (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) 350 8.1 22 22 49.9 35.9 77.7 91.7 140 700 (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) 350 4.3 12.7 12.7 29.4 21 45.1 54.4 83.6 700 (62.7) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) 350 8.1 8.1 19.2 13.6 30.3 35.8 55.3 700 (41.4) (85.8) (130) (99.7) (147) (166) (188) 700 4.3 10.7 10.7 23.6 17.1 36.4 42.8 65.3 73.3 81.3 1400 (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) 700 6.3 6.3 14.4 10.4 22.5 26.5 40.7 45.7 50.8 1400 (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) 700 8.7 6.2 13.7 16.3 25 28.2 31.3 1400 (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) 700 5.4 8.7 10.3 15.9 17.9 19.9 1400 (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) 700 5.4 8.6 10.2 15.8 17.8 19.8 1400 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) 1400 7.5 4.4 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.6 16.7 2800 (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) 1400 7.4 4.3 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.4 8.7 11.5 2800 (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.3 8.6 11.5 2800 (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) 1400 4 5.2 4.7 6.4 2800 (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) 50 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Pressures in psi The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) 350 700 1400 3...15 2800 2x2800 6...18 (12...18) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm 2 1 2 to 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 to 3 1 1 2 to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to 6 0.12 to 1.2 2 to 3 5 to 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 6...18 6...18 (12...18) 12...36 (23...36) 6...30 15...45 (30...45) 12...36 12...36 (23...36) 18...52 (35...52) 9...45 7...36 13...23 18...52 20...34 30...48 18...52 (35...52) 15...45 (30...45) 16...26 (18...23) Upper spring range value + 3 psi Δp when p2 = 0 psi 20...34 (27...34) 16...36 15...30 30...48 (39...48) 20...39 (30...39) 18...34 (22...30) 35...55 (44...55) 19...41 17...36 350 668 1479 1479 3088 2291 4712 5510 5800 350 668 1479 1479 3088 2291 4712 5510 5800 36...62 (50...62) 25...46 (36...46) 22...45 (27...36) 350 126 325 325 732 530 1137 1338 2044 700 (1537) (3146) (4770) (3654) (5365) (5800) 350 117 319 319 723 520 1126 1329 2030 700 (1522) (3146) (4756) (3654) (5365) (5800) 350 62 184 184 426 304 654 789 1212 700 (909) (1870) (2842) (2175) (3204) (3625) (4118) 350 117 117 278 197 439 519 801 700 (600) (1244) (1885) (1445) (2131) (2407) (2726) 700 62 155 155 342 248 527 620 947 1063 1178 1400 (713) (145) (1827) (1870) (2247) 700 91 91 209 151 326 384 590 662 736 1400 (443) (912) (1147) (1176) (1411) 700 126 90 198 236 362 409 454 1400 (272) (562) (707) (726) (871) 700 78 126 149 230 259 288 1400 (172) (358) (451) (462) (555) 700 78 124 148 224 258 287 1400 (171) (356) (449) (461) (554) 1400 108 64 137 152 197 183 242 2800 (227) (465) (584) (703) (361) (451) (539) 1400 107 62 137 152 197 181 240 2800 (226) (464) (584) (703) (361) (449) (539) 2x2800 (452) (928) (1168) (1406) (722) (899) (1079) 1400 74 94 104 136 126 166 2800 (156) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (374) 1400 74 94 104 135 125 166 2800 (155) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (372) 2x2800 (310) (644) (809) (974) (499) (623) (745) 1400 58 75 68 93 2800 (87) (180) (226) (272) (139) (174) (209) 2x2800 (174) (359) (452) (545) (278) (348) (417) Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01 51

Table 5a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in bar The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) 700 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 Bench range (bar) 1400 0.8...2.4 with actuator (cm 2 0.4...2.0 0.4... 2.0 ) (1.6...2.4) 1.0...3.0 0.5...2.5 (0.4... 1.2) 2800 (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 0.6...3.0 (2.4...3.6) 2x2800 Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 NPS Cv Actuator Δp when p2 = 0 bar cm 2 3 4 75 6 75 3 4 120 6 120 4 190 6 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 700 57.4 155 106 252 57.4 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 22.2 62.1 42.2 102 22.2 182 382 1400 (302) (381) (221) (400) 700 48.1 146 96.8 243 48.1 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 18.4 58.3 38.4 98.3 18.4 178 378 1400 (298) (378) (218) (400) 700 37.2 135 85.9 232 37.2 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 13.9 53.8 33.9 93.8 13.9 174 373 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) 700 4.6 20.2 12.4 35.8 4.6 67 145 1400 (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 1400 48.3 128 68.2 168 48.3 368 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 299 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) 1400 42.6 123 62.6 162 42.7 362 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.3 109 265 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) 1400 11.4 42.6 19.2 58.2 11.4 136 292 2800 (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) 52 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01

Table 5b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in psi The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 2800 2x2800 6...30 12...36 (23...36) 9...45 18...52 7...36 15...44 (30...45) 9...45 18...52 (36...52) 6... 30 (6... 18) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi 36 60 90 Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 psi 3 700 832 2247 1537 3654 832 5800 75 4 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) 6 75 3 4 120 6 120 4 190 6 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 700 322 900 615 1479 322 2639 5539 1400 (4379) (5524) (3204) (5800) 700 697 2117 1403 2523 697 5800 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) 700 267 845 557 1425 267 2581 5481 1400 (4321) (5481) (3161) (5800) 700 539 1957 1245 3364 539 5800 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) 700 201 780 491 1360 201 2523 5408 1400 (4248) (5408) (3088) (5800) 700 66 293 179 519 66 971 2102 1400 (1653) (2102) (1197) (3001) (5263) 1400 700 1856 989 2436 700 5336 5800 2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 1400 261 713 374 939 261 2073 4335 2800 (3422) (4321) (5234) (2523) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5046) (5800) 1400 617 1783 907 2349 619 5249 5800 2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 1400 229 681 342 907 221 1580 3842 2800 (3393) (4292) (5205) (2494) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4988) (5800) 1400 165 617 278 844 165 1972 4234 2800 (3335) (4234) (5133) (2421) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4843) (5800) Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01 53

Table 6 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" 350 Table 6a Pressures in bar Table 6b Pressures in psi Nominal bench 700 0.2... 1.0 3... 15 range in bar/psi 1400 with actuator (cm 2 (0.2... 0.6) (3... 9) ) 2800 2x2800 Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 20 36 60 90 Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar Δp when p2 = 0 psi 1 2 to 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 to 3 1 1 2 to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 0.12 to 1.2 2 to 3 5 to 12 20 30 47 75 120 350 102 380 400 1479 5510 5800 350 101 380 400 1464 5510 5800 350 22.4 92.1 203 343 325 1335 2943 4973 700 (106) (245) (400) (1537) (3552) (5800) 350 21.6 91.3 203 342 313 1324 2943 4959 700 (105) (244) (400) (1522) (3538) (5800) 350 12.4 54.2 121 204 180 786 1754 2958 700 (62.5) (146) (280) (906) (2117) (4060) 350 7.9 35.7 80.1 136 114 517 1161 1972 700 (41) (97) (185) (594) (2682) (2682) 700 10.6 42.7 94.1 158 153 619 1364 2291 1400 (49) (113) (216) (710) (1638) (3132) 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 90 383 851 1438 1400 (30.4) (71) (135) (441) (1029) (1957) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 235 525 889 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) (271) (633) (1218) (1943) 4 6 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 700 10.2 23 39.1 148 333 567 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) (171) (403) (775) (1232) 700 10.0 22.9 38.9 145 332 564 1400 (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) (168) (401) (773) (1232) 1400 13.6 30 50.6 197 435 733 2800 (15.6) (36.2) (69) (226) (525) (1000) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 195 433 731 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (69) (224) (523) (1000) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (449) (1044) (2001) 1400 9.4 20.8 35 136 301 507 2800 (10.8) (25) (47.8) (156) (362) (693) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 135 300 506 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) (156) (362) (693) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (310) (725) (1386) 1400 5.1 11.5 19.5 74 166 282 2800 (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) (85) (201) (388) (620) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (171) (403) (777) 54 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01

Table 7 Dimensions for Type 3251-1 and Type 3251-7 Pneumatic Control Valve as standard version Valve NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 Length L H1 for actuator 350 cm 2 700 cm 2 1400 cm 2 2800 cm 2 H2 With foot for NPS 4 and larger Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150 Class 300/600 Class 900 mm 184 184 222 254 298 352 451 543 in 7.24 7.24 8.74 10 11.73 13.83 17.75 21.37 mm 191 197 235 267 318 368 473 568 in 7.52 7.75 9.25 10.52 12.52 14.49 18.62 22.36 mm 203 210 251 286 337 394 508 609 in 7.99 8.26 9.88 11.26 13.26 15.51 20 23.97 mm 216 254 305 368 381 457 609 737 in 8.5 10 12 14.49 15 17.99 23.97 29.01 mm 392 392 404 457 462 482 in 15.43 15.43 15.9 17.99 18.19 18.97 mm 426 426 435 491 462 482 in 16.77 16.77 17.12 19.33 18.19 18.97 mm 392 392 404 457 462 482 732 805 in 15.43 15.43 15.9 17.99 18.19 18.97 29.01 31.69 mm 426 426 435 491 462 482 732 805 in 16.77 16.77 17.12 19.33 18.19 18.97 29.01 31.69 mm 512 517 537 732 805 in 20.16 20.35 21.14 29.01 31.69 mm 546 517 537 732 805 in 21.49 20.35 21.14 29.01 31.69 mm 722 817 890 in 28.42 32.16 35.04 mm 722 817 890 in 28.42 32.16 35.04 mm 50 60 80 90 100 160 220 250 in 1.97 2.36 3.15 3.54 3.93 6.29 8.66 9.84 mm 60 70 90 100 120 180 235 270 in 2.34 2.75 3.54 3.93 4.72 7.02 9.25 10.63 mm 70 80 100 110 120 180 235 270 in 2.75 3.15 3.93 4.33 4.72 7.08 9.25 10.63 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm mm 280 390 530 770 in 11.02 15.35 20.86 30.3 H 1) mm 82 200 287 620 1130 in 3.23 7.87 11.3 24.41 44.49 H3 2) mm 110 190 610 650 in 4.33 7.48 24 25.5 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01 55

Table 8 Weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version Valve NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 Valve without actuator (approx.) Cl 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg 15.5 17.5 21.5 38 59 78 201 427 lbs 34.2 38.6 47.4 83.8 130 172 443 1191 kg 22 28 36 64 102 137 340 540 lbs 49 62 80 141 225 302 750 1191 kg 35 41 60 97 120 160 380 650 lbs 77 90 132 214 265 353 838 1433 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 (approx.) Type 3277 (approx.) Without With handwheel Without With handwheel kg 8 22 70 450 950 lbs 17.6 48.5 154.5 992 2095 kg 13 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN lbs 28.7 59.5 kg 12 26 lbs 26.5 57.6 kg 17 31 lbs 37.5 68.5 1) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 ØD a H3 H ØD a H 100 a2 H4 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L L Type 3251-1 Type 3251-7 Type 3251 with bellows seal or insulating section 56 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01

Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Class 150... 600 H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight (kg) without actuator for 350 cm 2 mm 593 593 605 727 732 752 in 23.34 23.34 23.82 28.62 28.82 29.6 700 cm 2 mm 593 593 605 727 732 752 1083 1365 in 23.34 23.34 23.82 28.62 28.82 29.6 42.64 53.74 1400 cm 2 mm 782 787 807 1083 1365 in 30.78 30.98 31.77 42.62 53.74 2800 cm 2 mm 992 1168 1450 in 39.05 45.98 57.08 350 cm 2 mm 622 622 631 756 732 752 in 24.48 24.48 24.84 29.76 28.82 29.6 700 cm 2 mm 622 622 631 756 732 752 1083 1365 in 24.48 24.48 24.84 29.76 28.82 29.6 42.64 53.74 1400 cm 2 mm 811 787 807 1083 1365 in 31.93 30.98 31.77 42.64 53.76 2800 cm 2 mm 992 1168 1450 in 39.05 45.98 57.08 Cl 150...600 kg 30 36 44 72 110 156 360 640 lbs 66.5 79.5 97 159 242.5 344 794 1411 Class 900 kg 43 49 68 105 130 180 400 730 lbs 95 108 150 231.5 287 397 882 1610 Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Cl 150 H4 for actuator Cl 300/600 H4 for actuator Cl 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 350 cm 2 mm 590 590 602 836 841 841 in 23.23 23.23 23.7 32.9 33.1 33.1 700 cm 2 mm 590 590 602 836 841 841 1139 1455 in 23.23 23.23 23.7 32.9 33.1 33.1 44.85 57.3 1400 cm 2 mm 891 896 896 1139 1455 in 35.1 35.3 35.3 44.85 57.3 2800 cm 2 mm 1081 1224 1540 in 42.56 48.2 60.63 350 cm 2 mm 590 590 602 836 841 841 in 23.23 23.23 23.7 32.9 33.1 33.1 700 cm 2 mm 590 590 602 836 841 841 1271 1855 in 23.23 23.23 23.7 32.9 33.1 33.1 50.04 73.03 1400 cm 2 mm 891 896 896 1271 1855 in 35.1 35.3 35.3 50.04 73.03 2800 cm 2 mm 1081 1356 1940 in 42.56 53.4 76.4 350 cm 2 mm 583 583 593 825 841 841 in 22.95 22.95 23.35 32.5 33.1 33.1 700 cm 2 mm 583 583 593 825 841 841 1271 1990 in 22.95 22.95 23.35 32.5 33.1 33.1 50.04 78.35 1400 cm 2 mm 880 896 896 1271 1990 in 34.64 35.27 35.27 50.04 78.35 2800 cm 2 mm 1081 1356 2075 in 42.56 53.4 81.7 Class kg 360 150/300 lbs 794 Class 600 kg 30 36 44 72 110 156 360 640 lbs 66.5 95 97 159 243 344 794 1411 Class 900 kg 43 49 68 105 130 180 400 730 lbs 95 108 150 232 287 297 882 1610 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01 57

a b c a a b d Type 3251 with heating jacket Dimensions on request The following details are required on ordering Nominal size NPS... Nominal pressure ANSI Class... Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in lb/cu.ft or kg/m 3 and temperature in C ( F) Flow rate lbs/h or kg/h or cu.ft/min or m 3 /h in standard or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (psi) (absolute pressure p abs), both with minimum, standard and maximum flow Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the C v (K v) coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size and C v (K vs) coefficient from Tables 3 to 5. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Tables 4 and 5. 4. Select the valve body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN. 5. Select additional equipment from Tables 1 and 2. Specifications subject to change without notice. 58 Data Sheet T 8052 EN 2008-01

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3253-1 and Type 3253-7 Three-way Valve Type 3253 Application Diverting or mixing valves for heavy-duty service in process engineering Nominal sizes DN 15 to 500 Nominal pressure PN 10 to 160 Temperatures 200 to +500 C Type 3253 Three-way Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3253-1 Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3253-7 Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body optionally made of Cast iron (DN 250 or larger for PN 10, DN 150/200 for PN 16) Cast steel (DN 15 to 100 for PN 63 or greater, DN 150 to DN 500 for PN 16 or greater), DN 400 and DN 500 for up to PN 40 Cast stainless steel Stuffing box containing either two spring-loaded PTFE V-ring packings or two adjustable high-temperature (HT) packings. Optional test connection between the two packings Conversion between mixing and diverting services by reversing the seat-guided valve plug The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to +220 C or with adjustable high-temperature packings for 10 to +350 C Type 3253-1 (Fig. 1). Type 3253 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 350 to 2800 cm 2 (see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310--2 EN) Type 3253-7. Type 3253 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 or 700 cm 2 (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN) Additional versions with Nominal pressures >PN 160 to 400. On request Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical Data Additional handwheel See T 8310-1/-2 EN ANSI version. NPS 1 2 to 20, ANSI Class 300 to 2500 on request Type 3244. DN 15 to 150, PN 10 to 40; NPS 1 2 to 6, ANSI Class 150 to 300 (see Data Sheet T 8026 EN). Fig. 1 Type 3253-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Type 3253-2 Electric Control Valve On request Type 3253-3 Hand-operated Valve. With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator (see T 8312 EN for details) Data Sheet T 8055 EN 2008-02 59

Principle of operation Depending on plug arrangement, the three-way valve can be used for mixing or diverting service. When used as a mixing valve, the process media to be mixed enter through valve ports A and B. The combined stream leaves at port AB (Fig. 2 and 3). The flow rate from valve ports A and B to port AB depends on the cross-sectional area of flow between the seats and the valve plugs. When used as a diverting valve, the process medium enters at port AB and the partial streams leave at valve ports A and B (Fig. 4). AB A Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the pneumatic actuator (see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for further details), the control valve has two different fail-safe actions which become effective upon a supply air failure: Actuator stem extends: Whenever the air supply fails, either valve port B (mixing valve) or valve port A (diverting valve) is closed. Actuator stem retracts: Whenever the air supply fails, either valve port A (mixing valve) or valve port B (diverting valve) is closed. B Fig. 3 Type 3253 Three-way Valve Body version for DN 15 to DN 40, Plug arrangement for mixing service, Plug arrangement for diverting service DN 15 to 25 AB A AB A Fig. 2 Type 3253-1 Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator and additional handwheel, Body version for DN 50 to DN 500, Plug arrangement for mixing service B Fig. 4 Type 3253-7 Control Valve with Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (only up to DN 100), Body version for DN 40 to DN 500, Plug arrangement for diverting service B 60 Data Sheet T 8055 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3253 Three-way Valve Material Cast iron EN-JL1040 Cast steel 1.0619 Cast stainless steel 1.4581 Nominal sizes DN 15... 200 200... 500 15... 100 150... 500 15... 100 150... 500 Nominal pressure 1) PN 16 10 63... 160 16... 160 63... 160 16... 100 End connection Flanges All DIN EN versions Other connections on request Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing Characteristic Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagram (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Body without insulating section 10... 220 C up to 350 C with HT packing Body with Insul. sect. 10... 300 10... 400 2) 10... 450 Bellows 10... 300 10... 400 2) 10... 450 Valve plug Metal sealing 200... 450 Leakage rate Acc. to DIN EN 1349: 2000 I 1) Up to PN 400 on request, DN 400 to DN 500 only for up to PN 40 2) In connection with suitable body material; for temperatures exceeding 500 C: 1.7380 Table 2. Materials (material numbers according to EN) Standard version Valve body and bonnet Cast iron EN-JL1040 Cast steel 1.0619 Cast stainless steel 1.4581 Seat and plug 1) 1.4006 1.4571 Guide bushings 1.4112 2.4610 Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE with carbon, spring 1.4310 or HT packing Body gaskets Metal Insulating section 1.0460 1.7335 1.4571 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 1.0460/1.0619 1.7335/1.0619 1.4571 Metal bellows 1.4571 1) All seats and plugs also available with Stellite facing Table 3 Available Kvs coefficients Kvs 4 10 25 40 100 160 360 630 800 1500 2500 4000 Seat 24 38 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Travel 15 30 60 120 DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Data Sheet T 8055 EN 2008-02 61

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with and without metal bellows seal Fail-safe action "Actuator stem extends" Pressures in bar Values specified in the columns highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs. Bench range (bar) for actuator area (cm 2 ) Required supply pressure 350 700 1400 0.2... 1.0 (0.8... 1.2) 0.4... 2.0 (1.6... 2.4) 1.4... 2.3 (1.85... 2.3) 0.5... 2.5 (2... 3) 2.1... 3.3 (2.7... 3.3) 1.1... 2.4 (2.05... 2.7) 1.3... 2.8 (2.45... 3.2) 2800 0.9... 1.6 1.0... 2.1 1.1... 2.6 (1.4... 1.7) (1.8... 2.3) (2.2... 3.0) 2 x 2800 1.6... 3.2 Lower spring range value + upper spring range value DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp in bar 15 4 25 10 40 25 50 40 80 100 100 160 150 360 200 630 350 8.5 22.5 92 141 700 (106) (217) (252) (370) 350 8.5 22.5 92 140 700 (106) (217) (252) (370) 350 8.2 36 55 700 (41.5) (86) (100) (147) 700 4.2 10.6 42.7 65 1400 (49) (100) (126) (129) (155) 700 16.4 25 1400 (18.8) (38.9) (49) (50.2) (60.2) 700 10.3 15.9 1400 (11.2) (24.7) (31.2) (32) (38.4) 1400 10.8 13.6 14 16.8 2800 (22.2) (27.9) (19.3) (25) (30.7) 1400 4 4.7 2800 (12.4) (15.5) (10.7) (13.9) (17.2) 2x2800 (16.6) (25) (31) (21.4) (27.8) (34.4) 250 800 300 1500 400 2500 2800 (6.8) (8.8) (10.9) 2x2800 (13.6) (17.6) (21.8) 2800 3.6 2x2800 7.2 2800 2x2800 4 500 4000 2x2800 3.5 62 Data Sheet T 8055 EN 2008-02

Table 4b Permissible differential pressure Δp for valves with or without metal bellows seal Fail-safe action "actuator stem retracts" Pressures in bar Values specified in the columns highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs. Bench range (bar) for actuator area (cm 2 ) Required supply pressure 350 700 1400 0.2... 1.0 (0.2... 0.6) 0.4... 2.0 (0.4... 1.2) 1.4... 2.3 (1.4... 1.85) 0.5... 2.5 (0.5... 1.5) 2.1... 3.3 (2.1... 2.7) 1.1... 2.4 (1.1... 1.75) 1.3... 2.8 (1.3... 2.05) 2800 0.9... 1.6 1.0... 2.1 1.1... 2.6 (0.9... 1.25) (1.0... 1.55) (1.1... 1.85) 2 x 2800 1.6... 3.2 Lower spring range value + upper spring range value DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp in bar 15 4 25 10 40 25 50 40 80 100 100 160 150 360 200 630 350 8.5 22.5 92 141 700 (22.5) (50) (189) (287) 350 8.5 22.5 92 141 700 (22.5) (50) (189) (287) 350 8.2 36 55.4 700 (8.2) (19.4) (75) (114) 700 4.2 10.6 42.7 65 1400 (10.5) (23.5) (30) (68.4) (17) 700 16.3 25 1400 (4) (8.8) (11.3) (26.4) (31.4) 700 10.3 7.9 1400 (5.5) (7.1) (16.7) (19.9) 1400 7.2 8.6 2800 (5.1) (6.5) (12.2) (13.6) (15) 1400 4 4.7 2800 (6.7) (7.5) (8.3) 2x2800 (5.4) (7) (13.4) (15) (16.6) 250 800 300 1500 400 2500 2800 (4.2) (4.8) (5.3) 2x2800 (4.4) (8.4) (9.6) (10.6) 2800 2x2800 5.8 6.6 7.2 2800 2x2800 4 500 4000 2x2800 3.5 Data Sheet T 8055 EN 2008-02 63

Table 5 Dimensions in mm for Type 3253-1 and Type 3253-7 Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Length L H1 for actuator H2 approx. PN 10... 40 480 600 730 850 1100 1250 PN 63...160 210 230 260 300 380 430 550 650 775 900 1150 350 cm 2 392 392 404 457 462 482 700 cm 2 392 392 404 457 462 482 732 805 860 1035 1035 1400 cm 2 512 517 537 732 805 860 1035 1035 1258 2800 cm 2 697 702 722 817 890 1094 1290 1290 1410 PN 10... 40 480 520 595 740 830 985 PN 63...160 115 115 130 275 275 370 535 590 730 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm D 280 390 530 770 H 1) 82 200 287 620 1134 H3 2) 110 190 610 650 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance required to disassemble the actuator Table 6 Weights for Type 3253-1 and Type 3253-7 Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Valve without actuator (approx. kg) PN 10... 40 1) 395 645 1550 2000 3700 PN 63...160 32 37 50 93 129 165 365 1) Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 Without 8 22 70 450 950 (approx.) 2) With handwheel 13 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Type 3277 Without 12 26 (approx.) 2) With handwheel 17 31 1) Weights on request 2) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel H3 ØD a Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a H 100 H1 H4 H2 L Type 3253-1 Type 3253-7 64 Data Sheet T 8055 EN 2008-02

Table 7 Dimensions in mm and weights for Type 3253 Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal sizes DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Height H4 for actuator 350 593 593 605 727 732 752 700 593 593 605 727 732 752 1083 1365 1485 1555 1615 1400 782 787 807 1083 1365 1485 1555 1615 1) 2800 967 972 992 1168 1450 1719 1810 1870 1) Weight without actuator (approx. kg) PN 63...160 37 42 55 103 139 175 380 1) PN 16... 40 1) 1) Table 8 Dimensions in mm and weights for Type 3253 Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal sizes DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 H4 for PN 16... 40 for actuator H4 for PN 63... 160 for actuator Weight without actuator (apprx. kg) 1) Data on request 350 590 590 602 836 841 841 700 590 590 602 836 841 841 1139 1455 1905 1895 1925 1400 891 896 896 1139 1455 1905 1895 1925 1) 2800 1076 1081 1081 1224 1540 2139 2150 2180 1) 350 590 590 602 836 841 841 700 590 590 602 836 841 841 1271 1855 1400 891 896 896 1271 1855 1) 2800 1076 1081 1081 1356 1940 PN 16... 40 1) 370 1) PN 63...160 37 42 55 103 139 175 1) H4 H2 L Type 3253 with bellows seal or insulating section Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient acc. to IEC 60534 2. Select the nominal size DN and K vs coefficient according to Tables 3 and 4 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp according to Table 4 4. Select the body material according to Tables 1 and 2 and the pressure-temperature diagram in Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN 5. Select accessories according to Tables 1 and 2 The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe action Actuator stem extends/retracts Process medium Densitiy in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 und p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) both with minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8055 EN 2008-02 65

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Globe Valve Type 3254 Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements, especially for high pressures and temperatures Nominal size DN 80 to 500 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 Temperatures 200 to +500 C Type 3254 Globe Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3254-1 Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3254-7 Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body made of: Cast steel Stainless cast steel High-temperature or cold-resisting cast steel. Valve plug optionally with: Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures Additional stem guide in the bottom body flange The modular design of the control valves allows them to be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Version Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C or with adjustable high-temperature (HT) packing for 10 to 350 C, nominal size DN 80 to DN 500, nominal pressure PN 16 to PN 160 Type 3254-1 (Fig. 1) Type 3254 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 700 to 2800 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN) Type 3254-7 Type 3254 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 to 700 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to T 8310-1 EN) Other versions Nominal pressures PN 160 to 400 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to DIN EN 12627 Flow divider For noise level reduction, see Data Sheet T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8083 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type 3254-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T 8310-1/-2 EN ANSI version NPS 3 to 16, ANSI Class 150 to 2500 (see T 8061 EN) Type 2354-3 Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel (see Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type 3254-2 Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02 67

Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug position determines the free area between the valve seat and the plug. The additional stem guide is located in the bottom body flange. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. Fig. 4 shows the control valve version with a bellows seal. A test connection allows the stainless steel bellows to be monitored. The control valves can be fitted with Flow Dividers St I (Fig. 4) or St III for a further reduction in the noise level (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon supply air failure: Actuator stem extends (FA) The actuator springs close the valve when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The actuator springs open the valve when the supply air fails. Fig. 3 Type 3254 Globe Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow Divider St I Fig. 2 Type 3254-1 Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3254 Globe Valve with Flow Divider St I and and additional bellows seal with test connection 68 Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical data for Type 3254 Globe Valve Material Cast steel 1.0619 Cast steel 1.7357 Stainless cast steel 1.4581 Nominal size 1) DN DN 80 to 500 DN 80 to 100 DN 150 to 500 Nominal pressure PN PN 16 to 160 2) PN 40 to 160 2) PN 16 to 160 PN 16 to 100 2) End connections Flanges All DIN EN versions Welding ends According to DIN EN 12627 Seat-plug sealing Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Valve body without insulating section 10 220 C Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 10 400 C 10 500 C 10 450 C Bellows seal 10 400 C 10 500 C 10 450 C Valve plug 3) Standard Metal sealing 250 500 C Soft sealing 200 220 C Balanced PTFE ring 200 220 C Graphite ring 220 500 C Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349 (2000) Standard Metal sealing IV Valve plug Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 IV-S1: DN 100 and larger Balanced Metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) DN 400 in PN 40 and PN 100; DN 500 in PN 40 2) Up to PN 400 on request 3) Only in conjunction with suitable body material Table 2 Materials Standard version Body and flanges 1) Seat and plug 2) Cast steel 1.0619 Cast steel 1.7357 Stainless cast steel 1.4581 Metal sealing 1.4006/1.4008 1.4571/1.4581 Seat ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 2.4610 Packing PTFE-carbon V-ring packing, spring 1.4310 or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 1.0619/1.7335 1.4571 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 1.0619/1.7335 1.4571 Metal bellows 1.4571 Heating jacket 1.4541 1) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN Material for temperatures exceeding 500 C: 1.7380 Material for cryogenic service: 1.6220 or 1.4308 2) Seats and plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plug made of solid Stellite Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02 69

Table 3 K VS coefficients Versions in the gray shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (K VS I) and St III (K VS III) K VS 63 100 160 250 360 630 1000 1500 2000 2500 4000 K VSI 57 90 144 225 320 560 900 1350 1800 2250 3600 K VSIII 47 75 120 190 270 480 750 1100 1500 1900 3000 Seat mm 63 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 Travel mm 30 60 120 Table 3b Versions without flow divider K VS 63 100 160 250 360 630 1000 1500 2000 2500 4000 DN 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I K VSI 57 90 144 225 320 560 900 1350 1800 2250 3600 DN 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III K VSIII 47 75 120 190 270 480 750 1100 1500 1900 3000 DN 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 70 Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Pressures in bar Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 4a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) 700 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 2.35...3.8 2.6...4.3 0.6...3.0 Bench 0.4...1.2 0.8...2.4 (2.4...3.6) (1.85...2.3) (2.7...3.3) (3.05...3.8) (3.45...4.3) 0.2...1.0 0.4...2.0 range (bar) 1400 (0.8...1.2) (1.6...2.4) 1.0...3.0 1.4...2.7 1.7...3.2 0.5...2.5 1.1...2.4 1.3...2.8 (2.0...3.0) (2.05...2.7) (2.45...3.2) for actuators (cm²) 2800 0.4...1.2 0.8...2.4 1.0...3.0 1.2...3.6 1.1...1.8 1.25...2.35 1.5...3.0 0.9...1.6 1.0...2.1 1.1...2.6 2x2800 (0.8...1.2) (1.6...2.4) (2.0...3.0) (2.4...3.6) (1.25...1.6) (1.55...2.1) (1.85...2.6) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Actuator DN K VS Δp when p 2 = 0 bar cm² 80 700 6.5 6.5 14.5 10.5 22.6 26.7 40.8 45.9 50.9 63 100 1400 (30.7) (63) (79.2) (81.2) (97.4) 150 63 80 100 100 150 100 200 250 100 100 160 150 160 200 to 300 160 150 250 200 to 300 250 150 360 200 to 400 200 to 400 250 to 400 300 400 400 to 500 360 630 1000 1500 2000 700 6.2 6.2 14.3 10.2 22.4 26.4 40.6 45.6 50.7 1400 (30.4) (62.8) (78.9) (81) (97.1) 700 8.8 6.3 13.8 16.4 25.1 28.2 31.4 1400 (18.8) (38.9) (48.9) (50.2) (60.2) 700 8.6 6.2 13.7 16.2 24.9 28.1 31.2 1400 (18.7) (38.7) (48.8) (50) (60) 700 8.4 5.9 13.4 15.9 24.7 27.8 30.9 1400 (18.4) (38.5) (48.5) (49.7) (59.8) 700 5.5 8.7 10.3 15.9 17.9 19.9 1400 (11.9) (24.7) (31.2) (32) (38.4) 700 5.4 8.6 10.2 15.8 17.8 19.8 1400 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.9) (38.3) 700 5.2 8.4 10 15.6 17.7 19.7 1400 (11.6) (24.5) (30.9) (31.7) (38.1) 1400 7.4 4.4 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.6 16.7 2800 (15.6) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 1400 7.3 4.2 9.4 10.4 13.5 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.5) (32) (40.2) (48.4) (24.7) (30.9) (37.1) 2x2800 (33) (64) (80.2) (96.8) (49.4) (61.8) (74.2) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.4 8.6 11.5 2800 (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 1400 5 6.4 7.1 9.3 8.6 11.4 2800 (10.7) (22.1) (27.8) (33.5) (17.1) (21.4) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.2) (55.6) (67) (34.2) (42.8) (51.4) 1400 5.1 4.7 6.3 2800 (5.9) (12.3) (15.5) (18.8) (9.5) (11.9) (14.3) 2x2800 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (37.6) (19) (23.8) (28.6) 2800 4.8 5.8 4.2 5.3 4.8 6 5.3 7.3 2x2800 7.4 9.6 11.6 8.4 10.6 9.6 12 10.6 14.6 2800 4 4.1 5 2x2800 5 6.6 8 5.8 7.2 6.6 8.2 7.2 10 2800 2x2800 4.8 5.8 4.2 5.2 4.8 6 5.2 7.4 2800 2500 2x2800 4.4 4 4.6 4 5.6 500 4000 2x2800 2.7 2.5 2.9 3.4 Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02 71

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve OPEN Pressures in bar Table 4b Fail-safe position Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench 700 range (bar) for actuators (cm²) 1400 2800 2x2800 0.2...1.0 (0.2...0.6) Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 Actuator DN K VS cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 80 700 6.5 26.7 59 99.4 63 100 1400 (30.7) (71) (136) 150 63 80 100 100 150 100 200 250 100 100 160 150 160 200 to 300 160 150 250 200 to 300 250 150 360 200 to 400 200 to 400 250 to 400 300 400 400 to 500 360 630 1000 1500 2000 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 1400 (30.6) (71) (136) 700 16.3 36.4 61.5 1400 (18.8) (43.9) (84) (134) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (83.8) (134) 700 15.9 35 61.1 1400 (18.4) (43.5) (83) (134) 700 10.2 23.1 39.1 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) 700 10.2 23 39.1 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) 700 10.1 22.9 38.9 1400 (11.6) (27.7) (53.4) (85.5) 1400 13.6 30 50.6 2800 (15.6) (36.2) (69) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (68.9) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) 1400 9.4 20.8 35 2800 (10.8) (25) (47.8) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) 1400 5.1 11.5 19.6 2800 (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) 2800 6.8 15 25.3 2x2800 13.6 30 50.6 2800 4.7 10.4 17.5 2x2800 9.4 20.8 35 2800 7.6 12.8 2x2800 6.8 15.2 25.6 2800 5.8 9.8 2500 2x2800 5.2 11.6 19.6 500 4000 2x2800 7.4 12.5 Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Valve plug version with metal sealing or soft sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar The leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded with the maximum differential pressures listed and the previously mentioned conditions All pressures mentioned are in bar (gauge) The differential pressure stated can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram Note on fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": For actuators with reduced travels, pretensioned spring ranges must be used. Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft sealing or lapped-in metal plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug with graphite ring are available on request. 72 Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plugs with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 5a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) 5b Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench 700 0.8...2.4 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 range (bar) 1400 0.4...2.0 0.4...2.0 for actuators 0.8...2.4 1.0...3.0 2800 0.5...2.5 (0.4...1.2) (1.6...2.4) (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 (cm²) 0.6...3.0 2x2800 (2.4...3.6) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 Actuator DN K VS cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 80 700 48.1 144 96.9 243 48.1 400 400 100 100 1400 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 100 160 150 160 200 to 300 160 150 250 200 to 300 250 150 360 200 to 400 200 to 400 250 to 400 300 400 400 to 500 360 630 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 4000 700 37.2 135 85.9 232 37.2 400 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 700 13.9 53.9 33.9 93.8 13.9 173 373 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) (400) 700 4.6 20.2 12.4 35.8 4.6 67 145 1400 (113) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 1400 48.3 128 68.2 168 48.3 367 400 2800 (236) (298) (361) (400) (400) (400) 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 298 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) (400) 1400 42.6 122 62.6 162 42.7 362 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.8 140 296 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (400) 1400 11.4 42.6 19.2 58.2 11.4 136 292 2800 (230) (292) (355) (167) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) (400) 2800 38.3 100 53.9 132 69.4 163 38.3 288 400 2x2800 76.6 200 107.8 264 138.8 326 76.6 400 400 2800 33.9 96.3 49.5 127 65.1 158 33.9 283 400 2x2800 67.8 192 99 254 130 316 67.8 400 400 2800 29.5 91.9 45.1 123 60.7 154 29.5 279 400 2x2800 59 184 90.2 246 121 308 59 400 400 2800 25.1 87.5 40.7 118 56.3 150 25.1 274 400 2x2800 50.2 175 81.4 236 112 300 50.2 549 400 2800 16.5 78 32 110 47 141 16 265 400 2x2800 33 156 64 220 94 282 32 400 400 Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02 73

Table 7 Dimensions in mm for Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Length L PN 10... 40 310 350 480 600 730 850 1100 1250 PN 63...160 380 430 550 650 775 900 1150 1400 H1 700 cm² 462 482 732 805 for actuator 1400 cm² 517 537 732 805 860 2800 cm² 702 722 817 890 1094 1290 1290 1470 H2 PN 10... 40 175 207 288 390 410 480 560 630 PN 63...160 222 249 338 390 410 480 650 735 Actuator cm² 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm Ø D 390 530 770 H 200 287 620 1130 H3 1) 190 610 650 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Minimum clearance for removing actuator Table 8 Weights for Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 Valve without PN 10... 40 70 104 245 480 810 1081 1930 3023 actuator (kg) PN 63...160 121 158 375 1) Actuator cm² 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 Without 22 70 450 950 (approx. kg) 2) With handwh. 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Type 3277 Without 26 (approx. kg) 2) With handwh. 31 1) Weights on request 2) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel H3 H ØD a Pneumatic actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a 100 a2 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L Type 3254-1 Type 3254-7 74 Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02

Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve DN 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 H4 700 cm² 732 752 1083 1365 for actuator 1400 cm² 787 807 1083 1365 1485 2800 cm² 972 992 1168 1450 1719 1810 1870 1920 H2 PN 10...40 77 111 281 1) PN 63...160 128 165 411 Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Valve DN 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 H4 700 cm² 841 841 1139 1455 for actuator 1400 cm² 896 896 1139 1455 1905 2800 cm² 1081 1081 1224 1540 2139 2150 2180 On request H4 700 cm² 841 841 1271 1855 for actuator 1400 cm² 896 896 1271 1855 2800 cm² 1081 1081 1356 1940 On request Weight (kg) PN 10...40 97 1) 1) without actuator PN 63...160 141 420 1) 1) Weights on request H4 Type 3254 with bellows seal or insulating section L Selection and sizing of control valves 1. Calculate the K V coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size and K VS coefficient from Tables 3 and 4. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Table 4 or 5. 4. Select the valve body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as from the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN. 5. Select accessories from Tables 1 and 2. The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m³ and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m³/h under normal or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ), both with minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8060 EN 2008-02 75

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Globe Valve Type 3254 ANSI version Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements, especially for high pressures and temperatures Valve size NPS 3 to 16 Pressure rating Class 150 to 2500 Temperatures 200 to 500 C ( 320 to 930 F) Type 3254 Globe Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3254-1 Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3254-7 Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body made of: Carbon steel Stainless carbon steel High-temperature or cold-resisting carbon steel. Valve plug optionally with: Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures Additional stem guide in the bottom body flange The modular design of the control valves allows them to be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Version Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 430 F) or with adjustable high-temperature (HT) packing for 10 to 350 C (15 to 660 F), valve sizes NPS 3 to 16, Class 150 to 900 Type 3254-1 (Fig. 1) Type 3254 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 700 to 2800 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN) Type 3254-7 Type 3254 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 to 700 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to T 8310-1 EN) Other versions Class 1500 and 2500 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to ANSI B16.25 Flow divider For noise level reduction, see Data Sheet T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8083 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type 3254-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T 8310-1/-2 EN DIN version Nominal size DN 80 to DN 500, nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 (see T 8060 EN) Type 2354-3 Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel (see Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type 3254-2 Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06 77

Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug position determines the free area between the valve seat and the plug. The additional stem guide is located in the bottom body flange. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. Fig. 4 shows the control valve version with a bellows seal. A test connection allows the stainless steel bellows to be monitored. The control valves can be fitted with Flow Dividers St I (Fig. 4) or St III for a further reduction in the noise level (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon supply air failure: Actuator stem extends (FA) The actuator springs close the valve when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The actuator springs open the valve when the supply air fails. Fig. 3 Type 3254 Globe Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow Divider St I Fig. 2 Type 3254-1 Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3254 Globe Valve with Flow Divider St I and and additional bellows seal with test connection 78 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06

Table 1 Technical data for Type 3254 Globe Valve Material Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Valve size 1) NPS 3 to 16 Pressure rating 2) Class 150 to 900 End connections Flanges All ANSI versions Welding ends According to ANSI B16.25 Seat-plug sealing Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Temperature ranges Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Valve body without insulating section 10 220 C (14 428 F) Up to 350 C (660 F) with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 29 427 C ( 20 800 F) 29 500 C ( 20 930 F) 200 450 C ( 328 842 F) Bellows seal 29 427 C ( 20 800 F) 29 500 C ( 20 930 F) Valve plug 3) Standard Metal sealing 200 500 C ( 328 930 F) Soft sealing 200 220 C ( 328 428 F) Balanced PTFE ring Graphite ring 200 220 C ( 328 428 F) 220 500 C (428 930 F) 200 450 C ( 328 842 F) Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349 (ANSI/FCI 20-2-1991) Standard Metal sealing IV Valve plug Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 IV-S1: NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger Balanced Metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) NPS 16 in Class 300 and 600 2) Up to Class 2500 on request 3) Only in conjunction with suitable body material Table 2 Materials Standard version Body and flanges 1) Seat and plug 2) Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Metal sealing 1.4006/1.4008 1.4571/1.4581 Seat ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 2.4610 Packing PTFE-carbon V-ring packing, spring 1.4310 or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 Metal bellows 1.4571 Heating jacket 1.4541 1) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN Material for cryogenic service: A 352 LCC 2) Seats and plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plug made of solid Stellite available 3) Depending on the valve bonnet material Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06 79

Table 3 C V coefficients Version in shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (K VS I) and St III (K VS III) C V 75 120 190 290 420 735 1150 1730 2300 2900 K VS 63 100 160 250 360 630 1000 1500 2000 2500 C VI 67 105 170 265 375 650 1040 1560 2080 2600 K VSI 57 90 144 225 320 560 900 1350 1800 2250 C VIII 55 90 140 220 315 560 880 1280 1730 K VSIII 47 75 120 190 270 480 750 1100 1500 Seat mm 63 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 Rated travel mm 30 60 120 in 1.18 2.36 4.72 Table 3b Versions without flow divider C V 75 120 190 290 420 735 1150 1730 2300 2900 NPS DN 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 10 250 12 300 16 400 Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I C VI 67 105 170 265 375 650 1040 1560 2080 2600 NPS DN 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 10 250 12 300 16 400 Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III C VIII 55 90 140 220 315 560 880 1280 1730 NPS DN 4 100 6 150 8 200 10 250 12 300 16 400 80 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06

Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Valve plug version with metal sealing or soft sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar (psi) The leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded with the maximum differential pressures listed and the previously mentioned conditions All pressures mentioned are in bar or psi (gauge) The differential pressure stated can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram Selection and sizing of control valves 1. Calculate the C V (K V ) coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size and C V (K VS ) coefficient from Tables 3 to 5. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Table 4 or 5. 4. Select the valve body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as from the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN. 5. Select accessories from Tables 1 and 2. Note on fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": For actuators with reduced travels, pretensioned spring ranges must be used. Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft sealing or lapped-in metal plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug with graphite ring are available on request. Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06 81

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Pressures in bar Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 4a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) 700 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 2.35...3.8 2.6...4.3 0.6...3.0 Bench 0.4...1.2 0.8...2.4 (2.4...3.6) (1.85...2.3) (2.7...3.3) (3.05...3.8) (3.45...4.3) 0.2...1.0 0.4...2.0 range (bar) 1400 (0.8...1.2) (1.6...2.4) 1.0...3.0 1.4...2.7 1.7...3.2 0.5...2.5 1.1...2.4 1.3...2.8 (2.0...3.0) (2.05...2.7) (2.45...3.2) for actuators (cm²) 2800 0.4...1.2 0.8...2.4 1.0...3.0 1.2...3.6 1.1...1.8 1.25...2.35 1.5...3.0 0.9...1.6 1.0...2.1 1.1...2.6 2x2800 (0.8...1.2) (1.6...2.4) (2.0...3.0) (2.4...3.6) (1.25...1.6) (1.55...2.1) (1.85...2.6) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Actuator NPS C V Δp when p 2 = 0 bar cm² 3 700 6.5 6.5 14.5 10.5 22.6 26.7 40.8 45.9 50.9 75 4 1400 (30.7) (63) (79.2) (81.2) (97.4) 6 75 3 4 120 6 120 8 10 120 4 190 6 190 8 to 12 190 6 290 8 to 12 290 6 420 8 to 16 8 to 16 10 to 16 12 16 420 735 1150 1730 16 2300 16 2900 700 6.2 6.2 14.3 10.2 22.4 26.4 40.6 45.6 50.7 1400 (30.4) (62.8) (78.9) (81) (97.1) 700 8.8 6.3 13.8 16.4 25.1 28.2 31.4 1400 (18.8) (38.9) (48.9) (50.2) (60.2) 700 8.6 6.2 13.7 16.2 24.9 28.1 31.2 1400 (18.7) (38.7) (48.8) (50) (60) 700 8.4 5.9 13.4 15.9 24.7 27.8 30.9 1400 (18.4) (38.5) (48.5) (49.7) (59.8) 700 5.5 8.7 10.3 15.9 17.9 19.9 1400 (11.9) (24.7) (31.2) (32) (38.4) 700 5.4 8.6 10.2 15.8 17.8 19.8 1400 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.9) (38.3) 700 5.2 8.4 10 15.6 17.7 19.7 1400 (11.6) (24.5) (30.9) (31.7) (38.1) 1400 7.4 4.4 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.6 16.7 2800 (15.6) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 1400 7.3 4.2 9.4 10.4 13.5 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.5) (32) (40.2) (48.4) (24.7) (30.9) (37.1) 2x2800 (33) (64) (80.2) (96.8) (49.4) (61.8) (74.2) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.4 8.6 11.5 2800 (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 1400 5 6.4 7.1 9.3 8.6 11.4 2800 (10.7) (22.1) (27.8) (33.5) (17.1) (21.4) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.2) (55.6) (67) (34.2) (42.8) (51.4) 1400 5.1 4.7 6.3 2800 (5.9) (12.3) (15.5) (18.8) (9.5) (11.9) (14.3) 2x2800 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (37.6) (19) (23.8) (28.6) 2800 4.8 5.8 4.2 5.3 4.8 6 5.3 7.3 2x2800 7.4 9.6 11.6 8.4 10.6 9.6 12 10.6 14.6 2800 4 4.1 5 2x2800 5 6.6 8 5.8 7.2 6.6 8.2 7.2 10 2800 2x2800 4.8 5.8 4.2 5.2 4.8 6 5.2 7.4 2800 2x2800 4.4 4 4.6 4 5.6 82 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Pressures in psi Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 4b Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) 700 18...52 20...34 30...48 35...55 36...62 9...45 Bench 6...18 12...36 (35...52) (27...34) (39...48) (44...55) (50...62) 3...15 6...30 range (psi) 1400 (12...18) (23...36) 15...45 20...39 25...46 7...36 16...36 19...21 (30...45) (30...39) (36...46) for actuators (cm²) 2800 6...18 12...36 15...45 18...52 16...26 18...34 22...45 12...23 15...30 17...36 2x2800 (12...18) (23...36) (30...45) (35...52) (18...34) (22...30) (27...36) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi Actuator NPS C V Δp when p 2 = 0 psi cm² 3 700 94 94 210 152 327 387 591 46 738 75 4 1400 (445) (913) (1148) (1177) (1412) 6 75 3 4 120 6 120 8 10 120 4 190 6 190 8 to 12 190 6 290 8 to 12 290 6 420 8 to 16 8 to 16 10 to 16 12 16 420 735 1150 1730 16 2300 16 2900 700 89.9 89 207 147 324 382 588 661 735 1400 (440) (910.6) (1144) (1174) (1408) 700 127 91 200 237 364 409 455.3 1400 (272) (564) (709) (727) (873) 700 124 85.5 1972 1655 361 407 452 1400 (271) (561) (707) (725) (870) 700 121 85 194 230 358 403 448 1400 (266) (558) (703) (720) (867) 700 79 126 149 230 259 288 1400 (172) (358) (452) (464) (556) 700 78 124 148 229 258 287 1400 (171) (356) (449) (462) (555) 700 75 121 145 226 256 285 1400 (168) (355) (448) (459) (552) 1400 107 63 137 152 197 182 242 2800 (226) (465) (584) (703) (361) (449) (539) 1400 105 61 136 150 195 181 240 2800 (224) (464) (583) (707) (358) (448) (537) 2x2800 (478) (928) (1163) (1403) (716) (896) (1075) 1400 73 94 104 136 124 166 2800 (156) (322) (404) (487) (249) (311) (372) 1400 72 92 103 134 124 165 2800 (155) (320) (403) (485) (248) (310) (372) 2x2800 (310) (461) (806) (971) (495) (620) (745) 1400 73 68 91 2800 (85) (178) (224) (272) (137) (172) (207) 2x2800 (171) (356) (449) (545) (275) (345) (414) 2800 69 84 61 76 69 87 76 105 2x2800 107 139 168 121 153 139 174 153 211 2800 58 59 72 2x2800 72 95 116 84 104 95 118 104 145 2800 2x2800 69 84 61 75 69 87 75 107 2800 2x2800 63 58 66 58 81 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06 83

Table 5a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plugs with PTFE ring and metal sealing, without metal bellows seal Pressures in bar Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench 700 0.8...2.4 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 range (bar) 1400 0.4...2.0 0.4...2.0 for actuators 0.8...2.4 1.0...3.0 2800 0.5...2.7 (0.4...1.2) (1.6...2.4) (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 (cm²) 0.6...3.0 2x2800 (2.4...3.6) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 Actuator NPS C V cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 3 700 57.4 155 106 252 57.4 400 400 75 4 1400 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 3 700 48.1 144 96.9 243 48.1 400 400 120 4 1400 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 6 120 4 190 6 190 8 to 12 190 6 290 8 to 10 290 6 420 8 to 16 8 to 16 10 to 16 12 16 420 735 1150 1730 16 2300 16 2900 700 18.4 58.3 38.4 98.3 18.4 178 378 1400 (297) (378) (218) (400) (400) 700 37.2 135 85.9 232 37.2 400 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 700 13.9 53.9 33.9 93.8 13.9 173 373 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) (400) 700 4.6 20.2 12.4 35.8 4.6 67 145 1400 (113) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 1400 48.3 128 68.2 168 48.3 367 400 2800 (236) (298) (361) (400) (400) (400) 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 298 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) (400) 1400 42.6 122 62.6 162 42.7 362 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.8 140 296 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (400) 1400 11.4 42.6 19.2 58.2 11.4 136 292 2800 (230) (292) (355) (167) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) (400) 2800 38.3 100 53.9 132 69.4 163 38.3 288 400 2x2800 76.6 200 107.8 264 138.8 326 76.6 400 400 2800 33.9 96.3 49.5 127 65.1 158 33.9 283 400 2x2800 67.8 192 99 254 130 316 67.8 400 400 2800 29.5 91.9 45.1 123 60.7 154 29.5 279 400 2x2800 59 184 90.2 246 121 308 59 400 400 2800 25.1 87.5 40.7 118 56.3 150 25.1 274 400 2x2800 50.2 175 81.4 236 112 300 50.2 400 400 84 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06

Table 5b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plugs with PTFE ring and metal sealing, without metal bellows seal Pressures in psi Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench 700 12...36 9...45 18...52 range (psi) 1400 6...30 6...30 for actuators 12...36 15...45 2800 7...36 (6...18) (23...36) (30...45) 18...52 (cm²) 9...45 2x2800 (35...52) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi 36 60 90 Actuator NPS C V cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 psi 3 700 832 2247 1537 3654 832 5800 5800 75 4 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 3 700 697 209 1405 3524 697 5800 5800 120 4 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 6 120 4 190 6 190 8 to 12 190 6 290 8 10 290 6 420 8 to 16 8 to 16 10 to 16 12 16 420 735 1150 1730 16 2300 16 2900 700 267 845 557 1425 267 2581 5481 1400 (4307) (5481) (3161) (5800) (5800) 700 539 1958 1246 3364 539 5800 5800 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 700 202 782 492 1360 202 2509 5409 1400 (4249) (5409) (3089) (5800) (5800) 700 67 293 180 519 67 972 2103 1400 (1639) (2103) (1198) (3002) (5264) 1400 700 1856 989 2436 700 5322 5800 2800 (3422) (4321) (5235) (5800) (5800) (5800) 1400 261 713 374 940 261 2074 4321 2800 (3422) (4321) (5235) (2523) (5800) (5800) 1400 618 1769 908 2349 618 5349 5800 2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 1400 229 682 342 908 229 2030 4392 2800 (3393) (4292) (5206) (2494) (5800) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4988) (5800) (5800) 1400 165 618 278 844 165 1972 4234 2800 (3335) (4234) (5148) (2422) (5800) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4843) (5800) (5800) 2800 555 1450 782 1914 1006 2364 555 4176 5800 2x2800 1111 2900 1563 3828 2013 4727 1111 5800 5800 2800 492 1396 718 1842 944 2291 492 4104 5800 2x2800 983 2784 1436 3683 1885 4582 983 5800 5800 2800 428 1333 654 1784 880 2233 428 4046 5800 2x2800 856 2668 1308 3567 1755 4466 856 5800 5800 2800 364 1269 590 1711 816 2175 364 3973 5800 2x2800 728 2538 1180 3422 1624 4350 728 5800 5800 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06 85

Table 6 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Pressures in bar and psi Table 6a Pressures in bar Table 6b Pressures in psi Bench 700 range (bar/psi) for actuators (cm²) 1400 2800 2x2800 0.2...1.0 (0.2...0.6) 3...15 (3...9) Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 18 36 60 90 Actuator NPS C V cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar Δp when p 2 = 0 psi 3 700 6.5 26.7 59 99.4 94 387 855 1442 75 4 1400 (30.7) (71) (136) (445) (1029) (1972) 6 75 3 4 120 6 120 8 10 120 4 190 6 190 8 to 12 190 6 290 8 to 12 290 6 420 8 to 16 8 to 16 10 to 16 12 16 420 735 1150 1730 16 2300 16 2900 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 90 382 851 1438 1400 (30.6) (71) (136) (443) (1029) (1972) 700 16.3 36.4 61.5 236 527 891 1400 (18.8) (43.9) (84) (134) (272) (636) (1218) (1943) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 234 524 888 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (83.8) (134) (271) (633) (1215) (1943) 700 15.9 35 61.1 230 507 886 1400 (18.4) (43.5) (83) (134) (266) (630) (1348) (1943) 700 10.2 23.1 39.1 148 335 567 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) (171) (403) (775) (1241) 1400 10.2 23 39.1 148 333 567 2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) (171) (403) (775) (1241) 1400 10.1 22.9 38.9 146 332 564 2800 (11.6) (27.7) (53.4) (85.5) (168) (401) (774) (1239) 1400 13.6 30 50.6 197 435 733 2800 (15.6) (36.2) (69) (226) (525) (1000) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 195 433 730 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (68.9) (224) (523) (999) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (449) (1044) (2001) 1400 9.4 20.8 35 136 301 507 2800 (10.8) (25) (47.8) (156) (362) (693) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 134 300 506 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) (155) (362) (693) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (310) (725) (1386) 1400 5.1 11.5 19.6 74 166 284 2800 (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) (85) (201) (388) (620) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (171) (403) (777) 2800 6.8 15 25.3 98 217 266 2x2800 13.6 30 50.6 197 435 733 2800 4.7 10.4 17.5 26 150 253 2x2800 9.4 20.8 35 136 301 407 2800 7.6 12.8 110 185 2x2800 6.8 15.2 25.6 98 220 271 2800 5.8 9.8 84 142 2x2800 5.2 11.6 19.6 75 168 284 86 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06

Table 7 Dimensions for Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 Length L H1 for actuator H2 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150 Class 300/600 Class 900 mm 298 352 451 543 673 736 1016 inch 11.73 13.83 17.75 21.37 26.49 28.97 40.00 mm 318 368 473 568 708 775 1057 inch 12.52 14.49 18.62 22.36 27.87 30.51 41.61 mm 337 394 508 609 752 819 1108 inch 13.26 15.51 20 23.97 29.6 32.24 43.62 mm 381 457 609 737 838 965 inch 15 17.99 23.97 29.01 32.99 37.99 mm 462 482 732 805 inch 18.18 18.97 29.01 31.69 mm 462 482 732 805 inch 18.18 18.97 29.01 31.69 mm 517 537 732 805 860 inch 20.35 21.14 29.01 31.69 33.85 mm 517 537 732 805 860 inch 20.35 21.14 29.01 31.69 33.85 mm 702 722 817 890 1094 1290 1290 inch 27.63 28.42 32.16 35.04 43.07 50.78 50.78 mm 702 722 817 890 1094 1290 inch 27.63 28.42 32.16 35.04 43.07 50.78 mm 175 207 288 390 410 480 560 inch 8.69 8.15 11.33 15.35 16.14 18.89 22.04 mm 222 249 338 390 410 480 650 inch 8.74 9.8 13.3 15.35 16.14 18.89 25.59 mm 222 249 338 390 410 480 inch 8.74 9.8 13.3 15.35 16.14 18.89 Actuator cm² 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm Ø D mm 390 530 770 inch 15.35 20.86 30.3 H mm 200 287 620 1130 inch 7.87 11.3 24.41 44.49 H3 1) mm 190 610 650 inch 7.48 24 25.6 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Minimum clearance for removing actuator Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06 87

Table 8 Weights for Type 3254-1 and Type 3254-7 Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 Valve without actuator (approx.) Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg 150 380 380 lbs 331 838 838 kg 150 380 580 On request lbs 331 838 1278 kg 175 420 700 lbs 386 926 1543 On request Actuator cm² 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 (approx.) Type 3277 (approx.) Without handwheel With handwheel Without handwheel With handwheel kg 22 70 450 950 lbs 48.5 154.5 992 2095 kg 27 lbs 59.5 kg 26 lbs 57.6 kg 31 lbs 68.5 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Pneumatic actuators H3 H ØD a Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a 100 a2 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L Type 3254-1 Type 3254-7 88 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06

Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve NPS 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 Class 150 to 600 H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 mm 732 752 1083 1365 inch 28.82 29.6 42.64 53.74 mm 787 807 1083 1365 1485 inch 30.98 31.77 42.64 53.74 58.46 mm 972 992 1168 1450 1719 1810 1870 inch 38.26 39.05 45.98 57.08 67.67 71.26 73.62 mm 732 752 1083 1365 inch 28.82 29.6 42.64 53.74 mm 787 807 1083 1365 1485 inch 30.98 31.77 42.64 53.74 58.46 mm 972 992 1168 1450 1719 inch 38.26 39.05 45.98 57.08 67.67 71.26 mm 169 400 480 inch 373 882 1058 mm On 169 400 680 inch request 373 882 1500 mm 195 440 800 inch 430 970 1764 On request Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Valve NPS 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 Class 150 H4 for actuator Class 300/600 H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 mm 841 841 1139 1455 inch 33.1 33.1 44.85 57.3 mm 896 896 1139 1455 1905 inch 35.3 35.3 44.85 57.3 75 mm 1081 1081 1224 1540 2139 2150 2180 inch 42.56 42.56 48.2 60.63 84.21 84.64 85.82 mm 841 841 1271 1855 inch 33.1 33.1 50.04 73.03 mm 896 896 1271 1855 inch 35.3 35.3 50.04 73.03 mm 1081 1081 1356 1940 inch 42.56 42.56 53.4 76.4 mm 841 841 1271 1990 inch 33.1 33.1 50.04 78.35 mm 896 896 1271 1990 inch 35.27 35.27 50.04 78.35 mm 1081 1081 1356 2075 inch 42.56 42.56 53.4 81.7 mm 169 400 480 inch 373 882 1058 mm On 169 400 680 inch request 373 882 1500 mm 195 440 800 inch 430 970 1764 On request Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06 89

H4 Type 3254 with bellows seal or insulating section L The following details are required on ordering Valve size NPS Pressure rating PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in lb/cu.ft or kg/m³ and temperature in C Flow rate lbs/h or kg/h or cu.ft/min or m³/h under normal or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (psi) (absolute pressure p abs ), both with minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. 90 Data Sheet T 8061 EN 2007-06

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Angle Valve Type 3256 Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements Nominal sizes DN 15 to 200 Nominal pressures PN 16 to 400 Temperatures 200 to 500 C Conversion of valve sizing coefficients: C v (in US gallons/min) = 1.17 K vs (in m 3 /h) K vs (in m 3 /h) = 0.86 C v (in US gallons/min) Type 3256 Angle Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3256-1 Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3256-7 Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment. Valve body optionally made of High-temperature steel Cold-resisting steel or Stainless cast steel. Valve plug optionally with Metal sealing Soft sealing up to PN 40 or Lapped-in metal sealing Balanced plug to handle large differential pressures. Stuffing boxes optionally with Spring-loaded, PTFE V-ring packings or Two adjustable high-temperature (HT) packings, optionally available with a test connection between the two packings. The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Versions Standard version (Fig. 1) DN 15 to 150 in PN 16 to 160, DN 200 in PN 40 to 100, with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C or with adjustable high-temperature packings for 10 to 350 C. Type 3256-1 (Fig. 1) With Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (350 to 2800 cm 2 ). Type 3256-7 With Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (350 and 700 cm 2 ) for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN for details). Additional versions with Nominal pressures > PN 160 to 400 On request Nominal size DN 250 and DN 300 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to DIN EN 12 627 Flow divider for noise level reduction See T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN, T 8083 EN Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type 3256-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator, positioner and solenoid valve Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical Data Additional handwheel See T 8310-1/-2 EN ANSI version NPS 1 2 to 8, ANSI Class 300 to 2500 See Data Sheet T 8066 EN Type 3256-3 Hand-operated Control Valve With Type 3273 Manual Actuator for valves with a max. travel of 30 mm See Data Sheet T 8312 EN Type 3256-2 Electric Control Valve On request Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02 91

Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat and the plug. The version with metal bellows seal (Fig. 3) is equipped with a test connection to allow the monitoring of the stainless steel bellows. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 4) needs to be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves can be equipped with a Flow Divider St I or St III (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fig. 2 Type 3256-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the pneumatic actuator (see Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for details), the control valve offers two fail-safe actions which become effective upon a supply air failure: "Actuator stem extends" (fail-close) The valve is closed when the air supply fails. "Actuator stem retracts" (fail-open) The valve is opened when the air supply fails. Fig. 3 Type 3256 Valve with metal bellows seal and Flow Divider St I Fig. 4 Type 3256 Angle Valve with balanced valve plug 92 Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3256 Angle Valve Material Cast steel 1.0619 Cast steel 1.7357 Nominal size DN DN 15... 150 DN 200 up to PN 100 Nominal pressure 1) PN PN 16... 160 End connection Flanges All DIN EN versions Welding ends DIN EN 12627 Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless cast steel 1.4581 Temperature ranges [ C] Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagram (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Valve body without insulating section 10... 220 C with high-temperature packing: 10... 350 C Body with Insulating section 10... 400 C 10... 500 C 10... 450 C Bellows section 10... 400 C 10... 500 C 10... 450 C Metal sealing 200... 500 C Standard Valve plug 2) Soft sealing 200... 220 C Balanced With PTFE ring 200... 220 C With graphite ring +220... 500 C Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Valve plug Standard Balanced Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal With PTFE ring With graphite ring IV VI IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 IV III 1) Up to PN 400 on request 2) Only when suitable body material is used Table 2 Materials (material numbers according to EN) Standard version Valve body 1) Cast steel 1.0619 Cast steel 1.7357 Stainless cast steel 1.4581 Seat/plug 2) Metal sealing 1.4006/1.4008 1.4571/1.4581 Sealing ring for soft sealing PTFE with glass fiber Sealing ring for balanced plug PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 2.4610 Stuffing box packing V-ring packing of PTFE with carbon, spring of 1.4310 or HT packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 1.7335 1.4571 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 1.7335 1.4571 Metal bellows 1.4571 Heating jacket 1.4541 1) Also see pressure-temperature diagrams (T 8000-2 EN) Material for temperatures above 500 C: 1.7380 Material for cryogenic service: 1.6220 or 1.4308 2) All seats and valve plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plugs of solid Stellite Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02 93

Table 3 Kvs coefficients Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (Kvs I) or St III (Kvs III) Kvs 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 360 630 Kvs I 1.45 2.2 3.6 5.7 9 14.5 22 36 57 90 144 225 320 560 Kvs III 3.0 4.8 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 270 Seat 6 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 125 150 200 Travel 15 30 60 Table 3b Versions without flow divider Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Kvs DN 1) 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 360 630 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Kvs I 1.45 2.2 3.6 5.7 9 14.5 22 36 57 90 144 225 320 560 DN 1) 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Kvs III 3.0 4.8 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 270 320 DN 1) 50 2) 80 100 150 200 1) DN 65 on request 2) DN 50 version with Flow Divider St III not possible with bellows seal 94 Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 4a Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) 350 700 1400 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) 0.4...2.0 0.8...2.4 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.6...3.0 0.5...2.5 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.4...2.3 (1.85...2.3) 1.1...2.4 2.1...3.3 (2.7...3.3) 1.4...2.7 (2.05...2.7) 2.35...3.8 (3.05...3.8) 1.3...2.8 2.6...4.3 (3.45...4.3) 1.7...3.2 (2.45...3.2) 2800 2x2800 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) Required supply pressure DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 15 to 40 50 40 to 80 40 to 100 50 to 100 80 to 150 80 to 150 100 to 150 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 to 2.5 4 to 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 200 160 150 250 200 250 150 360 200 360 200 630 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 0.9...1.6 1.1...1.8 (1.25...1.6) 1.0...2.1 Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Δp when p2 = 0 bar 1.25...2.35 (1.55...2.1) 1.1...2.6 1.5...3.0 (1.85...2.6) 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 8.5 22.4 22.4 50.5 36.6 78.1 92.1 141 700 (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) 350 7.7 22 22 49.5 35.5 77.3 91.3 140 700 (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) 350 4.1 12.4 12.4 29.1 21 45.8 54.2 83.4 700 (62.5) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) 350 7.9 7.9 19 13.4 30.1 35.7 55.1 700 (41.2) (85.7) (130) (99.6) (147) (166) (188) 700 4.3 10.7 10.7 23.6 17.1 36.4 42.8 65.3 73.3 81.3 1400 (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) 700 6.3 6.3 14.4 10.4 22.5 26.5 40.7 45.7 50.8 1400 (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) 700 8.7 6.2 13.7 16.3 25 28.2 31.3 1400 (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) 700 5.4 8.7 10.3 15.9 17.9 19.9 1400 (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) 700 5.4 8.6 10.2 15.8 17.8 19.8 1400 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) 1400 7.5 4.4 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.6 16.7 2800 (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) 1400 7.4 4.3 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.4 8.7 11.5 2800 (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.3 8.6 11.5 2800 (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) 1400 4 5.2 4.7 6.4 2800 (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02 95

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve OPEN" Table 4b Fail-safe action "valve OPEN" (fail-open) 350 Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 2800 2x2800 0.2... 1.0 (0.2... 0.6) Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar 15 to 40 50 40 to 80 40 to 100 50 to 100 80 to 150 80 to 150 100 to 150 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 to 2.5 4 to 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 350 102 380 400 350 101 380 400 350 22.4 92.1 203 343 700 (106) (245) (400) 350 21.6 91.3 203 342 700 (105) (244) (400) 350 12.4 54.2 121 204 700 (62.5) (146) (280) (400) 350 7.9 35.7 80.1 136 700 (41) (97) (185) (297) 700 10.6 42.7 94.1 158 1400 (49) (113) (216) (344) 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 1400 (30.4) (71) (135) (216) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) 700 10.2 23 39.1 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Version with valve plug with metal sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced valve plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar For the listed maximum differential pressures and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded All pressures in bar (gauge) The stated differential pressures can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram Note on fail-safe action "valve CLOSED": Always use pretensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Note! Permissible differential pressures are available on request for special versions with: Soft sealing or Lapped-in metal plug, Metal bellows seal or Balanced valve plug with graphite ring. Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size and K vs coefficient according to Table 3. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp. Select the appropriate actuator according to Tables 4a to 5b. 4. Select materials, pressure and temperature according to Tables 1 and 2 and the pressure-temperature diagram (see T 8000-2 EN) 5. Select accessories according to Tables 1 and 2. 200 160 150 250 200 250 150 360 200 360 200 630 700 10.0 22.9 38.9 1400 (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) 1400 13.6 30 50.6 2800 (15.6) (36.2) (69) (110) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (69) (110) 2x2800 ( 31) (72) (138) (220) 1400 9.4 20.8 35 2800 (10.8) (25) (47.8) (76.4) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) (76.3) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (152) 1400 5.1 11.5 19.5 2800 (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (85.6) 96 Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 5a Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Table 5b "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) 700 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) 1400 2800 2x2800 0.4...2.0 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.5...2.5 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 0.4... 2.0 (0.4... 1.2) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar 80 100 63 700 57.4 155 106 252 57.4 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 150 63 700 22.2 62.1 42.2 102 22.2 182 382 1400 (302) (381) (221) (400) 80 100 100 700 48.1 146 96.8 243 48.1 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 150 100 100 160 150 160 200 160 150 250 200 250 700 18.4 58.3 38.4 98.3 18.4 178 378 1400 (298) (378) (218) (400) 700 37.2 135 85.9 232 37.2 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 13.9 53.8 33.9 93.8 13.9 174 373 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) 700 4.6 20.2 12.4 35.8 4.6 67 145 1400 (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 1400 48.3 128 68.2 168 48.3 368 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 299 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) 150 360 200 360 1400 42.6 123 62.6 162 42.7 362 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.3 109 265 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) 200 630 1400 11.4 42.6 19.2 58.2 11.4 136 292 2800 (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02 97

Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Control Valve in standard version Valve DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Length L PN 10... 40 90 100 115 125 155 175 225 275 PN 63...160 105 115 130 150 190 215 275 325 H1 for actuator 350 cm 2 374 369 369 415 400 410 700 cm 2 374 369 369 415 400 410 628 965 1400 cm 2 470 455 465 628 965 2800 cm 2 655 640 650 713 1050 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm D 280 390 530 770 H 1) 82 200 287 620 1130 H3 2) 110 190 610 650 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 2) without lifting ring Minimum clearance to disassemble the actuator Table 7 Weights for Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Control Valve in standard version Valve DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Valve without PN 16... 40 12 15 22 35 58 75 190 420 actuator (approx. kg) PN 63...160 20 25 33 58 92 125 300 On request Without Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 8 22 70 450 950 (approx. kg) 1) With handwheel 13 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Type 3277 Without 12 26 (approx. kg) 1) With handwheel 17 31 1) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel ØD a H3 Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 ØD a H3 H H 100 a2 H1 H1 L L L Type 3256-1 L Type 3256-7 98 Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02

Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 Height H4 for actuator Weight (kg) without actuator 350 cm 2 575 570 571 685 670 680 700 cm 2 575 570 571 685 670 680 978 1400 cm 2 740 725 735 978 2015 2800 cm 2 925 910 920 1063 2100 PN 16... 40 18 21 28 45 68 85 200 PN 63...160 26 31 39 68 102 135 315 On request Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size DN 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 H4 for PN 16... 40 for actuator H4 for PN 63... 160 for actuator Weight (kg) without actuator 350 cm 2 572 567 568 794 779 769 700 cm 2 572 567 568 794 779 769 991 1400 cm 2 849 834 824 1036 2015 2800 cm 2 1034 1019 1009 1121 2100 350 cm 2 572 567 568 794 779 769 700 cm 2 572 567 568 794 779 769 991 1400 cm 2 849 834 824 1168 2800 cm 2 1034 1019 1009 1253 PN 16... 40 18 21 28 45 68 85 200 PN 63...160 26 31 39 68 102 135 315 On request H4 a b c L a L Type 3256 Angle Valve with insulating section or bellows seal Type 3256 with heating jacket Dimensions on request The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Valve plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED/valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h under standard or operating conditions Pressure p 1and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) with minimum, standard and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8065 EN 2008-02 99

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Angle Valve Type 3256 ANSI version Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements Valve size NPS 1 2 to 8 Pressure rating ANSI Class 300 to 2500 Temperatures 200 C to 500 C ( 325 to 930 F) Type 3256 Angle Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3256-1 Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3256-7 Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment. Valve body optionally made of High-temperature carbon steel Cold-resisting carbon steel or Stainless carbon steel. Valve plug optionally with Metal sealing Soft sealing up to Class 300 or Lapped-in metal Balanced to handle large differential pressures. Stuffing boxes optionally with Spring-loaded PTFE V-ring packings or Two adjustable high-temperature (HT) packings, optionally available with a test connection between the two packings. The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be combined with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Versions Standard version (Fig. 1) NPS 1 2 to 6, ANSI Class 300 to 900, NPS 8 up to Class 600, with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 430 F) or with adjustable high-temperature packing for 10 to 350 C (15 to 660 F). Type 3256-1 (Fig. 1) With Type 3271 Actuator (effective area 350 to 2800 cm 2 ). Type 3256-7 With Type 3277 Actuator (350 and 700 cm 2 ) for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN). Additional versions with ANSI Class 1500 and 2500 On request Valves in NPS 10 and 12 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to ANSI B16.25 Flow divider For noise level reduction See T 8081 EN AC-Trim See T 8082 EN, T 8083 EN Fig. 1 Type 3256-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator, positioner and solenoid valve Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical Data Heating jacket Details on request Additional handwheel See T 8310-1/-2 EN DIN version DN 15 to 200, PN 10 to 160 See Data Sheet T 8065 EN Type 3256-3 Hand-operated Control Valve With Type 3273 Manual Actuator for valves with a max. travel of 30 mm See T 8312 EN Type 3256-2 Electric Control Valve On request Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02 101

Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat and plug. The version with metal bellows seal (Fig. 3) is equipped with a test connection to allow the monitoring of the stainless steel bellows. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 4) needs to be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves can be equipped with Flow Divider St I or St III (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fig. 2 Type 3256-1 Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for details), the control valve offers two different fail-safe actions which become effective upon supply air failure. "Actuator stem extends": Whenever the air supply fails, the valve is closed (fail-close). "Actuator stem retracts": Whenever the air supply fails, the valve is opened (fail-open). Fig. 3 Type 3256 Valve with Flow Divider St I and additional metal bellows seal with test connection Fig. 4 Type 3256 Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug 102 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3256 Angle Valve Material Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Valve sizes NPS 1 2... 6 NPS 8 up to Class 900 Pressure rating 1) Class 150... 900 End connection Flanges All ANSI versions Welding ends According to ANSI B16.25 Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Temperature ranges in C ( F) Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Valve body without insulating section 10 220 C (14 428 F) Up to 350 C (660 F) with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 29...427 C ( 20...800 F) 29...500 C ( 20...930 F) 200...450 C ( 325...842 F) Bellows section 29...427 C ( 20...800 F) 29...500 C ( 20...930 F) 200...450 C ( 325...842 F) Valve plug 2) Standard Metal sealing 200...500 C ( 325...930 F) Soft sealing 200...220 C ( 325...428 F) Balanced PTFE ring 200...220 C ( 325...428 F) Graphite ring 220...500 C ( 428...930 F) Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 / ANSI/FCI 70-2-1991 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing IV Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Balanced, metal sealing VI IV-S2 NPS 4 and larger: IV-S1 With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) Up to Class 2500 on request 2) Only when suitable body material is used Table 2 Materials (material numbers according to EN) Standard version Body and flanges 1) Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Seat and plug 2) Metal sealing 1.4006/1.4008 1.4571/1.4581 Seal ring for Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced plug PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 2.4610 Stuffing box packing V-ring packing of PTFE with carbon, spring of 1.4310 or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows 1.4571 Heating jacket 1.4541 1) Also see pressure-temperature diagram (T 8000-2 EN) Material for cryogenic service: A 352 LCC 2) Also available: seats and plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plugs of solid Stellite 3) Depending on the valve bonnet material Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02 103

Table 3 Kvs coefficients Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (Cv I/K vs I) or St III (Cv III/K vs III) 0.12 0.2 Cv 0.3 0.5 0.75 1.2 2 3 5 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 290 420 735 0.1 0.16 Kvs 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 360 630 Cv I 1.7 2.6 4.2 7 10.5 17 26 42 67 105 170 265 375 650 Kvs I 1.45 2.2 3.6 5.7 9 14.5 22 36 57 90 144 225 320 560 Cv III 3.5 5.6 9 14 23 35 55 90 140 220 315 Kvs III 3.0 4.8 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 270 Seat mm 6 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 125 150 200 Rated mm 15 30 60 travel in 0.5 1.18 2.36 Table 3b Versions without flow dividers Versions in highlighted fields also available with balanced valve plug 0.12 0.2 Cv 0.3 0.5 0.75 1.2 2 3 5 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 290 420 735 NPS DN 1 2 15 1 25 1 1 2 40 2 50 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I Versions in highlighted fields also available with balanced valve plug Cv I 1.7 2.6 4.2 7 10.5 17 26 42 67 105 170 265 375 650 NPS DN 1 2 15 1 25 1 1 2 40 2 50 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Cv III 3.5 5.6 9 14 23 35 55 90 140 220 315 NPS DN 2 * 50 * 3 80 4 100 6 150 8 200 * NPS 2 version (DN 50) with Flow Divider St III not possible with bellows seal 104 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02

Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Version with valve plug with metal sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced valve plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar (psi) For the listed maximum differential pressures and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded. All pressures in bar (gauge) and psi The stated differential pressures can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram (see T 8000-2 EN). Overview: valve versions of the Δp tables Tables 4a and 4b: valve with unbalanced valve plug without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Tables 5a and 5b: valve with balanced valve plug with PTFE ring without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" or "valve OPEN" Tables 6a and 6b: valve with unbalanced valve plug without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve OPEN" Note on fail-safe action "valve CLOSED": Always use pretensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Note! Permissible differential pressures are available on request for special versions with: Soft sealing or Lapped-in metal plug, Metal bellows seal or Balanced valve plug with graphite ring. Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size and K vs coefficient according to Table 3. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp. Select the suitable actuator according to Tables 4a to 6. 4. Select materials, pressure and temperature according to Tables 1 and 2 and the pressure-temperature diagram (see T 8000-2 EN) 5. Select accessories according to Tables 1 and 2. Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02 105

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Pressures in bar Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 4a Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) 350 0.4...1.2 Bench range 700 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 0.4...2.0 (bar) with actuator 1400 (0.8...1.2) (cm 2 ) 2800 0.4...1.2 0.8...2.4 1.0...3.0 2x2800 (0.8...1.2) (1.6...2.4) (2.0...3.0) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm 2 1 2 to 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 to 3 1 1 2 to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to 6 0.12 to 1.2 2 to 3 5 to 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 0.8...2.4 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 0.6...3.0 0.5...2.5 0.9...1.6 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.1...1.8 (1.25...1.6) 1.4...2.3 (1.85...2.3) 1.1...2.4 1.0...2.1 Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Δp when p2 = 0 bar 2.1...3.3 (2.7...3.3) 1.4...2.7 (2.05...2.7) 1.25...2.35 (1.55...2.1) 2.35...3.8 (3.05...3.8) 1.3...2.8 1.1...2.6 2.6...4.3 (3.45...4.3) 1.7...3.2 (2.45...3.2) 1.5...3.0 (1.85...2.6) 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 46.1 102 102 213 158 325 380 400 350 8.5 22.4 22.4 50.5 36.6 78.1 92.1 141 700 (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) 350 7.7 22 22 49.5 35.5 77.3 91.3 140 700 (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) 350 4.1 12.4 12.4 29.1 21 45.8 54.2 83.4 700 (62.5) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) 350 7.9 7.9 19 13.4 30.1 35.7 55.1 700 (41.2) (85.7) (130) (99.6) (147) (166) (188) 700 4.3 10.7 10.7 23.6 17.1 36.4 42.8 65.3 73.3 81.3 1400 (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) 700 6.3 6.3 14.4 10.4 22.5 26.5 40.7 45.7 50.8 1400 (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) 700 8.7 6.2 13.7 16.3 25 28.2 31.3 1400 (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) 700 5.4 8.7 10.3 15.9 17.9 19.9 1400 (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) 700 5.4 8.6 10.2 15.8 17.8 19.8 1400 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) 1400 7.5 4.4 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.6 16.7 2800 (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) 1400 7.4 4.3 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.4 8.7 11.5 2800 (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.3 8.6 11.5 2800 (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) (43) (51.4) 1400 4 5.2 4.7 6.4 2800 (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) 106 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Pressures in psi Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 4b Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) 350 700 1400 3... 15 2800 2x2800 6... 18 (12... 18) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm 2 1 2 to 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 to 3 1 1 2 to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to 6 6... 18 6... 18 (12... 18) 12... 36 (23... 36) 6... 30 15... 45 (30... 45) 12... 36 12... 36 (23... 36) 18... 52 (35... 52) 9... 45 7... 36 15... 23 18... 52 20... 34 30... 48 18... 52 (35... 52) 15... 45 (30... 45) 16... 26 (18... 23) Upper spring range value + 3 psi Δp when p2 = 0 psi 20... 34 (27... 34) 16... 36 15... 30 30... 48 (39... 48) 20... 39 (30... 39) 18... 34 (22... 30) 35... 55 (44... 55) 19... 41 11... 36 36... 6.2 (50... 52) 25... 46 (36... 46) 22... 45 (27... 36) 0.12 to 1.2 350 668 1479 1479 3088 2291 4712 5510 5800 2 to 3 350 668 1479 1479 3088 2291 4712 5510 5800 5 to 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 350 123 325 325 732 530 1132 1335 2044 700 (1537) (3146) (4770) (3654) (5365) (5800) 350 111 319 319 717 514 1121 1324 2030 700 (1522) (3146) (4756) (3654) (5365) (5800) 350 59 180 180 422 305 664 786 1209 700 (906) (1870) (2842) (2175) (3204) (3625) (4118) 350 114 114 275 194 436 517 799 700 (597) (1242) (1885) (1444) (2131) (2407) (2726) 700 62 155 155 342 248 527 620 947 1063 1178 1400 (713) (145) (1827) (1870) (2247) 700 91 91 209 151 326 384 590 662 736 1400 (443) (912) (1147) (1176) (1411) 700 126 90 198 236 362 409 454 1400 (272) (562) (707) (726) (871) 700 78 126 149 230 259 288 1400 (172) (358) (451) (462) (555) 700 78 124 148 224 258 287 1400 (171) (356) (449) (461) (554) 1400 108 64 137 152 197 183 242 2800 (227) (465) (584) (703) (361) (451) (539) 1400 107 62 137 152 197 181 240 2800 (226) (464) (584) (703) (361) (449) (539) 2x2800 (452) (928) (1168) (1406) (722) (899) (1079) 1400 74 94 104 136 126 166 2800 (156) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (374) 1400 74 94 104 135 125 166 2800 (155) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (372) 2x2800 (310) (644) (809) (974) (499) (623) (745) 1400 58 75 68 93 2800 (87) (180) (226) (272) (139) (174) (209) 2x2800 (174) (359) (452) (545) (278) (348) (417) Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02 107

Table 5a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in bar Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Fail-safe action "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) 700 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) 1400 2800 2x2800 0.4...2.0 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.5...2.5 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 0.4... 2.0 (0.4... 1.2) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar 3 700 57.4 155 106 252 57.4 400 75 4 1400 (400) (400) (400) 6 75 3 4 120 6 120 4 190 6 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 700 22.2 62.1 42.2 102 22.2 182 382 1400 (302) (381) (221) (400) 700 48.1 146 96.8 243 48.1 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 18.4 58.3 38.4 98.3 18.4 178 378 1400 (298) (378) (218) (400) 700 37.2 135 85.9 232 37.2 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) 700 13.9 53.8 33.9 93.8 13.9 174 373 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) 700 4.6 20.2 12.4 35.8 4.6 67 145 1400 (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 1400 48.3 128 68.2 168 48.3 368 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 299 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) 1400 42.6 123 62.6 162 42.7 362 400 2800 (400) (400) (400) (400) 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.3 109 265 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) 1400 11.4 42.6 19.2 58.2 11.4 136 292 2800 (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) 108 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02

Table 5b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in psi Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Fail-safe action "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) 700 9...45 18...52 Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) 1400 2800 2x2800 6...30 12...36 (23...36) 7...36 15...44 (30...44) 9...45 18...52 (36...52) 6... 30 (6... 18) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi 36 60 90 Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 psi 3 700 832 2247 1537 3654 832 5800 75 4 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) 6 75 3 4 120 6 120 4 190 6 190 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 700 322 900 615 1479 322 2639 5539 1400 (4379) (5524) (3204) (5800) 700 697 2117 1403 2523 697 5800 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) 700 267 845 557 1425 267 2581 5481 1400 (4321) (5481) (3161) (5800) 700 539 1957 1245 3364 539 5800 1400 (5800) (5800) (5800) 700 201 780 491 1360 201 2523 5408 1400 (4248) (5409) (3088) (5800) 700 66 293 179 519 66 971 2102 1400 (1653) (2102) (1197) (3001) (5263) 1400 700 1856 989 2436 700 5336 5800 2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 1400 261 713 374 939 261 2073 4335 2800 (3422) (4321) (5234) (2523) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5046) (5800) 1400 617 1783 907 2349 619 5249 5800 2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) 1400 229 681 342 907 221 1580 3842 2800 (3393) (4292) (5205) (2494) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4988) (5800) 1400 165 617 278 844 165 1972 4234 2800 (3335) (4234) (5133) (2421) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4843) (5800) Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02 109

Table 6 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal Fail-safe action "valve OPEN" Table 6a Pressures in bar Table 6b Pressures in psi 350 Bench range (bar/psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 2800 2x2800 0.2... 1.0 (0.2... 0.6) 3... 15 (3... 9) Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 20 36 60 90 NPS Cv Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar Δp when p2 = 0 psi 1 2 to 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 to 3 0.12 to 1.2 2 to 3 5 to 12 20 350 102 380 400 1479 5510 5800 350 101 380 400 1464 5510 5800 350 22.4 92.1 203 343 325 1335 2943 4973 700 (106) (245) (400) (1537) (3552) (5800) 350 21.6 91.3 203 342 313 1324 2943 4959 700 (105) (244) (400) (1522) (3538) (5800) 350 12.4 54.2 121 204 180 786 1754 2958 700 (62.5) (146) (280) (400) (906) (2117) (4060) (5800) 1 1 2 to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to 6 30 47 75 120 190 350 7.9 35.7 80.1 136 114 517 1161 1972 700 (41) (97) (185) (297) 594 2682 2682 4306 700 10.6 42.7 94.1 158 153 619 1364 2291 1400 (49) (113) (216) (344) (710) (1638) (3123) 4988 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 90 383 851 1438 1400 (30.4) (71) (135) (216) (441) (1023) (1957) (3132) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 235 525 889 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) (271) (633) (1218) (1943) 700 10.2 23 39.1 148 333 567 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) (171) (403) (775) (1232) 8 190 6 290 8 290 6 420 8 420 8 735 700 10.0 22.9 38.9 145 332 564 1400 (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) (168) (401) (773) (1232) 1400 13.6 30 50.6 197 435 731 2800 (15.6) (36.2) (69) (110) (226) (525) (1000) (1595) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 195 433 731 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (69) (110) (224) (523) (1000) (1595) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (220) (449) (1044) (2001) (3190) 1400 9.4 20.8 35 136 301 507 2800 (10.8) (25) (47.8) (76.4) (156) (362) (693) (1108) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 135 300 506 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) (76.3) (156) (362) (693) (1108) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (152) (310) (725) (1386) (2204) 1400 5.1 11.5 19.5 74 166 282 2800 (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) (85) (201) (388) (620) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (85.6) (171) (403) (777) (1241) 110 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02

Table 7 Dimensions in mm for Type 3256-1 and Type 3256-7 Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 Length L H1for actuator Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900 350 cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class 900 700 cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class 900 1400 cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class 900 2800 cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class 900 mm 92 92 111 127 149 176 225 271 in 3.6 3.6 4.37 5 5.86 6.93 8.86 10.67 mm 95 98 117 133 159 184 236 284 in 3.75 3.86 4.6 5.23 6.26 7.24 9.29 11.18 mm 101 105 125 143 168 197 254 304 in 3.97 4.13 4.92 5.63 6.6 7.75 10 11.97 mm 108 127 152 184 190 228 305 369 in 4.25 5 5.98 7.24 7.48 8.97 12 14.53 mm 374 369 369 415 400 410 in 14.72 14.52 14.52 16.34 15.75 16.14 mm 415 410 410 461 400 410 in 16.34 16.14 16.14 18.15 15.75 16.14 mm 374 369 369 415 400 410 628 in 14.72 14.52 14.52 16.34 15.75 16.14 24.72 mm 415 410 410 461 400 410 628 in 16.34 16.14 16.14 18.15 15.75 16.14 24.72 mm 470 455 465 628 in 18.5 17.9 18.3 24.72 mm 516 455 465 628 in 20.3 17.9 18.3 24.72 mm 650 713 in 25.6 28.1 mm 650 713 in 25.6 28.1 On request Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm mm 280 390 530 770 in 11.02 15.35 20.86 30.3 H 1) mm 82 200 287 620 1130 in 3.23 7.87 11.3 24.41 44.49 H3 2) mm 110 190 610 650 in 4.33 7.48 24 25.6 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance to disassemble the actuator Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02 111

Table 8 Weights for Type 3256-1and Type 3256-7 Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 Valve without actuator (approx.) Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg 12 35 58 75 190 On On request lbs 26 77 128 165 419 request kg On request 58 92 lbs 128 203 kg On request 38 57 91 110 lbs 84 126 200 242 On request Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 (approx. kg) 1) Without With handwheel Type 3277 (approx. kg) 1) Without With handwheel kg 8 22 70 450 950 lbs 17.6 48.5 154.5 992 2095 kg 13 27 lbs 28.7 59.5 kg 12 26 lbs 26.5 57.6 kg 17 31 lbs 37.5 68.5 1) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN ØD a H3 Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 ØD a H3 H H 100 a2 H1 H1 L Type 3256-1 Type 3256-7 L L L H4 Type 3256 with heating jacket Dimensions on request a L Type 3256 with bellows seal or insulating section b c L a 112 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02

Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 Class 150... 600 H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 350 cm 2 mm 575 570 571 685 670 680 in 22.63 22.44 22.48 26.97 26.37 26.77 700 cm 2 mm 575 570 571 685 670 680 in 22.63 22.44 22.48 26.97 26.37 26.77 1400 cm 2 mm 740 725 735 978 in 29.13 28.54 28.93 38.5 2800 cm 2 mm 920 1063 in 36.22 41.85 350 cm 2 mm 606 606 606 727 670 680 in 23.85 23.85 23.85 28.62 26.37 26.77 700 cm 2 mm 606 606 606 727 670 680 978 in 23.85 23.85 23.85 28.62 26.37 26.77 38.5 1400 cm 2 mm 782 725 735 978 in 30.78 28.54 28.93 38.5 2800 cm 2 mm 920 1063 in 36.22 41.85 Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg 20 43 66 94 210 lbs 44 95 146 207 463 On request kg 66 100 lbs On 146 220 On request kg request 46 65 99 120 lbs 101 143 218 264 On request Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Valve NPS 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 350 cm 2 mm 572 567 568 794 779 769 in 22.52 22.32 22.36 31.26 30.67 30.27 Class 150 700 cm 2 mm 572 567 568 794 779 769 1036 in 22.52 22.32 22.36 31.26 30.67 30.27 40.78 H4 1400 cm 2 mm 849 841 824 1036 On for actuator in 33.42 33.1 32.44 40.78 request 2800 cm 2 mm 1009 1121 in 39.72 44.13 350 cm 2 mm 572 567 568 794 779 769 in 22.52 22.32 22.36 31.26 30.67 30.27 Class 300/600 700 cm 2 mm 572 567 568 794 779 769 1168 1445 in 22.52 22.32 22.36 31.26 30.67 30.27 45.98 56.89 H4 1400 cm 2 mm 849 841 824 1168 1445 for actuator in 33.42 33.1 32.44 45.98 56.89 2800 cm 2 mm 1009 1253 1530 in 39.72 49.33 60.24 350 cm 2 mm 845 845 779 769 in 33.26 33.26 30.67 30.27 On request Class 900 700 cm 2 mm 845 845 779 769 1168 in 33.26 33.26 30.67 30.27 45.98 H4 1400 cm 2 mm 834 824 1068 for actuator On request in 32.83 32.44 45.98 On request 2800 cm 2 mm 1009 1253 in 39.72 49.33 Class kg 20 43 66 94 210 150/300 lbs 44 95 146 207 463 On request Weight Class 600 kg 66 100 without actuator for lbs 146 220 On request Class 900 kg 46 65 99 120 On request lbs 101 143 218 264 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02 113

The following details are required on ordering Nominal size NPS... Nominal pressure ANSI Class... Body material According to Table 2 Connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in lb/cu.ft or kg/m 3 and temperature in C ( F) Flow rate lbs/h or kg/h or cu.ft/min or m 3 /h in standard or operating conditions Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (psi) (absolute pressure p abs) with minimum, standard and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. 114 Data Sheet T 8066 EN 2008-02

Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3252-1 and Type 3252-7 High Pressure Valve Type 3252 Application Control valve used to control very low flow rates in process engineering Valve sizes G ½ to G 1 ½ NPT to 1 NPT DN 15 to 25 NPS ½ to 1 Pressure rating PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Temperatures 200 to 450 C 328 to 842 F Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with globe-style or angle-style valve body with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3252-1 Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3252-7 Control Valve) Valve body Material 1.4404/A 316 L G or NPT threaded connection, optionally welding ends or weld-on flanges Valve plug With metal sealing The control valves have a modular-assembly design and can be equipped with various accessories as follows: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment for attachment according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation. For more details, refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN. Versions Standard version designed as globe-style or angle-style valve body with V-ring PTFE packing suitable for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 430 F) Nominal pressure PN 40 to PN 400, Class 300 to 2500 Female thread G ½, G ¾,G1or½NPT, ¾ NPT, 1 NPT Body material 1.4404/A 316 L Type 3252-1 Valve with Type 3271-5 Pneumatic Actuator (120 cm²) or Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (350 cm²) Type 3252-7 Valve (Fig. 1) with Type 3277-5 Pneumatic Actuator (120 cm²) or with Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (350 cm²) for integral positioner attachment. Additional versions available with Welding ends DN 15, 20, 25 or NPS ½, ¾, 1 Flanges DN 15, 20, 25 or NPS ½, ¾, 1 Male thread On request Insulating section For temperatures from 200 to 450 C ( 328 to 842 F) Bellows seal For PN 40 to PN 400 or Class 150 to 2500 Special valve body materials On request Adjustable packing Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type 3252-7 High Pressure Valve with Type 3767 Electropneumatic Positioner Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10 115

Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the seat and the plug. The plug stem is connected to the actuator stem by a stem connector and sealed with a self-adjusting packing. In case stricter emissions requirements are specified, the valve can be equipped with a multiple-walled metal bellows. Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions in case the supply air fails: Actuator stem extends (FA) Whenever the supply air fails, the valve closes. Actuator stem retracts (FE) Whenever the supply air fails, the valve opens. Fig. 3 Type 3252 High Pressure Valve as angle-style valve with welding ends Fig. 2 Type 3252 High Pressure Valve as globe-style valve with welding ends Fig. 4 Type 3252-1 High Pressure Valve with insulating section or bellows seal 116 Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10

Table 1 Technical data for Type 3252 Connection Female thread Welding ends Weld-on flanges Nominal sizes G ½, G ¾, G 1 ½ NPT, ¾ NPT, 1 NPT DIN 15, 20, 25 NPS ½, ¾, 1 DIN 15, 20, 25 NPS ½, ¾, 1 Nominal pressures PN 40 400 or Class 300 2500 Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing or lapped-in metal, Soft sealing for K VS 0.1 and larger up to an operating pressure of 50 bar Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Quick opening Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges Body without insulating section Body with Insul. section short long Bellows seal 10 220 C (14 428 F) 50 450 C ( 58 842 F) 200 450 C ( 328 842 F) 50 450 C ( 58 842 F) Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Metal sealing: IV Lapped-in metal: IV-S2 Soft sealing: VI Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body Valve bonnet (wetted parts) Seat and plug Packing Body gasket Insulating section Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece Metal bellows 1.4404 / A 316 L Other materials on request 1.4404 / A 316 L 1.4404 / A 316 L (stellited seats as well as plugs made of solid Stellite available) V-ring packing PTFE with carbon 1.4404 / A 316 L 1.4404 / A 316 L 1.4404 / A 316 L 1.4571 / A 316 Ti Table 3 Available K VS and C V coefficients Table 3a Overview K VS 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 C V 0.12 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.75 1.2 2 3 5 Seat 6 12 14 Travel 7.5 Plug stem 10 Table 3b Nominal sizes and associated K VS and C V coefficients K VS 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 C V 0.12 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.75 1.2 2 3 5 DN NPS 15 ½ 20 ¾ 25 1 Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10 117

Table 4 Permissible differential pressures for versions without bellows seal Pressures in bar Table 4a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 0.2 1.0 0.4 2.0 1.4 2.3 2.1 3.3 Operating range 120 cm² 0.6 1.0 1.2 2.0 with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size 350 cm² 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.4 1.85 2.3 2.7 3.3 Required supply pressure bar 1.4 2.6 2.5 3.5 Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to 25 NPS ½ to 1 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 2.5 Table 4b Fail-safe position Valve OPEN 4 120 50 120 200 300 350 250 400 120 35 85 140 210 350 175 350 400 120 25 60 100 150 350 130 270 310 400 Bench range 0.2 1.0 Operating range 120 cm² with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size 350 cm² 0.2 0.6 Required supply pressure bar 1.4 2.5 3.5 Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to 25 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 120 90 230 375 350 300 400 120 60 165 260 350 210 400 120 45 120 190 350 150 375 400 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures for versions with bellows seal Pressures in bar Table 5a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 120/350 cm² 0.2 1.0 0.4 2.0 1.4 2.3 2.1 3.3 Operating range 120 cm² 0.6 1.0 1.2 2.0 with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size 1.85 2.3 2.7 3.3 350 cm² 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.4 Bench range 700 cm² 0.6 3.0 0.6 3.0 Operating range 700 cm² 2.4 3.0 3.0 3.6 with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size Required supply pressure bar 1.4 2.6 2.5 3.5 Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to 25 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 120 15 30 50 350 45 100 120 185 700 325 400 120 15 30 50 350 45 100 120 185 700 325 400 120 15 30 50 350 45 100 120 185 700 300 400 118 Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10

Table 5b Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 0.2 1.0 Operating range 120 cm² with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size 350 cm² 0.2 0.6 700 cm² 0.2 0.4 Required supply pressure bar 1.4 2.5 3.5 Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to 25 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 120 6 39 68 350 52 145 230 700 153 340 400 120 36 62 350 47 130 210 700 140 310 400 120 32 56 350 42 120 190 700 125 284 400 Table 6 Dimensions and weights for Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with globe-style valve body Valve Length L with female thread Length L with welding ends Length L with flanges Size DIN ANSI DN 15 20 25 NPS ½ ¾ 1 PN 40 400 PN 40 400 130 130 130 (PN 40 only) 130 Cl. 300...2500 Cl. 300...2500 PN 40 210 210 230 Cl. 300 190 194 197 PN 63 Cl. 600 210 230 203 206 210 160 PN 250 400 230 260 130 130 Cl. 900/ 1500 216 229 254 Cl. 2500 264 273 308 B PN 40 70 70 70 Cl. 300 70 70 70 H1 400 246 246 246 2500 246 246 246 H2 26 26 26 26 26 26 Weights in kg for globe valve including yoke With female thread PN 40 8.5 Cl. 300 400 2500 On request With welding ends 6.5 With flanges PN 400 13 19.5 Cl. 2500 12.5 13.5 16.5 Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10 119

Table 7 Dimensions and weights for Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with angle-style valve body Valve Length L with female thread Length L with welding ends Length L with flanges Size DIN ANSI DN 15 20 25 NPS ½ ¾ 1 PN 40 400 PN 40 400 57 60 57 (PN 40 only) 57 Cl. 300...2500 Cl. 300...2500 PN 40 90 95 100 Cl. 300 95 1) 97 1) 98 1) PN 63 160 PN 250 400 105 115 Cl. 600 102 1) 103 1) 105 1) 115 130 60 57 Cl. 900/ 1500 108 114 127 Cl. 2500 132 136 154 B PN 40 70 Cl. 300 70 H1 400 212 2500 212 Weights in kg for angle valve including yoke With female thread PN 40 7.5 Cl. 300 With welding ends 400 5.5 2500 On request With flanges PN 400 12 18.5 Cl. 2500 11.5 12.5 15.5 1) Special length Table 8 Dimensions in mm for versions with insulating section or bellows seal Globe-style valve DN 15 20 25 NPS ½ ¾ 1 H4 with insulating section PN 40 400 433 Cl. 300 2500 433 H4 with bellows seal PN 40 160 433 Cl. 300 900 PN 250 501 Cl. 1500 501 433 PN 400 606 Cl. 2500 606 Angle-style valve DN 15 20 25 NPS ½ ¾ 1 H4 with insulating section PN 40 400 400 Cl. 300 2500 400 H4 with bellows seal PN 40 160 400 Cl. 300 900 PN 250 468 Cl. 1500 468 400 PN 400 572 Cl. 2500 572 Weights DN 15 20 25 NPS ½ ¾ 1 Bellows seal, additional weight in kg PN 40/160 3.5 PN 250 5.0 PN 400 6.5 Cl. 300 2500 On request 120 Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10

Table 9 Dimensions and weights for actuators Actuator cm² 120 350 700 Diaphragm D 168 280 390 H (700 cm² and larger with lifting ring) 69 85 199 H3 1) (Type 3271 and Type 3277 Actuator) 225 300 Thread M30 x 1.5 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 1 8 ( 1 8 NPT) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) a2 (for Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) Weight of Type 3271Actuator W/o handwh. 3 8 22 (approx. kg) With handwh. 13 27 Weight of Type 3277Actuator W/o handwh. 3.5 12 26 (approx. kg) With handwh. 17 31 Dimensions for Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with globe-style and angle-style body ØD H3 H ØD H3 H a2 100 H4 H1 DN DN H1 DNH1 DN H2 H2 H2 H2 L Female thread L Welding ends L Flanges L Type 3252-1 with insulating section or bellows seal B DN H1 DN H1 DN H1 47 L1 L1 47 L1 L1 L1 47 L1 Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10 121

Ordering text Type 3252 Valve Valve size Pressure rating Type of connection Characteristic Direction of flow Globe- or angle-style valve body DN.../NPS PN.../Class Female thread G or NPT/ welding ends or flanges Equal percentage or linear FTO or FTC Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 see T 8310-1 EN Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m³ and temperature in C Max. flow rate in kg/h or m³/h Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 122 Data Sheet T 8053 EN 2007-10

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3259-1 and 3259-7 Angle Valve Type 3259 Application Control valve for industrial high pressure plants according to the IG standard Nominal sizes DN 16 to DN 90 Nominal pressure PN 325 Temperature range 200 to 450 C Type 3259 Angle Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator as Type 3259-1 Control Valve or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator as Type 3259-7 Control Valve for integral positioner attachment. The valve body is made of forged stainless steel. The end connections are screwed flanges with lens ring gaskets. Valve plug optionally with: Metal sealing or Lapped-in metal. The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Versions Standard version with spring-loaded double packing for temperatures between 10 and 220 C; nominal sizes DN 16, 24, 30, 45, 58, 70 and 90; nominal pressure PN 325. Body of 1.4571 with intermediate flanges made of 1.7258, end connections with screwed flanges and lens ring gaskets. Type 3259-1 Type 3259 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 350 to 2800 cm 2 effective area (see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN) Type 3259-7 Type 3259 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 and 700 cm 2 effective area for the integral positioner attachment (see T 8310-1 EN) Additional versions with Adjustable high-temperature packing For temperatures from 10 to 350 C Insulating section For temperatures from 200 to 450 C (see pressure-temperature diagram for pressures and temperatures) Heating jacket Available on request Metal bellows seal Material 2.4819 with additional backup packing and test connection Nominal size DN 120 Available on request Nominal sizes DN 6 and DN 10 As Type 3510 Microflow Valve version Fig. 1 Type 3259-1 Control Valve, DN 70, PN 325 according to the IG standard, pneumatic actuator with 2800 cm 2 effective diaphragm area Data Sheet T 8059 EN 2006-11 123

Principle of operation The medium flows through the valve in the flow-to-open direction. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat and plug. The plug stem is sealed with a spring-loaded double PTFE packing. A metal bellows seal (Fig. 3) can be used for higher requirements. A test connection is available on request for both versions. The actuators are designed for pressure from both sides (see Tables 4b and 5b). Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for further details), the control valve offers two different fail-safe positions effective upon air supply failure: Actuator stem "extends": When the air supply fails, the valve is closed (fail-close). Actuator stem "retracts": When the air supply fails, the valve is opened (fail-open). 4.2 4.2 4.1 23 5.1 5 5.5 1.1 Fig. 2 Type 3259 Valve as standard version Test connection Legend to Fig. 2 1.1 Connecting flange 4.1 Spring 4.2 PTFE V-ring packing (double) 5 Bonnet 5.1 Guide bushing 5.5 Intermediate flange 23 Lens ring gasket 450 425 400 375 350 325 300 200 p [bar] t -10 0 100 200 300 400 500 [ C] Fig. 4 Pressure-Temperature Diagram for 1.4571 Fig. 3 Type 3259 Valve with metal bellows seal and test connection 124 Data Sheet T 8059 EN 2006-11

Table 1 Technical data Nominal size DN 16 24 30 45 58 70 90 Nominal pressure PN 325 End connection Screwed flanges with lens ring gaskets according to the IG standard Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 with Kvs 1 30 : 1 with Kvs < 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to Pressure-Temperature Diagram Body PTFE packing 10... 220 C without insul. section HT packing 10... 350 C Body with Insulating section 200... 450 C Bellows seal 200... 450 C Leakage rate acc. to DIN EN 1349 Valve plug Metal sealing IV Lapped-in metal IV-S2 Table 2 Materials Standard version Body 1.4571 /1.0460 Flanges 1.7258 Bolts 1.7258 Seat and plug 1.4571 Seat: 1.4571 stellited Plug: Stellite 6 1.4112 hardened Guide bushings 2.4610 /1.4112 Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE carbon compound Body gasket Lens ring gaskets 1.4571/1.0460 Insulating section 1.4571/1.0460 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 1.4571/1.0460 Metal bellows 2.4819 Table 3 K vs coefficients Table 3a Overview 0.1 0.16 Kvs 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 0.25 0.4 Seat- 6 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 Travel 15 30 Table 3b Versions 0.1 0.16 Kvs 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 0.25 0.4 DN 16 24 30 45 58 70 90 Data Sheet T 8059 EN 2006-11 125

Table 4a Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve without bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem extends" (fail-close) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Bench range in bar applicable when Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar 16 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 to 2.5 16 to 58 4.0 to 10 45 to 90 70 to 90 16 25 40 63 90 100 350 0.4... 1.2 0.8... 2.4 1.4... 2.3 2.1... 3.3 700 0.8... 1.2 1.6... 2.4 350 0.4... 1.2 0.8... 2.4 1.4... 2.3 2.1... 3.3 700 0.8... 1.2 0.8... 1.2 1.6... 2.4 1400 1.0... 1.2 350 0.8... 2.4 2.1... 3.3 700 1.6... 2.4 1.6... 2.4 2.7... 3.3 1400 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 2.4 350 1.4... 2.3 700 0.8... 1.2 1.6... 2.4 2.7... 3.3 1400 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 2.4 2.0... 2.4 350 2.1... 3.3 700 1.6... 2.4 2.7... 3.3 1400 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 2.4 2800 2.2... 2.4 700 2.1... 3.3 1400 0.8... 1.2 1.6... 2.4 2800 2.0... 2.43 3.0... 3.6 700 2.6... 4.3 1400 1.6... 2.4 2800 2.0... 2.4 2.5... 3.0 2x2800 2.0... 2.4 1400 2.0... 3.0 2800 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 2.4 2x2800 2.0... 2.4 3.3... 3.9 Table 4b Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve without bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem retracts" (fail-open) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Bench range Required supply pressure in bar applicable when Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar 16 0.1 to 1.0 350 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.1 0.2... 1.0 700 1.4 1.8 16 1.6 to 2.5 350 1.5 1.8 0.2... 1.0 700 1.4 1.8 350 1.9 2.5 0.2... 1.0 16 to 58 4.0 to 10 700 1.1 1.5 2.1 2.9 1400 0.4... 2.0 1.7 2.0 350 2.2 0.2... 1.0 16 700 1.4 1.9 2.0 45 to 90 1400 0.4... 2.0 1.5 2.1 2.8 350 2.8 0.2... 1.0 25 700 1.6 2.5 1400 0.4... 2.0 1.8 2.6 3.7 700 2.6 0.2... 1.0 40 1400 2.0 2.2 2800 0.4... 2.0 1.7 2.4 3.3 70 to 90 700 3.5 0.2... 1.0 1400 2.1 3.1 63 2800 2.1 3.2 0.4... 2.0 2x2800 2.1 2.8 1400 0.2... 1.0 2.6 90 100 2800 2.0 2.8 0.4... 2.0 2x2800 1.9 2.8 4.0 126 Data Sheet T 8059 EN 2006-11

Table 5a Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve with bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem extends" (fail-close) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Bench range applicable when Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar 16 0.1 to 1.0 1.6 to 2.5 16 to 58 4.0 to 10 45 to 90 70 to 90 16 25 40 63 90 100 350 0.8... 2.4 1.4... 2.3 700 1.6... 2.4 2.4... 3.6 350 0.8... 2.4 1.4... 2.3 700 1.6... 2.4 2.4... 3.6 350 1.4... 2.3 2.1... 3.3 700 1.6... 2.4 1.6... 2.4 2.7... 3.3 1400 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 2.4 350 2.1... 3.3 700 2.7... 3.3 1400 2.0... 2.4 2.0... 2.4 350 2.1... 3.3 700 1.6... 2.4 2.7... 3.3 1400 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 2.4 2.83... 3.2 700 2.1... 3.3 1400 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 3.0 2800 1.0... 1.2 2.0... 2.4 3.0... 3.8 700 2.6... 4.3 1400 2.0... 2.4 2800 2.0... 2.4 3.0... 3.6 2x2800 2.0... 2.4 2.5... 3.0 1400 2.5... 3.0 2800 2.0... 2.4 2.5... 3.0 3.0... 3.8 2x2800 3.3... 3.8 Table 5b Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve with bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem retracts" (fail-open) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Required supply pressure in bar applicable when Bench range Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar 350 1.9 2.5 0.1 to 1.0 0.2... 1.0 700 1.9 2.6 16 350 1.9 2.5 1.6 to 2.5 0.2... 1.0 700 1.5 1.9 2.6 350 2.1 2.7 0.2... 1.0 16 to 58 4.0 to 10 700 1.5 2.2 3.0 1400 0.4... 2.0 1.5 2.1 350 2.5 0.2... 1.0 16 700 2.0 3.0 45 to 90 1400 0.4... 2.0 1.6 2.1 2.8 350 3.0 0.2... 1.0 25 700 1.7 2.5 1400 0.4... 2.0 1.8 2.7 3.7 700 2.7 0.2... 1.0 40 1400 2.0 2.7 2800 0.4... 2.0 1.7 2.4 3.3 70 to 90 700 3.6 0.2... 1.0 1400 2.4 3.5 63 2800 2.1 3.3 0.4... 2.0 2x2800 2.1 2.8 Data Sheet T 8059 EN 2006-11 127

Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type 3259-1 and Type 3259-7 as standard version Valve DN 16 24 30 45 58 70 90 Length L 95 110 120 150 170 200 235 H1 for actuator with 350 cm 2 470 470 470 560 560 700 cm 2 470 470 470 560 560 820 820 1400 cm 2 525 615 615 820 820 2800 cm 2 800 800 905 905 2x2800 cm 2 905 905 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm D 280 390 530 770 H 1) 82 200 287 620 1130 H3 2) 110 190 610 648 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 2) without lifting ring Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly Table 7 Weights for Type 3259-1 and Type 3259-7 as standard version Valve DN 16 24 30 45 58 70 90 Valve without actuator (approx. kg) 35 40 45 85 1) 90 1) 220 1) 230 1) 1) The weight increases by 30 kg with an actuator with 2800 cm 2 or 2x2800 cm 2 without Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 8 22 70 450 950 (approx. kg) 1) with handwheel 13 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Type 3277 without 12 26 (approx. kg) 1) with handwheel 17 31 1) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel Table 8a Dimensions and weights for Type 3259 as standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size DN 16 24 30 45 58 70 90 350 cm 2 735 735 735 810 810 700 cm 2 735 735 735 810 810 1175 1175 Height H4 for actuator with 1400 cm 2 790 790 790 865 865 1175 1175 2800 cm 2 1050 1050 1260 1260 2x2800 cm 2 1260 1260 Weight without actuator kg 45 48 53 100 1) 105 1) 295 1) 305 1) 1) The weight increases by 30 kg with an actuator with 2800 cm 2 or 2x2800 cm 2 Table 8b Dimensions and weights for Type 3259 as standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size DN 16 24 30 45 58 70 90 350 cm 2 885 885 885 875 895 700 cm 2 885 885 885 875 875 1485 1485 Height H4 for actuator with 1400 cm 2 940 940 940 930 930 1485 1485 2800 cm 2 1115 1115 1570 1570 2x2800 cm 2 1570 1570 Weight without actuator kg 50 53 55 100 1) 105 1) 357 1) 365 1) 1) The weight increases by 30 kg with an actuator with 2800 cm 2 or 2x2800 cm 2 128 Data Sheet T 8059 EN 2006-11

Dimensional diagrams ØD H3 H ØD H3 ØD H3 H ØD H3 H H 100 H4 H4 H1 H1 L L L L L L L L Type 3259-1 Type 3259-7 Type 3259-1 with insulating section Type 3259-1 with bellows seal Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the K v coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size DN and K vs coefficient according to Tables 3 to 5. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp according Tables 4 and 5. 4. Accessories according to Tables 1 and 2. The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN... Direction of flow FTO or FTC Plug Metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) both with minimum, standard and maximum flow Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8059 EN 2006-11 129

Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3510-1 and Type 3510-7 Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 Application Control valve especially designed for controlling low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research facilities Nominal sizes G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ ¼ NPT 3 8 NPT ½ NPT DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 Nominal pressure PN 40 to PN 400 Temperatures 200 to +450 C The pneumatic control valve essentially consists of: Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve and Type 3271-5 Actuator or optionally Type 3277-5 Actuator. The Type 3510 Micro-flow Valves are available either as: Globe valves or Angle valves. Their valve bodies have either: G or NPT screwed connections, Welding ends or flanges. Stainless steel is used as the standard body material. However, a wide variety of special materials can also be used on customer request. Versions Standard version For temperatures ranging from 10 to +220 C PN 40 to 400 Globe or angle valve Female thread G ¼, G 3 8, G ½ or ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT Flanges DN 10, 15 or 25 Welding ends DN 10, 15 or 25 Type 3510-1 (Fig. 3) With Type 3271-5 Pneumatic Actuator, 120 cm² effective area or Type 3271-52 with 60 cm² effective area (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN) Type 3510-7 (Figs. 1 and 2) With Type 3277-5 Pneumatic Actuator, 120 cm² effective area designed for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN). Other versions with Insulating section for temperatures from 200 to +450 C, made of special material up to +650 C Metal bellows seal up to PN 100 with a sealing performance of 10 5 mbar l s, higher pressure ratings on request Handwheel Electric actuator On request Body connections with threaded flanges and lens ring gaskets in nominal sizes DN 6 and DN 10, nominal pressure PN 325 acc. to IG standard (K VSmax = 0.4) Fig. 1 Type 3510-7 Control Valve with Type 3760 Positioner Fig. 3 Type 3510-1 Control Valve with Type 3271-52 Actuator Fig. 2 Type 3510-7 Control Valve with Type 3767 Positioner Data Sheet T 8091 EN 2004-10 131

Principle of operation The process medium flows through the micro-flow control valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug (3) determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the seat (2) and the plug. The plug stem (6) is connected to the actuator stem (8.1) via the stem connector (7) and sealed with an adjustable packing (4). To comply with stricter environmental emissions requirements, the valve can be equipped with a double-walled metal bellows (10). The anti-rotation device (13) prevents loosening of the screw connection between the valve body (1) and the bonnet (5) or the intermediate piece (9). Fail-safe position Depending on how the springs are arranged in the actuator (8) (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions: Actuator stem extends (FA) The valve is closed upon air supply failure. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The valve is opened upon air supply failure. Fig. 4 Type 3510-7 Control Valve 9 9 10 Fig. 5 Type 3510 Valve, angle valve with insulating section and Type 3271-52 Actuator (60 cm²) Fig. 6 Type 3510 Valve, globe valve with metal bellows seal 132 Data Sheet T 8091 EN 2004-10

Table 1 Technical data for Type 3510 Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges Nominal size G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ ¼ NPT 3 8 NPT ½ NPT DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 Nominal pressure PN 40 to PN 400 Seat-plug seal Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage with K VS 0.01 Linear Quick opening Rangeability 50 : 1 Lower than 50 : 1 for K VS < 0.1 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 200 to 450 C with insulating section Leakage rate Metal sealing IV acc. to DIN EN 1349 Lapped-in metal IV-S2 For K VS < 0.01: Metal sealing III Lapped-in metal IV Table 2 Materials Valve body 1) and bonnet 2) 1.4571 / A 316 Ti 2.4610 Seat and plug 1.4571 / 1.4571 1.4122 / 1.4112 1.4122 / Stellite 2.4610 / 2.4610 Packing PTFE compound Body gasket 1.4571 2.4610 Insulating section 1.4571 2.4610 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 1.4571 2.4610 Metal bellows for PN 100 3) 1.4571 2.4819 1) Other materials on request 2) Wetted parts 3) For higher nominal pressures on request Legends for Figs. 4 to 6 1 Valve body 2 Seat 3 Plug 4 Packing 5 Valve bonnet 5.1 Body gasket 6 Plug stem 7 Stem connector 8 Actuator 8.1 Actuator stem 9 Intermediate piece for insulating section or bellows seal 10 Metal bellows 13 Anti-rotation device Data Sheet T 8091 EN 2004-10 133

Table 3 Available K VS coefficients Table 3a Overview K VS 0.0001 to 0.0063 1) 0.01 to 0.25 0.4 0.63 to 1.6 2) Rangeability < 15 : 1 15 : 1 to 50 : 1 50 : 1 Seat Ø mm 2 3 4 10 Plug stem Ø mm 4 4 Travel mm 7.5 7.5 1) Seat and plug made only of 1.4122/Stellite 2) Only up to PN 100. Table 3b K VS coefficients and associated nominal sizes End connections Female thread Welding ends Flanges Flow rate K VS Characteristic Equal percentage Linear G 1 4 1 4 NPT G 3 8 3 8 NPT G 1 2 1 2 NPT DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 0.00010 0.00016 0.00025 0.00040 0.00063 0.0010 0.0016 0.0025 0.0040 0.0063 0.010 0.016 0.025 0.040 0.063 0.10 0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1) 1.0 1) 1.6 1) 1) Versions up to max. PN 100 can be used. 134 Data Sheet T 8091 EN 2004-10

Table 4 Permissible differential pressures Pressures in bar (gauge) Table 4a Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 0.4 2.0 1.4 2.3 2.1 3.3 for actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 0.8 1.6 1.7 2.1 2.4 3.1 Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ 0.0001 60 cm² 25 100 400 3 ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 0.4 120 cm² 250 400 G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN 25 0.63 to 1.6 60 cm² 11 72 100 120 cm² 35 84 100 Table 4b Standard version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 0.4 2.0 1.4 2.3 2.1 3.3 for actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 0.8 1.6 1.7 2.1 2.4 3.1 Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ 0.0001 60 cm² 10 61 95 3 ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 0.4 120 cm² 30 72 100 G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN 25 0.63 to 1.6 60 cm² 5 55 90 120 cm² 25 68 100 Table 4c Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 for actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 Supply pressure 1.2 2.5 3.5 Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ 0.0001 60 cm² 24 400 3 ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 0.4 120 cm² 254 400 G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN 25 0.63 to 1.6 60 cm² 79 100 120 cm² 36 100 Table 4d Standard version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 for actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 Supply pressure 1.2 2.5 3.5 Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ 0.0001 60 cm² 63 100 3 ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 0.4 120 cm² 27 100 G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN 25 0.63 to 1.6 60 cm² 63 100 120 cm² 27 100 Data Sheet T 8091 EN 2004-10 135

Table 5 Dimensions in mm End connections Female thread Welding ends Flanges Valve G/NPT DN 10, 15, 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 L PN 40 130 130 160 PN 63 to 160 210 210 230 74 80 PN 250 to 320 230 230 260 PN 400 230 230 308 H1 60/120 cm² 122 H4 with ins. section PN 40 to 400 263 H4 with bellows PN 40 to 100 263 seal PN 160 to 250 365 H2 or PN 40 90 95 115 flange Ø D1 PN 63 to 160 100 105 140 23 23 PN 250 to 320 125 130 160 PN 400 125 145 180 H3 60/120 cm² 150 L1 PN 40 85 90 100 PN 63 to 160 105 105 115 34 40 PN 250 to 320 115 115 130 PN 400 115 115 154 Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Diaphragm Ø D 120 168 H 63 69 H3 150 150 Thread M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 Supply pressure connection G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT Table 6 Weights in kg End connections Female thread Welding ends Flanges Valve G / NPT DN 10, 15, 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 Valve without PN 40 2.9 3.1 4.2 actuator PN 63 to 160 3.9 4.2 7.3 1.7 1.6 PN 250 to 320 5.6 6.0 8.7 PN 400 7.1 9.1 9.8 Optional Insulating section 0.5 Bellows seal 0.6 Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Approx. kg 1.3 3.5 136 Data Sheet T 8091 EN 2004-10

Dimensions in mm ØD H3 ØD H3 H H ØD1 84 20 L L H1 H4 ØD1 L1 57 L1 L1 L1 L1 SW50 SW46 L H2 L1 Type 3510-7 - angle valve with female thread Type 3510-1 - globe valve with female thread - with bellows seal/ insulating section Type 3510 - valve versions with flanges and welding ends Ordering text Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 Globe or angle valve Nominal size DN... Nominal pressure PN Valve body material According to Table 2 End connections Female thread G, NPT flanges or welding ends Direction of flow FTO or FTC Characteristic Equal percentage, linear, or quick-opening Pneumatic actuator Type 3271-5/Type 3277-5 60 or 120 cm 2 Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or OPEN Process medium Density kg/m 3 Maximum flow rate... kg/h or m 3 /h in in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure) Process medium temperature C or K Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8091 EN 2004-10 137

Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3510-1 and Type 3510-7 Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 ANSI version Application Control valve designed for controlling low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research facilities. Valve sizes G ¼, G 3 8, G ½ ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½, ¾, 1 Pressure rating ANSI Class 150 to Class 2500 Temperatures 200 to +450 C 328 to 842 F The pneumatic control valve consists of: Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve and a Type 3271-5 or optionally Type 3277-5 Actuator Type 3510 Micro-flow Valves are available either as: Globe valves Angle valves Their valve bodies are available with: G, NPT, or R C screwed connections Welding ends or flanges Stainless steel is used as the standard body material. However, a variety of special materials can also be used according to customer requirements. Versions Standard version For temperatures from 10 to +220 C (14 to 428 F) ANSI Class 150 to 2500 Globe valve or angle valve Female thread G ¼, G 3 8, G ½ or ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT Flanges NPS ½, ¾, 1, Class 150 to 2500 Welding ends NPS ½ and 1 Type 3510-1 (Fig. 3) With Type 3271-5 Pneumatic Actuator, 120 cm 2 effective diaphragm area or Type 3271-52 Pneumatic Actuator, 60 cm² effective diaphragm area (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN) Type 3510-7 (Figs. 1 and 2) With Type 3277-5 Pneumatic Actuator with 120 cm² effective diaphragm area, for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN) Other versions with Insulating section for temperatures from 200 to +450 C ( 328 to 842 F), with special material up to +650 C (1200 F) Metal bellows seal up to Class 600 with a sealing performance 10 5 mbar l s, higher pressure ratings on request Handwheel Electric actuator On request Fig. 1 Type 3510-7 Control Valve with Type 3760 Positioner Fig. 3 Type 3510-1 Control Valve with Type 3271-52 Actuator Fig. 2 Type 3510-7 Control Valve with Type 3767 Positioner Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04 139

Principle of operation The process medium flows through the micro-flow control valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug (3) determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the seat (2) and the plug. The plug stem (6) is connected to the actuator stem (8.1) by the stem connector (7) and sealed with an adjustable packing (4). To comply with stricter environmental emissions requirements, the valve can be equipped with a double-walled metal bellows (10). The anti-rotation device (13) prevents loosening of the screw connection between the valve body (1) and the bonnet (5) or the intermediate piece (9). Fail-safe position Depending on the arrangement of the compression springs in the actuator (8) (see Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions effective upon air supply failure: Actuator stem extends (FA) The valve is closed upon air supply failure. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The valve is opened upon air supply failure. Fig. 4 Type 3510-7 Control Valve 9 9 10 Fig. 5 Type 3510 Valve, angle valve with insulating section and Type 3271-52 Actuator (60 cm 2 ) Fig. 6 Type 3510 Valve, globe valve with metal bellows seal 140 Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04

Table 1 Technical data for Type 3510 Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges Valve size G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½ NPS 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 Pressure rating Class 150 to 2500 Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage with C V 0.012 Linear Quick opening Rangeability 50 : 1 Smaller than 50 : 1 with C V 0.12 Temperature range 10 to 220 C With insulating section 200 to 450 C Leakage rate Metal sealing IV acc. to DIN EN 1349 Lapped-in metal IV-S2 With C V 0.012: Metal sealing III Lapped-in metal IV Table 2 Materials Valve body 1) and bonnet 2) A 316 Ti (UNS: S31635) 2.4610 (UNS: N 06455) Seat and plug 1.4571 / 1.4571 1.4122 / 1.4112 1.4122 / Stellite 2.4610 / 2.4610 Stuffing box packing PTFE compound Body gasket 1.4571 2.4610 Insulating section A 316 Ti 2.4610 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece A 316 Ti 2.4610 Metal bellows for Cl. 600 3) 1.4571 2.4819 1) Other materials available on request 2) Wetted parts 3) For higher pressure ratings on request Legend for Figs. 4 to 6 1 Valve body 2 Seat 3 Plug 4 Stuffing box packing 5 Valve bonnet 5.1 Body gasket 6 Plug stem 7 Stem connector 8 Actuator 8.1 Actuator stem 9 Intermediate piece for insulating section or bellows seal 10 Metal bellows 13 Anti-rotation device Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04 141

Table 3 Available C V coefficients Table 3a Overview C V 0.00012 to 0.0075 1) 0.012 to 0.3 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 2) Rangeability < 15 : 1 15 : 1 to 50 : 1 50 : 1 Seat Ø mm 2 3 4 10 Plug stem Ø mm 4 4 Travel mm 7.5 7.5 1) Seat and plug material in 1.4122/Stellite only 2) Only up to Class 600 Table 3b K VS coefficients and associated valve sizes End connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges Flow coefficient C V Characteristic Equal percentage Linear G ¼ ¼ NPT R C ¼ G 3 8 3 8 NPT R C 3 8 G ½ ½ NPT R C ½ NPS ½ NPS 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 0.00012 0.00020 0.00030 0.00050 0.00075 0.0012 0.0020 0.0030 0.0050 0.0075 0.012 0.020 0.030 0.050 0.075 0.12 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.75 1) 1.2 1) 2.0 1) 1) Versions up to max. Class 600 can be used. 142 Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04

Table 4 Permissible differential pressures Pressures in bar (gauge) Table 4a Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 0.4 2.0 1.4 2.3 2.1 3.3 with actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 0.8 1.6 1.7 2.1 2.4 3.1 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 25 100 400 120 cm 2 250 400 60 cm 2 11 72 100 120 cm 2 35 84 100 Table 4b Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 0.4 2.0 1.4 2.3 2.1 3.3 with actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 0.8 1.6 1.7 2.1 2.4 3.1 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 10 61 95 120 cm 2 30 72 100 60 cm 2 5 55 90 120 cm 2 25 68 100 Table 4c Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 with actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 Supply pressure 1.2 2.5 3.5 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 24 400 120 cm 2 254 400 60 cm 2 79 100 120 cm 2 36 100 Table 4d Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 0.2 1.0 with actuator size 120 cm² 0.4 0.8 Supply pressure 1.2 2.5 3.5 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 63 100 120 cm 2 27 100 60 cm 2 63 100 120 cm 2 27 100 Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04 143

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Pressures in psi (gauge) Table 5a Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² 3 15 6 30 20 34 40 48 with actuator size 120 cm² 6 12 12 23 25 30 35 45 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 367 1470 5880 120 cm 2 3675 5880 60 cm 2 160 1060 1470 120 cm 2 515 1235 1470 Table 5b Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² 3 15 6 30 20 34 40 48 with actuator size 120 cm² 6 12 12 23 25 30 35 45 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 145 900 1395 120 cm 2 440 1060 1470 60 cm 2 75 805 1325 120 cm 2 365 1000 1470 Table 5c Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 3 15 with actuator size 120 cm² 6 12 Supply pressure 18 36 51 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 350 5880 120 cm 2 3735 5880 60 cm 2 1160 1470 120 cm 2 530 1470 Table 5d Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 3 15 with actuator size 120 cm² 6 12 Supply pressure 18 36 51 Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class 600 0.00012 to 0.5 0.75 to 2.0 1) 60 cm 2 925 1470 120 cm 2 395 1470 60 cm 2 925 1470 120 cm 2 395 1470 144 Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04

Table 6 Dimensions Valve Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges L Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900/1500 G/NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½, 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 mm 184 184 184 in 7.25 7.25 7.25 mm 190 194 197 in 7.50 7.62 7.75 mm 74 mm 80 mm 203 206 210 in 2.91 3.12 8.0 8.12 8.25 mm 216 229 254 in 8.50 9.0 10.0 Class 2500 mm 264 273 308 in 10.38 10.75 12.12 H1 60/120 cm 2 122 mm / 4.80 H4 H2 or Flange Ø D1 Insulating section Up to Cl. 2500 263 mm / 10.35 Bellows seal Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900/1500 Up to Cl. 600 263 mm / 10.35 Class 1500 365 mm / 14.37 mm 90 100 108 in 3.54 3.94 4.25 mm 96 118 124 in 3.78 4.65 4.88 mm 23 mm 23mm 96 118 124 in 0.90 0.90 3.78 4.65 4.88 mm 122 132 150 in 4.80 5.20 5.91 Class 2500 mm 134 140 158 in 5.28 5.51 6.22 H3 60/120 cm 2 150 mm / 5.90 L1 Class 150 mm 92 92 92 in 3.62 3.62 3.62 Class 300 mm 95 97 98 in 3.74 3.82 3.86 Class 600 mm 34 mm 40 mm 101 103 105 in 1.33 1.57 3.98 4.06 4.13 Class 900/1500 mm 108 114 127 in 4.25 4.5 5.0 Class 2500 mm 132 137 154 in 5.20 5.39 6.06 Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Diaphragm Ø D 120 mm / 4.72 168 mm / 6.6 H 63 mm / 2.48 69 mm / 2.71 H3 150 mm / 5.90 150 mm / 5.90 Thread M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 Loading pressure connection G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04 145

Table 7 Weights Valve Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges G/NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½, 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 Valve without Class 150 kg/lbs 2.6/5.8 3.3/7.3 3.7/8.2 actuator Class 300 kg/lbs 3.2/7.1 4.2/9.3 4.8/10.6 Class 600 kg/lbs 1.7/3.74 1.6/3.53 3.4/7.5 4.8/10.6 5.2/11.5 Class 900/1500 kg/lbs 5.2/14.4 7.6/16.8 8.7/19.2 Class 2500 kg/lbs 6.5/14.4 9.0/20 9.8/21.7 Optional Insulating section kg/lbs 0.5 / 1.2 Bellows seal kg/lbs 0.6 / 1.4 Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Approx. kg/lbs 1.3 / 2.9 3.5 / 7.8 Dimensions in mm ØD H3 ØD H3 H H L L H4 57 84 L1 20 H1 L1 ØD1 ØD1 L1 L1 L1 SW50 SW46 L H2 L1 Type 3510-7 Angle valve with end connections with female thread Type 3510-1 Globe valve with end connections with female thread and with bellows seal or insulating section Type 3510 Valve bodies with flanges and welding ends Ordering text Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 Globe or angle valve in ANSI version Valve size NPS Pressure rating Class Body material According to Table 2 End connections Female thread G, NPT, R C, flanges or welding ends Direction of flow FTO or FTC Characteristic Equal percentage, linear, quick opening Pneumatic actuator Type 3271-5/Type 3277-5 60 or 120 cm 2 (T 8310-1 EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density kg/m 3 Maximum flow rate... kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar/psi (absolute pressure) Medium temperature C or K Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 146 Data Sheet T 8091-1 EN 2005-04

Series W&T Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe valve and angle valve Application Control valve for feedwater and steam applications in power plant engineering and the petrochemical industry Nominal size DN 25 to 150 NPS 1 to 6 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 Class 150 to 2500 Type RVG Globe Valve equipped with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Valve body made of Forged steel 1.0460 / A105 High-temperature forged steel 1.7335 / A182 F12 or 1.5415 / A182 F1 Special properties No cavitation No oscillation or vibrations Long service life Exact characteristics Easy-to-replace internal parts Versions Type RVG Standard version in globe or angle body style with single-stage, two-stage, or three-stage perforated plug, with welding ends Special versions Electric actuators Pressure-balanced plugs 4-stage to 10-stage plugs for very high pressure letdown Application limits for multi-stage plugs Δp < 50 bar / 725 psi - single-stage plug Δp < 100 bar / 1450 psi - two-stage plug Δp < 150 bar / 2175 psi - three-stage plug Fig. 1 Type RVG Globe Valve Fig. 2 Single-stage perforated cage Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12 147

Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The cross-sectional area of flow across the perforated cage is determined by the edge of the valve plug. The arrangement and size of the bores in the perforated cage determine the valve characteristic and the flow coefficient. With two-stage plugs, the pressure is further reduced by a downstream perforated plug. In valves with three-stage plugs (only for liquids), an additional stage is located downstream of the seat ring. The seat ring is kept inside the body by the cage and can be removed without special tools. Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (for details refer to Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN), the control valve provides two fail-safe actions that become effective when the supply air fails. Actuator stem extends (FA): The valve is closed when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE): The valve is opened when the supply air fails. Fig. 4 Three-stage plug Fig. 3 Two-stage plug Fig. 5 Type RVG with three-stage plug, sectional drawing 148 Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12

Table 1 Technical data Material 1.0460 A105 1.7335 A182 F12 Class 2 1.5415 ( A181 F1) Nominal size DN 25 150 NPS 1 6 Nominal pressure PN 16 400 Class 150 2500 Connection Flanges All DIN and ANSI flanges on request Welding ends DIN ANSI Seat-plug seal Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Throttling element Perforated plug, single-stage to three-stage Rangeability 1 : 30 (higher rangeabilities on request) Temperature PTFE 260 C 500 F range Graphite > 260 C > 500 F Leakage class according to EN 1349 Valve plug Metal sealing V Pressure balancing IV Table 2 Materials Standard version 1.0460 A105 1.7335 A182 F12 Class 2 1.5415 ( A181 F1) Nominal pressure PN 16 400 Class 150 2500 Valve body 1.0460 1.7335 1.5415 ( A181 F1) Bonnet 1.0460 1.7335 1.5415 ( A181 F1) Seat and plug 1.4122 Guide bushing Mehanite Packing Pure graphite Body gasket Graphite on metal core (1.4541) Table 3 Available K VS and C V coefficients Versions marked * are only available in PN 40 to PN 250 or Class 300 to 1500. Reduced K VS coefficients apply when used with two-stage plugs in steam applications (details on request). Table 3a Globe valve with single-stage plug K VS 1.2 1.8 4.1 6.9 10.5 25 36 53 120 165* C V 1.4 2.1 4.7 8.0 12.1 28.9 41.6 61.3 138.7 190.8* Flow cross-section (cm²) 0.4 0.6 1.4 2.4 3.8 10 15.7 22.6 50 72 Seat (mm) 12 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 110 Travel (mm) 20 25 35 50 75 DN NPS 25 1 32 1¼ 40 1½ 50 2 65 2½ 80 3 100 4 125 5 150 6 Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12 149

Table 3b Globe valve with two-stage plug K VS 0.85 1.2 2.9 5.2 8 13 22 34 60 76 92 111 128* C V 1.0 1.4 3.4 6.0 9.2 15.0 25.4 39.3 69.4 87.9 106.4 128.3 148.0* Flow cross-section (cm²) 0.4 0.6 1.4 2.4 3.8 6.2 10.6 17.7 29.6 35.6 48.9 58 70 Seat (mm) 12 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 110 120 Travel (mm) 20 25 35 50 75 DN NPS 25 1 32 1¼ 40 1½ 50 2 65 2½ 80 3 100 4 125 5 150 6 Table 3c Globe valve with three-stage plug K VS 0.72 1.0 2.5 5.2 7 11 18 30 52 66 81 97* 114* C V 0.8 1.2 2.9 6.0 8.1 12.7 20.8 34.7 60.1 76.3 93.6 112.1* 131.8* Flow cross-section (cm²) 0.4 0.6 1.4 2.4 3.8 6.2 10.6 17.7 29.6 38.6 48.9 58 70 Seat (mm) 12 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 110 120 Travel (mm) 20 25 35 50 75 DN NPS 25 1 32 1¼ 40 1½ 50 2 65 2½ 80 3 100 4 125 5 150 6 Table 3d Angle valve with single-stage plug K VS 1.2 1.8 4.1 7.1 11.1 28 38 63 101 130* C V 1.4 2.1 4.7 8.2 12.8 32.4 43.9 72.8 116.8 150.3* Flow cross-section (cm²) 0.4 0.6 1.4 2.4 3.8 12.5 15.7 26.5 47.5 56.7 Seat (mm) 12 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 Travel (mm) 20 25 35 50 60 75 DN NPS 25 1 32 1¼ 40 1½ 50 2 65 2½ 150 Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12

K VS 1.2 1.8 4.1 7.1 11.1 28 38 63 101 130* C V 1.4 2.1 4.7 8.2 12.8 32.4 43.9 72.8 116.8 150.3* Flow cross-section (cm²) 0.4 0.6 1.4 2.4 3.8 12.5 15.7 26.5 47.5 56.7 Seat (mm) 12 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 Travel (mm) 20 25 35 50 60 75 DN NPS 80 3 100 4 125 5 Table 3e Angle valve with two-stage plug K VS 0.9 1.37 3.1 5.4 7.9 12.9 22.4 38 94 112* C V 1.0 1.6 3.6 6.2 9.1 14.9 25.9 43.9 108.7 129.5* Flow cross-section (cm²) 0.4 0.6 1.4 2.4 3.8 6.2 10.6 18.2 29 48.9 Seat (mm) 12 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 Travel (mm) 20 25 35 50 60 75 DN NPS 25 1 32 1¼ 40 1½ 50 2 65 2½ 80 3 100 4 125 5 Table 3f Angle valve with three-stage plug (for water only) K VS 0.72 1.08 2.5 4.3 6.8 11.6 19 32 51 C V 0.8 1.2 2.9 5.0 7.9 13.4 22.0 37.0 59.0 Flow cross-section (cm²) 0.4 0.6 1.4 2.4 3.8 6.2 10.6 17.7 29.6 Seat (mm) 12 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 Travel (mm) 20 25 35 50 DN NPS 25 1 32 1¼ 40 1½ 50 2 65 2½ 80 3 100 4 Table 4 Parameters for flow rate and noise level calculation Travel [%] 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 F L 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.85 0.86 0.87 0.88 0.89 0.90 0.91 x Fz 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.43 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.40 0.40 Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12 151

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Note! Required supply pressure p supply = 4 bar Differential pressure Δp at p 2 = 0 bar Actuators marked E require the use of pressure-balanced valve plugs Actuator sizing on request Bench range [bar] for actuator [cm²] 350 cm² (0.6 3.0 bar) Δp at p 2 = 0 bar 700 cm² (0.6 3.0 bar) 1400 cm² (0.5 2.5 bar/1.3 2.8 bar) p 1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 DN Seat Actuator See Table 3a to Table 3f 8 10 12 15 20 350 700 E 25 32 40 700 50 1400 65 80 90 1400 E 100 110 120 Fig. 6 W&T Type RVG, dimensional drawings 152 Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12

Table 6 Dimensions in mm/in and weights in kg/lbs Table 6a Globe valve with single-stage or two-stage plug Valve DN 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 NPS 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 4 5 6 Length L (a) 350 mm / 13.8 450 mm / 17.7 560 mm / 22 H1 230 mm / 9 295 mm / 11.6 310 mm / 12.2 Weight PN 40...400 39 kg 84 kg 296 kg Cl. 300...2500 86 lbs 185 lbs 651 lbs Table 6b Angle valve with single-stage or two-stage plug Valve DN 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 NPS 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 4 5 Length L (a) 175 mm / 6.88 250 mm / 9.8 Length L (b) 150 mm / 5.9 225 mm / 8.8 H1 175 mm / 6.88 220 mm / 8.66 Weight PN 40...400 42 kg 120 kg Cl. 300...2500 93 lbs 264 lbs Table 6c Angle valve with three-stage plug Valve DN 25 32 40 50 65 NPS 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ Length L (a) 175 mm / 6.88 Length L (b) 325 mm / 12.8 H1 195 mm / 7.6 Weight PN 40...400 Cl. 300...2500 69 kg 152 lbs Table 7 Pneumatic actuator Dimensions and weights Actuator cm² 350 700 1400 Diaphragm D 280 mm / 11 390 mm / 15.3 530 mm / 20.86 H (700 cm² and larger: including lifting ring) 85 mm / 3.35 200 mm / 7.87 287 mm / 11.3 H3 (min. clearance for actuator disassembly) 190 mm / 7.5 610 mm / 24 Threads M30 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) Weight Type 3271 8 kg / 17.6 lbs 22 kg / 48.5 lbs 70 kg / 154.3 lbs Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12 153

Ordering text Valve Type RVG Globe valve or angle valve Nominal size DN / NPS Nominal pressure PN / ANSI Class Body material According to Table 2 Plug version Standard or pressure-balanced single-stage to three-stage Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density and temperature Flow rate During operation Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar/psi (absolute pressure p abs ), each at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 154 Data Sheet T 9933 EN 2007-12

Series W&T Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Flange Globe valve and angle valve Application Control valve for high industrial requirements in process engineering applications involving feedwater and steam Nominal size DN 50 to 150 NPS 2 to 6 Nominal pressure PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Type RVG Flange Globe Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator as W&T Type RVG-1 Valve body made of Carbon steel 1.0619/A 216 WCC High-temperature carbon steel 1.7357/A 217 WC6 Versions Type RVG Flange Standard version with flanged, globe-style body with single-stage perforated cage and clamped seat ring Further versions Electric actuators Pressure-balanced plugs Two-stage or three-stage perforated cages/plugs 4-stage to 10-stage plugs on request Angle valves Valves with welding ends as Type RVG, see T 9933 EN Application limits for multi-stage plugs Δp < 50 bar / 725 psi - single-stage plug Δp < 100 bar / 1450 psi - two-stage plug Δp < 150 bar / 2175 psi - three-stage plug Fig. 1 Type RVG Flange Globe Valve Fig. 2 Single-stage perforated cage Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02 155

Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The cross-sectional area of flow across the perforated cage is determined by the edge of the valve plug. The arrangement and size of the bores in the perforated cage determine the valve characteristic and the flow coefficient. With two-stage plugs, the pressure is further reduced by a downstream perforated plug. In valves with three-stage plugs (only for liquids), an additional stage is located downstream of the seat ring. Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (for details refer to Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN), the control valve provides two fail-safe actions that become effective when the supply air fails. Actuator stem extends (FA): the valve is closed when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE): the valve is opened when the supply air fails. Fig. 4 Three-stage plug Fig. 3 Two-stage plug Fig. 5 Type RVG Flange in angle-body version 156 Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical data Material 1.0619 A 216 WCC 1.7356 A 217 WC6 Nominal size DN 50 150 NPS 2 6 Nominal pressure PN 40 400 1) ANSI Class 300 2500 1) Connection Flanges All DIN and ANSI flanges Welding ends See T 9933 EN - Type RVG Seat-plug seal Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Throttling element Perforated plug, single-stage to three-stage Rangeability 1 : 30 (higher rangeabilities on request) Temperature PTFE 260 C 500 F range Graphite > 260 C > 500 F Leakage class according to EN 1349 Valve plug Metal sealing V Pressure balancing IV 1) Nominal pressures up to PN 400/ANSI Class 2500 on request Table 2 Materials Valve body 1.0619 A 216 WCC 1.7356 A 217 WC6 Nominal pressure PN 40 400 ANSI Class 300 2500 Valve bonnet 1.0460 (C22.8) 1.0619 A 216 WCC 1.7335 (13CrMo44) A 182 F11 Seat and plug 1.4122 Guide bushing 1.4112 Packing Graphite Body gasket Graphite with metal core (1.4541) Table 3 Available K VS and C V coefficients Table 3a Globe or angle valve with single-stage plug K VS 4.1 6.9 10.5 25 36 53 66 120 130 142 165 183 C V 4.7 8.0 12.1 28.9 41.6 61.3 76.3 138.7 150.3 164.1 190.8 211.6 Flow cross-section (cm²) 1.4 2.4 3.8 10 15.7 22.6 28 50 56.7 62 72 80 Seat (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 80 90 100 110 120 Travel (mm) 25 35 50 75 DN NPS 50 2 65 80 3 100 4 150 6 Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02 157

Table 3b Globe or angle valve with two-stage plug Reduced K VS /C V coefficients apply for vapor applications. K VS 2.9 5.2 7.5 13 22 34 41 54 76 92 111 128 C V 3.4 6.0 8.7 15.0 25.4 39.3 47.4 62.4 87.9 106.4 128.3 148 Flow cross-section (cm²) 1.4 2.4 3.6 6.2 10.6 17.7 22.5 29.6 38.6 48.9 58 70 Seat (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 80 90 100 110 120 Travel (mm) 25 35 50 75 DN NPS 50 2 65 80 3 100 4 150 6 Table 3c Globe valve with three-stage plug K VS 2.9 5.2 6.5 7.5 9.5 14.5 16.5 22 37.5 43 58 75 80 C V 3.4 6.0 7.5 8.7 11.0 16.8 19.1 25.4 43.4 49.7 67.1 86.7 92.5 Flow cross-section (cm²) 1.4 2.4 3 3.5 4.5 7 8 10.5 20.7 23.6 32 38 42.5 Seat (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 65 50 65 80 90 100 110 120 Travel (mm) 25 35 50 DN NPS 50 2 65 80 3 100 4 150 6 Table 4 Parameters for flow rate and noise level calculation Travel [%] 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 F L 0.964 0.95 0.938 0.927 0.918 0.911 0.906 0.901 0.899 0.898 x Fz 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.43 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.40 0.40 158 Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Note! Required supply pressure p supply = 4 bar Differential pressure Δp at p 2 = 0 bar Actuators marked E require the use of pressure-balanced valve plugs Actuator sizing on request Bench range [bar] for actuator [cm²] 350 cm² (0.6 3.0 bar) 700 cm² (0.6 3.0 bar) 1400 cm² (0.5 2.5 bar/1.3 2.8 bar) Δp at p 2 = 0 bar p 1 in bar 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 DN Seat Actuator size in cm² 20 350 700 E 25 32 40 700 See Table 3a to Table 3f 50 1400 65 80 90 1400 E 100 110 120 Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02 159

H3 ØD a H H1 H2 L W&T Type RVG-1 Fig. 6 Dimensional drawing of W&T Type RVG Flange Globe Valve Table 6 Dimensions and weights for W&T Type RVG Flange Globe valve in standard version Table 6a Globe valve DIN version Valve DN 50 80 100 150 Length L H1 for actuator [cm²] H2 Weight in kg Valve without actuator PN 10 40 230 310 350 480 PN 63 160 300 380 430 550 350 457 462 482 700 457 462 482 732 1400 512 517 537 732 2800 722 817 PN 10 40 90 100 160 220 PN 63...160 100 120 180 235 PN 16...40 38 59 78 201 PN 63...160 54 89 116 334 160 Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02

Table 6b Globe valve ANSI version Valve NPS 2 3 4 6 Length L H1 for actuator [cm²] H2 Weight 350 700 1400 2800 Valve without actuator Class 300 Class 600 Class 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 Cl. 600 Cl. 900 mm 267 318 368 473 in 10.52 12.52 14.49 18.62 mm 286 337 394 508 in 11.26 13.26 15.51 20 mm 368 381 457 609 in 14.49 15 17.99 23.97 mm 457 462 482 in 17.99 18.19 18.97 mm 491 462 482 in 19.33 18.19 18.97 mm 457 462 482 732 in 17.99 18.19 18.97 29.01 mm 491 462 482 732 in 19.33 18.19 18.97 29.01 mm 512 517 537 732 in 20.16 20.35 21.14 29.01 mm 546 517 537 732 in 21.49 20.35 21.14 29.01 mm 722 817 in 28.42 32.16 mm 722 817 in 28.42 32.16 mm 100 120 180 235 in 3.93 4.72 7.02 9.25 mm 110 120 180 235 in 4.33 4.72 7.08 9.25 kg 38 59 78 201 lbs 83.8 130 172 443 kg 64 102 137 340 lbs 141 225 302 750 kg 97 120 160 380 lbs 214 265 353 838 See Table 8 for dimensions for actuators Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02 161

ØD a H3 H H1 L W&T Type RVG-1 L Fig. 7 W&T Type RVG Flange Angle Valve Table 7 Dimensions and weights for W&T Type RVG Flange Angle valve in standard version Table 7a Angle valve DIN version Valve DN 50 80 100 150 Length L H1 for actuator [cm²] Weight in kg Valve without actuator PN 10 40 125 155 175 225 PN 63 160 150 190 215 275 350 415 400 410 700 415 400 410 628 1400 470 455 465 628 2800 655 640 650 713 PN 16...40 35 58 75 190 PN 63...160 58 92 125 300 Table 7b Angle valve ANSI version Valve NPS 2 3 4 6 Length L Cl. 300 Cl. 600 Cl. 900 mm 133 159 184 236 in 5.23 6.26 7.24 9.29 mm 143 168 197 254 in 5.63 6.6 7.75 10 mm 184 190 228 305 in 7.24 7.48 8.97 12 162 Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02

Valve NPS 2 3 4 6 H1 for actuator [cm²] Weight in kg 350 700 1400 2800 Valve without actuator Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 Cl. 600 Cl. 900 mm 415 400 410 in 16.34 15.75 16.14 mm 461 400 410 in 18.15 15.75 16.14 mm 415 400 410 628 in 16.34 15.75 16.14 24.72 mm 461 400 410 628 in 18.15 15.75 16.14 24.72 mm 470 455 465 628 in 18.5 17.9 18.3 24.72 mm 516 455 465 628 in 20.3 17.9 18.3 24.72 mm 650 713 in 25.6 28.1 mm 650 713 in 25.6 28.1 kg 35 58 75 190 lbs 77 128 165 419 kg 58 92 lbs 128 203 kg 91 110 On request lbs 200 242 Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Types 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Actuator cm² 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm D H (700 cm² and larger including lifting ring) mm 280 390 530 770 in 11.02 15.35 20.86 30.0 mm 82 200 287 620 1130 in 3.23 7.87 11.3 24.41 44.49 H3 (min. clearance for mm 110 190 610 650 actuator disassembly) in 4.33 7.48 24 25.6 Thread M30 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5 M100 x 2 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) Weight Type 3271 Without handwheel With handwheel kg 8 22 70 450 950 lbs 17.6 48.5 154.5 992 2095 kg 13 27 lbs 28.7 59.5 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02 163

Ordering text Valve Type RVG Globe valve or angle valve Nominal size DN / NPS Nominal pressure PN / ANSI Class Body material According to Table 2 Plug version Standard or pressure-balanced single-stage to three-stage Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 (see T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density and temperature Flow rate During operation Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar/psi (absolute pressure p abs ), each at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 164 Data Sheet T 9933-1 EN 2008-02

Series 250 Control Valves with Ceramic Valve Trims Application Control valves for use in process engineering where valve trim and valve body are subjected to erosive and abrasive wear Nominal size DN 25 to DN 150 Nominal pressure PN 16 to PN 400 Temperatures Up to 500 C In industrial plants, pneumatic and electric control valves control different media, often under unfavorable flow conditions. In flashing service and with aggressive fluids containing solid matter, the valve trim, i.e. seat and plug, as well as the valve body are subject to erosive and abrasive wear. In some applications, valve trims made of cast iron or PTFE are worn out within only a few days and valve trims of stellited or forged titanium within a few weeks. Valve trims made of low-wear ceramic, however, shows almost no signs of wear after one year in service. Depending on the valve design and the particular properties of the ceramic material used, the following advantages can be attained: Seat and plug made of hot-pressed silicon nitride (HPSN) Constant high flexural strength and resistance to abrasive wear Corrosion resistance Service life 200 times longer compared to valve trims made of austenitic steel used under highly erosive and abrasive conditions Longer service life of angle valve bodies thanks to the flowto-close direction of flow and an additional anti-wear sleeve of silicon carbide (SiC) The control valves have a modular design and can be equipped with various accessories, such as positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Fig. 1 Type 3251-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Versions The pneumatic control valves illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2 can be equipped with ceramic valve trims. They are equipped with the Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator. Type 3251-1 Type 3251 Globe Valve Type 3256-1 Type 3256 Angle Valve Additional versions with Electric actuator On request Fig. 2 Type 3256-1 Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Data Sheet T 8071 EN 2008-02 165

Fail-safe position Depending on the arrangement of the compression springs in the actuator (for details, see Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective when the supply air fails: "Actuator stem extends", The valve is closed when the air supply fails. "Actuator stem retracts", The valve is opened when the air supply fails. Materials The data sheets listed in Table 1 contain exact details on the materials used. The valve bodies are available in standard or stainless cast steel as well as in cold-resisting or high-temperature cast steel. The ceramic valve trim, i.e. plug and seat or seat ring, consists of silicon nitride (Si 3N 4), which is hot-pressed at 1700 to 1800 C. The anti-wear sleeve is made of hot-pressed silicon carbide (SiC). The data in Table 2 indicate the favorable properties of these materials. Fig. 3 Type 3251-1 with ceramic trim Permissible differential pressures Δp The permissible differential pressures for versions with K vs values of 1.6 to 160 are specified in the data sheets listed in Table 1. Here, only the combination of nominal sizes and seat diameters shown in Tables 3 can be applied. Permissible differential pressures for versions with K vs 1 and K vs > 160 are available on request. Fig. 4 Type 3256-1 with ceramic trim and ceramic anti-wear sleeve 166 Data Sheet T 8071 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical data Valve Type 3251 3256 Actuator 1) Type Type 3271 or Type 3277 (up to 700 cm 2 ) Body style Globe valve Angle valve Nominal sizes DN 25 50 80 100 150 Nominal pressure PN 16... 400 Reinforcement Ceramic valve trim HPSN (Si3N4) Ceramic anti-wear sleeve SiC Temperature ranges (see associated data sheet) Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see T 8000-2 EN) Temperature limits C 250... 500 Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Valve plug IV-S2 For details, see Data Sheet T 8051 EN T 8065 EN 1) Type 3251-2 and Type 3256-2 Electric Control Valves on request Table 2 Properties of ceramic materials Material HPSN SiC Flexural strength (4-point) N/mm 2 600... 800 >350 Tensile strength N/mm 2 300... 500 >180 Compressive strength N/mm 2 2500 >1200 Young s Modulus kn/mm 2 310... 320 >330 Hardness HV 10 N/mm 2 >16 000 >21 000 Thermal expansion (α) 10 6 / C 3.2 4.3 Corrosion resistance Better than all metal valve materials Selection and sizing Control valves with ceramic valve trim require especially careful sizing. Therefore, final sizing is carried out by SAMSON. 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select the nominal size and K vs coefficient according to Table 3. 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp and select the appropriate actuator according to the data sheets listed in Table 1. 4. Select materials and accessories according to the pressuretemperature diagram and the corresponding data sheets. The following details are required on ordering Valve type DN... PN... Body material Acc. to associated data sheet End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Ceramic/balanced Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Anti-wear sleeve For Type 3256 Actuator Versions according to T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN Fail-safe action Valve OPEN/CLOSED Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C or K Max. flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h under standard or operating conditions Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Data Sheet T 8071 EN 2008-02 167

Table 3 K vs and z values Overview 0.1 0.16 0.25 Kvs 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 0.4 0.63 Seat mm 8 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 Rated travel 15 30 mm Table 3a Type 3251 Globe Valve with ceramic valve trim Flow-to-open Versions in fields highlighted in gray also available with balanced plug Kvs 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 DN z values 25 0.75 0.65 0.65 0.55 0.55 50 0.5 0.45 0.5 80 0.5 0.45 0.35 100 0.35 0.35 150 0.35 0.25 0.25 Terms for control valve sizing according to DIN EN 60534, Parts 2-1 and 2-2: FL = 0.95, xt = 0.75 Table 3b Type 3256 Angle Valve with ceramic valve trim and ceramic anti-wear sleeve Flow-to-close Versions in fields highlighted in gray also available with balanced plug Kvs 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 DN z values 25 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 50 0.15 0.15 0.15 80 0.15 0.15 0.15 100 0.15 0.15 150 0.15 0.15 0.15 Terms for control valve sizing according to DIN EN 60534, Parts 2-1 and 2-2: FL = 0.85, xt = 0.6 Specifications subject to change without notice. 168 Data Sheet T 8071 EN 2008-02

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3258-1 Angle Valve with Split Body Type 3258 Application Control valve assembly for process engineering applications, especially for chemical plants where the valve materials must meet severe requirements Nominal sizes DN 25 to DN 125 Nominal pressures PN 16 to PN 40 Temperatures 10 C to +220 C Conversion of valve sizing coefficients: C v (in U.S.-gallons/min) = 1.17 K vs (in m 3 /h) K vs (in m 3 /h) = 0.86 C v (in U.S.-gallons/min) Type 3258 Angle Valve with split body with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3258-1 Control Valve) Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3258-7 Control Valve) Valve body made of Cast steel Stainless cast steel Special materials Hastelloy B or Hastelloy C Titanium Monel Valve plug with Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal The valves designed according to the modular-assembly principle can be equipped with various optional accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories conforming with IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendations. Refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN for more details. Versions Standard version Type 3258 Valve with split-body in DN 15 to 150 and nominal pressures PN 16 or PN 40 for temperatures ranging from 10 C to +220 C Type 3258-1 Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Type 3258-7 Valve with Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator Further versions with Adjustable packing Additional metal bellows seal Nominal size up to DN 200, nominal pressure up to PN 160, temperature range up to 450 C On request Body made of special materal such as Hastelloy B or C, titanium, Monel Ceramic trim for eroding or abrasive media See Data Sheet T 8071 EN Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T 8310-1/-2 EN Electric actuator On request Fig. 1 Type 3258-1 Pneumatic Control Valve Data Sheet T 8070 EN 2004-12 169

Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the plug determines the flow rate between the plug and the seat. The valve bonnet can be separated from the bottom section of the valve after removing the connecting bolts. The seat is then easily accessible. The angle valve can be cleaned while remaining in the line since complete draining is possible as the body has a smooth passage with no dead cavities. Fail-safe action Depending on how the springs are arranged in the actuator (for details refer to Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon a supply air failure: "Actuator stem extends" (FA), The valve closes when the supply air fails. "Actuator stem retracts" (FE), The valve opens when the supply air fails. Table 1 Technical data Nominal size DN 25, 50, 80, 100, 150 Material Cast steel 1.0619 Stainless cast steel 1.4581 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 40 Connection Flange Form B1 Plug/seat sealing Metal, soft or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Fig. 2 Type 3258-1 Pneumatic Control Valve Temperature ranges in C Body without ins. section 10... 220 With insulating section or bellows seal 10... 400 10... 450 Leakage rate according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Metal sealing IV Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 IV-S3 up to DN 80 Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body and flanges 1) Cast steel 1.0619 Stainless cast steel 1.4581 Seat and plug 2) With metal sealing 1.4006 / 1.008 1.4571 / 1.4581 Seat ring With soft sealing PTFE with glass fiber Guide bushings 1.4006 2.4610 Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE with carbon; spring 1.4310 or high-temperature packing Upon request, other body materials: Titanium, Monel, Hastelloy B, Hastelloy C or tantalum or zirconium lining All seats and plugs with metal sealing are also available with Stellite facing 170 Data Sheet T 8070 EN 2004-12

Table 3 Available K vs values Ceramic trims available on request Kvs 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.06.3 1016 25 4063 1 0160360 Seat mm 6 12 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 150 Tr. mm 15 3060 DN 25 50 80 100 150 Table 4 Differential pressure tables Permissible differential pressures Δp for plug with metal sealing when p2 = 0 Values in the gray columns apply to standard applications Differential pressures in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to the values in parentheses in the Bench range row. Table 4a Valve with fail-safe position "Actuator stem extends" Valve CLOSED when the signal pressure is 0 bar Table 4b Valve with fail-safe position "Actuator stem retracts" Valve CLOSED at the required signal pressure Table 4a Fail-safe position "Actuator stem extends" Table 4b "Stem retracts" Bench range [bar] 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 0.4...2.0 (1.2...2.0) 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.6...3.0 (2.1...3.5) 1.4...4.2 (2.8...4.2) 0.2...1.0 0.2...1.0 0.2...1.0 Required supply air 1.2 1.4 2.2 2.6 3.7 4.4 1.2 2.4 4.0 Actuator DN Kvs cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 25 0.1...1.0 4040404040404040 350 1.6 2.5 16.3 40404040404040 4 6.3 10 5016 5025 50 and 80 40 3502.4 16.5 16.5 40 38 40 2.4 40 40 700 16.5 40 (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) 350 7.6 7.6 24 2040 4040 700 7.6 24 (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) 350 4.7 4.7 15.9 13.1 33 33 40 7 0 4.7 15.9 (40 ) (40 ) (40 ) (40 ) (27) (40 ) (40 ) 700 2.3 8.8 8.8 22 18.5 40 2.3 40 40 1400 8.8 22 (40) (40) (35) (40) (40) 100 63 700 0.3 4.4 4.4 12.5 10.5 25 0.3 25 40 1400 4.4 12.5 45 (40) (20) (40) (135) 700 801 0 2.5 2.5 7.6 6.3 15.2 15.2 35 1400 2.5 7.6 (28) (38) (12.6) (40) (40) 100 700 1.4 1.4 4.7 3.9 9.5 9.5 22 and 160 150 1400 1,4 4.7 (18) (24) (7.9) (27) (40) 1400 150360 0.2 1.6 1.6 4.5 0.2 8.8 20 2800 1.6 4.5 (16) (22) (7.4) (25) (40) Notes concerning permissible differential pressures in Table 4 The differential pressure tables were created under the following conditions: The maximum supply pressure is 4 bar for valves in nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 80 and actuators with 700 cm 2 effective diaphragm area values. Direction of flow: FTO Version with PTFE packing The leakage rates as per Table 1 are kept with the specified permissible differential pressures. The specified differential pressure can be limited by the Pressure-Temperature Diagram. The actuator sizing must be checked separately for a version with metal bellows seal and p2 0 bar. Data Sheet T 8070 EN 2004-12 171

Table 5 Dimensions for Type 3258 Angle Valve Valve DN 25 50801 0150 L mm 100 125 155 175 225 H1 with Type 3271 Actuator (Type 3277 +100 mm) 350 cm 2 390 700 cm 2 390451 451 531 1400 cm 2 507 586 750 2800 cm 2 1000 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 Diaphragm D 280390530770 H 82 134 197 520 H3 (Types 3271 and 3277 Actuators) 1) 110190610648 Thread M30 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5 M100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Minimum distance to be kept clear for removing the actuator Table 7 Weights for the standard version of the Type 3258 Angle Valve Valve DN 25 50801 0150 Weight without actuator kg 17 3047 60150 Actuator cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 Type 3271 (approx. 8 22 70 450 kg) 1) 13 27 155 575 Type 3277 (approx. 12 26 kg) 1) 17 31 1) Top row without handwheel and bottom row with handwheel Ordering text Nominal size DN Acc. to Table 3; DN 200 on request Nominal pressure Up to PN 40; up to PN 200 on request Ø D a H3 Valve body material End connections Acc. to Table 2; special materials and linings on request Flanges; others on request H Seat and plug Plug sealing Standard, stellited Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Versions according to T 8310-1 EN/ T 8310-2 EN H1 Fail-safe position Valve OPEN or CLOSED Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate In kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating conditions L Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate L Accessories Specifications subject to change without notice. 172 Data Sheet T 8070 EN 2004-12

Flow Dividers for Control Valves St I St III Application These valve components serve to reduce noise emission and are designed for installation in globe and angle valves used to control vapors or gases. The noise emission of control valves controlling gases or vapors as well as the connected pipeline is determined by the free jet leaving the restriction and by the downstream turbulent mixing zone. A particularly effective and low-cost solution to reduce noise is achieved by using flow dividers which shorten the free jet of gas or vapor and accelerate the exchange of energy in the mixing zone. Special features Effective, reliable and cost-effective components for noise reduction Noticeable deviation from the characteristic only in the travel range beyond 80% The valve s K vs coefficient is reduced to the K vs I and K vs III coefficients specified in the data sheets Installation in Types 3241, 3251 and 3254 Globe Valves, Type 3256 Angle Valves as well as globe valves as part of self-operated regulators In Series 280 Steam-converting Valves, the Flow Divider St III is also used to split up and vaporize cooling water (see Information Sheet T 8250 EN). Fig. 1 Flow Divider St I, installed in Type 3241 Valve 13 3 2 1 Versions Flow Divider St I (Figs. 1 and 4) made of perforated sheet steel with perforation diameters of 2.5 mm; suitable for gases and vapors. Flow Divider St III (Fig. 2) made of stainless wire mesh; suitable for gases and vapors containing small-sized suspended matter. It additionally has an internal and external perforated sheet steel (Fig. 3) and is designed for Series 250 and 280 Valves. Fig. 2 Flow Divider St III, installed in Type 3241 Valve Fig. 3 Flow Divider St III, installed in Type 3254 Valve 1 Valve body 2 Seat 3 Plug 13 Flow divider Data Sheet T 8081 EN 2004-01 173

Principle of operation (Fig. 4) After having passed the cross-sectional area of the restriction located between the valve seat (2) and the plug (3), the process medium reaches its maximum velocity. Before a noise-intensive, turbulent mixing zone can be created, the medium hits the inner wall of the flow divider (13) which splits up the jet into numerous smaller jets, thus ensuring low-noise energy transfer to the surrounding medium. Calculation of noise emission Gases and vapors The noise emitted by gases in single- and multi-stage control valves is determined according to IEC 60534, Part 8-3. This calculation method, however, does not apply to control valves containing noise-reducing elements, such as Flow Dividers St I and St III. In this case, calculation is performed according to VDMA 24 422, Edition 89. The calculation is based on the jet power reached during expansion. An acoustical conversion ratio η G is used to determine the noise emission. Diagram 1 illustrates the difference between the conversion ratios depending on the differential pressure ratio. This difference immediately shows the level difference of the internal sound power. The difference between the sound pressure levels to be expected at one meter distance from the pipe is also sufficiently accurate. Assuming a differential pressure ratio of x = 0.5, the difference in sound pressure level amounts to 10 db between a valve without a flow divider and a valve with a Flow Divider St I and 20 db with a Flow Divider St III. Fig. 4 Type 3251 Valve with Flow Divider St I η G [db] 0-20 1-40 2-60 -80 3-100 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 x Diagram 1 1 Without flow divider 2 With Flow Divider St I 3 With Flow Divider St III Specifications subject to change without notice. 174 Data Sheet T 8081 EN 2004-01

Series 240 and 250 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim Application Optimized trim for low-noise and low-wear pressure reduction for liquids with differential pressures up to 40 bar Nominal size DN 50 to 300 NPS 2 to 12 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Class 150 to 900 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F The AC-1 Trim includes the following special features: Raised seat Parabolic plug with integrated guide in the seat. One to four attenuation plates are integrated into seat of the AC-2 Trim upstream of the parabolic plug and the plug guide. The differential pressure may not exceed 40 bar (580 psi). Versions Standard version for SAMSON valves acc. to Tables 2 and 3 AC-1 Optimized trim for valve sizes DN 50 to DN 300 (NPS 2 to NPS 12) AC-2 Optimized trim with one to four attenuation plates for valve sizes DN 80 to DN 250 (NPS 3 to NPS 10) Other versions Pressure-balanced version on request Fig. 1 Type 3251 Valve with AC-1 Trim Fig. 2 Type 3251 Valve and AC-2 Trim with four attenuation plates Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04 175

Principle of operation The medium flows in the flow-to-open direction through the valve. The valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow. The K V coefficient is adapted over the plug and, if necessary, using a combination of attenuation plates upstream of the seat. To avoid vibrations, the plug is double guided by a guide bushing at the top and a second guide in the seat. AC-1 Compared to standard valve trims, these trims considerably reduce the sound pressure level for differential pressure ratios between X F = 0.25 and X F = 0.75 by shifting the point of incipient cavitation. Depending on the valve load, the sound pressure level is reduced to varying degrees. AC-2 Optionally one to four attenuation plates can be integrated in the seat on the upstream side. In this way, the point of incipient cavitation is shifted at large valve loads to higher differential pressure ratios X F. For small valve loads, the onset of cavitation is shifted by higher X fz values of the parabolic plug to higher differential pressure ratios. Compared to standard valve trims, these trims considerably reduce the sound pressure level for differential pressure ratios between X F = 0.25 and X F = 0.9 by shifting the point of incipient cavitation. Fig. 3 Sectional view of AC-1 Trim The differential pressure ratio X F is defined as X F = p1 Δp pv with Δp being the differential pressure across the valve, p 1 being the upstream pressure, and p v representing the vapor pressure of the medium. The reduction of the sound pressure level ΔL pa compared to a standard valve trim is exemplified in Figs. 5 and 6. The diagrams illustrate four different valve loads. Fig. 4 Sectional view of AC-2 Trim with four attenuation plates Table 1 Technical data for AC-1 Trim and AC-2 Trim AC-1 AC-2 Nominal size DN 50 to 300 NPS 2 to 12 DN 80 to 250 NPS 3 to 10 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Class 150 to 900 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F Δp max Operation without cavitation: < 40 bar < 580 psi Max. perm. differential pressure Operation with cavitation: < 25 bar < 360 psi Medium Liquids only Direction of flow Flow-to-open (FTO) only Closure member Double-guided parabolic plug Double-guided parabolic plug with attenuation plates integrated into the seat Seat-plug seal Metal sealing: Class IV Leakage class (DIN EN 1349) IV-S1for SB 100 IV-S2 for SB < 100 K V /C V value See Table 2 See Table 3 Characteristic Equal percentage Equal percentage modified Rangeability 50 : 1 See Table 3 Seat bore See Table 2 See Table 3 Travels See Table 2 See Table 3 Trim materials 1.4571 Stellite hard facing/1.4006 Stellite hard facing/1.4301 176 Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04

Reduction of the sound pressure level The diagrams illustrate the reduction of the sound pressure level ΔLpa when using the AC Trims as opposed to a standard trim. ΔLpa values of other AC Trims available on request. Figs. 5 and 6 Nominal size DN 80 (NPS 3) and DN 150 (NPS 6) Sound pressure level difference ΔLpa [db(a)] between special trim and V-port trim Nominal size DN 80 K v 35/C v 40 0-5 25 % Valve load 50 % Valve load 75 % Valve load 90 % Valve load -10 ΔLp a [db( A)] -15-20 -25-30 -35 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 X F [ - ] 1.2 Sound pressure level difference ΔLpa [db(a)] between special trim and V-port trim Nominal size DN 150 K v 135/C v 160 0-5 25 % Valve load 50 % Valve load 75 % Valve load 90 % Valve load -10 ΔLpa [db(a)] -15-20 -25-30 -35 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 X F [ - ] Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04 177

Table 2 AC-1 Trim Nominal sizes and their associated flow coefficients (K V and C V ) The specified travels must be achieved including an overtravel of 10 %. The use of a mechanical travel stop is required for actuators with fail-safe action stem extends. DN/NPS DN 50 NPS 2 DN 80 NPS 3 DN 100 NPS 4 DN 150 NPS 6 SB [mm] Travel [mm] K V C V Valve Type X fz value [Valve load %] 48 15 3241 0.34 (90 %) 0.38 (75 %) 35 40 50 30 3251/3256 0.45 (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) 48 15 3241 0.34 (90 %) 0.38 (75 %) 35 40 50 30 3251/3256 0.45 (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) 15 3241 0.31 (90 %) 0.35 (75 %) 63 50 60 30 3251/3256 0.44 (50 %) 0.56 (25 %) 80 30 60 70 70 80 3251 3256 0.38 (90 %) 0.42 (75 %) 0.49 (50 %) 0.60 (25 %) 0.35 (90 %) 0.38 (75 %) 0.47 (50 %) 0.58 (25 %) 48 15 3241 0.33 (90 %) 0.36 (75 %) 38 45 50 30 3251/3256 0.43 (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) 3241 0.29 (90 %) 63 30 55 65 0.33 (75 %) 3251/3256 0.42 (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) 3241 0.33 (90 %) 80 30 75 90 0.37 (75 %) 3251/3256 0.45 (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.42 (90 %) 75 90 3251/3256 0.46 (75 %) 0.53 (50 %) 0.63 (25 %) 100 30 3241 0.37 (90 %) 100 120 0.40 (75 %) 3251/3256 0.48 (50 %) 0.59 (25 %) 3241 0.27 (90 %) 80 30 95 110 0.32 (75 %) 3251/3256 0.41 (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) 0.28 (90 %) 100 30 145 170 3241/3251/3256 0.32 (75 %) 0.41 (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) 30 3241 0.25 (90 %) 125 0.29 (75 %) 205 240 60 3251/3256 0.38 (50 %) 0.50 (25 %) 150 60 205 240 250 290 3251 3256 0.34 (90 %) 0.37 (75 %) 0.45 (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.28 (90 %) 0.33 (75 %) 0.41 (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) 178 Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04

DN/NPS DN 200 NPS 8 DN 250 NPS 10 DN 300 NPS 12 SB [mm] Travel [mm] 100 30 155 180 125 60 230 270 150 60 305 360 200 60 K V C V Valve Type 360 420 480 560 100 30 155 180 125 60 230 270 150 60 305 360 200 60 360 420 480 560 125 60 230 270 150 60 305 360 200 60 480 560 250 120 1000 1150 3241 3251 3256 3241 3254 3241 3254 X fz value [Valve load %] 0.27 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) 0.22 (90 %) 0.26 (75 %) 0.36 (50 %) 0.49 (25 %) 0.24 (90 %) 0.28 (75 %) 0.37 (50 %) 0.51 (25 %) 0.33 (90 %) 0.37 (75 %) 0.45 (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.26 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.52 (25 %) 0.27 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) 0.22 (90 %) 0.26 (75 %) 0.36 (50 %) 0.49 (25 %) 0.24 (90 %) 0.28 (75 %) 0.37 (50 %) 0.51 (25 %) 0.33 (90 %) 0.37 (75 %) 0.45 (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.26 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.52 (25 %) 0.22 (90 %) 0.26 (75 %) 0.36 (50 %) 0.49 (25 %) 0.24 (90 %) 0.28 (75 %) 0.37 (50 %) 0.51 (25 %) 0.26 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.52 (25 %) 0.20 (90 %) 0.24 (75 %) 0.33 (50 %) 0.48 (25 %) Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04 179

Table 3 AC-2 Trim Nominal sizes and their associated flow coefficients (K V and C V ) The specified travels must be achieved including an overtravel of 10 %. The use of a mechanical travel stop is required for actuators with fail-safe action stem extends. DN/NPS DN 80 NPS 3 DN 100 NPS 4 DN 150 NPS 6 DN 200 NPS 8 DN 250 NPS 10 SB [mm] Travel [mm] 80 30 100 30 150 60 200 60 200 60 K V C V Valve Type Attenuation plate Rangeability Quantity Bore Ø 16 20 >10:1 22 25 4 25 30 30 35 >15:1 3251 3 35 40 3 38 45 2 >20:1 43 50 1 50 60 >25:1 35 40 >20:1 38 45 >15:1 4 43 50 >10:1 45 55 50 60 3251 3 3 >15:1 55 65 2 60 70 >20:1 63 75 >30:1 1 72 85 >20:1 85 100 95 110 >15:1 100 120 4 >20:1 110 130 120 140 >15:1 130 150 3251 5 3 135 160 145 170 155 180 2 >20:1 160 190 1 180 210 >25:1 135 160 >15:1 145 170 155 180 160 190 4 >10:1 170 200 180 210 3241 190 220 5 3251 205 240 3 220 255 >15:1 250 290 20:1 2 260 305 >20:1 280 325 >20:1 1 320 375 >25:1 135 160 >15:1 145 170 155 180 160 190 4 5 >10:1 170 200 180 210 190 220 3241 >15:1 205 240 3 5 220 255 250 290 20:1 2 5 260 305 >20:1 280 325 1 5 320 375 >25:1 180 Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04

Table 4 Permissible differential pressures for Series 240 Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim Table 4a Valves with fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (FA) Differential pressures >40 bar for ANSI version only Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN 50 35 48 DN 80 DN 80 PN 40 DN 100 DN 100 PN 40 DN 150 DN 150 PN 40 DN 200 and DN 250 DN 200/250 PN 40 DN 300 240 0.3...1.1 0.6...2.2 0.9...3.3 350/700 0.4...1.2 0.8...2.4 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 21...3.3 700 (0.8...1.2) (1.6...2.4) (2.4...3.6) 2.6...4.3 2.7...3.3 1400 0.8...1.2 0.8...2.4 1.0...3.0 1.4...2.7 1.7...3.2 2.0...3.0 2.05...2.7 2.45...3.2 2800 1.25...2.3 2.8...3.8 3.0...3.6 1.5...3.0 1.6...2.4 1.8...3.8 2.0...3.0 2.4...3.2 2x2800 5 Actuator in cm 2 Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 350 6 11.9 17.9 20.8 31.2 700 (23.8) 35 48 6 11.9 17.9 20.8 31.2 350 50 63 3.5 6.9 10.4 12.1 18.1 35 48 (23.8) (47.6) 700 50 63 (13.8) (27.6) 35 48 (23.8) (47.6) (50) 50 700 50 63 (13.8) (27.6) (41.5) 46.6 38 48 350 6 11.9 17.9 20.8 31.2 (23.8) (47.6) (50) (50) 55 63 6.9 13.8 20.7 24.2 36.3 44.9 700 75 80 4.3 8.6 12.9 15 22.5 27.9 100 100 2.7 5.5 8.2 9.6 14.4 17.8 55 63 27.6 50 50 50 75 80 1400 17.1 42.8 43.9 50 100 100 11 27.4 28.1 33.6 95 80 4.3 8.6 12.9 15 22.5 27.9 145 100 700 2.7 5.5 8.2 9.6 14.4 17.8 205 125 1.8 3.5 5.3 6.1 9.2 11.4 95 80 17.1 42.8 43.9 50 145 100 1400 11 27.4 28.1 33.6 205 125 7 17.6 18 21.5 155 100 11 27.4 28.1 33.6 230 125 7 8.8 12.3 14.9 1400 305 150 4.9 6.1 8.5 10.4 135...480 200 2.7 3.4 4.8 5.8 155 100 50 230 125 28.1 35.1 42.1 49.1 2800 305 150 19.5 24.4 29.3 34.1 135...480 200 11 13.7 16.5 19.2 230 125 50 50 50 305 150 2x2800 39 48.8 50 135...480 200 21.9 27.4 32.9 230 125 7 8.8 12.3 14.9 305 150 4.9 6.1 8.5 10.4 1400 480 200 2.7 3.4 4.8 5.8 1000 250 1.8 2.2 3.1 3.7 230 125 28.1 35.1 42.1 49.1 305 150 19.5 24.4 29.3 34.1 2800 480 200 11 13.7 16.5 19.2 1000 250 5.5 6.6 7.9 Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04 181

Table 4b Series 240 Valves with fail-safe position Valve OPEN (FE) Differential pressures >40 bar for ANSI version only 240 350/700 0.2 1.0 Bench range in bar 700 0.2 0.6 with actuator size (cm 2 ) 1400 2800 2x2800 0.4 2.0 (0.3 1.1) Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 3.6 4 6 DN K VS SB DN 50 35 48 DN 80 DN 80 PN 40 DN 100 DN 100 PN 40 DN 150 DN 150 PN 40 DN 200 and DN 250 DN 200/250 PN 40 DN 300 Actuator in cm 2 Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 350 6 20.8 38.7 700 (23.8) 35 48 6 20.8 38.7 44.6 50 63 3.5 12.1 22.5 25.9 350 35 48 6 20.8 38.7 44.6 50 63 3.5 12.1 22.5 25.9 35 48 700 (23.8) (50) (50) (50) 50 63 (13.8) (31.1) (50) (50) 38 48 350 6 20.8 38.7 44.6 50 (35.7) (50) (50) 55 63 6.9 24.2 44.9 50 700 75 80 4.3 15 27.9 32.1 100 100 2.7 9.6 17.8 20.6 55 63 (10.4) (44.9) (50) 75 80 1400 (6.4) (27.9) (50) 100 100 (4.1) (17.8) (34.3) 95 80 4.3 15 27.9 32.1 145 100 700 2.7 9.6 17.8 20.6 205 125 1.8 6.1 11.4 13.2 95 80 (6.4) (27.9) (50) 145 100 1400 (4.1) (17.8) (34.3) 205 125 (2.6) (11.4) (21.9) 155 100 (4.1) (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) (50) 230 125 3.5 14 17.6 35.1 1400 305 150 2.4 9.8 12.2 24.4 135...480 200 1.4 5.5 6.9 13.7 230 125 (5.3) (22.8) (43.9) (50) 305 150 2800 (3.7) (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) 135...480 200 (2.1) (8.9) (17.1) (19.9) 230 125 (10.5) (45.6) 305 150 2x2800 (7.3) (31.7) 135...480 200 (4.1) (17.8) 230 125 3.5 14 17.6 35.1 305 150 2.4 9.8 12.2 24.4 1400 480 200 1.4 5.5 6.9 13.7 1000 250 0.9 3.5 4.4 8.8 230 125 (5.3) (22.8) (43.9) (50) 305 150 (3.7) (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) 2800 480 200 (2.1) (8.9) (17.1) (19.9) 1000 250 1.8 7 8.8 182 Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures for Series 250 Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim Table 5a Valves with fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (stem extends) Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN 50 PN 16...40 DN 50 PN 63...160 DN 80 PN 16...40 DN 80 PN 63...160 DN 100 PN 16...40 DN 100 PN 63...160 700 1400 2800 2x2800 Actuator in cm 2 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) 0.8...2.4 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 2.35...3.8 2.6...4.3 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 1.4...2.7 2.05...2.7 1.1...3.6 (2.4...3.6) Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 1.1...1.8 (1.25...1.6) 1.8...3.8 (2.8...3.8) 1.7...3.2 (2.45...3.2) 2.8...3.2 (2.8...3.8) 35 50 700 11 21.9 32.9 38.4 35 50 35 50 50 63 16...70 80 35 50 50 63 16...70 80 38 50 55 63 75 80 35...100 100 38 50 55 63 75 80 35...100 100 700 11 21.9 32.9 38.4 57.6 64.4 71.3 1400 (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) (112.4) (134.4) 700 11 21.9 32.9 38.4 57.6 64.4 71.3 1400 (43.9) (87.8) 700 6.9 13.8 20.7 24.2 36.3 40.6 44.9 1400 (27.6) (55.3) 700 4.3 8.6 12.9 15 22.5 25.2 27.9 1400 (17.1) (34.3) 700 11 21.9 32.9 38.4 57.6 64.4 71.3 1400 (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) 112.4 (134.4) 700 6.9 13.8 20.7 24.2 36.3 40.6 44.9 1400 (27.6) (55.3) (69.1) (70.8) (84.6) 700 4.3 8.6 12.9 15 22.5 25.2 27.9 1400 (17.1) (43.3) (42.8) 43.9 (52.5) 700 11 21.9 32.9 38.4 57.6 64.4 71.3 1400 (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) 112.4 (134.4) 700 6.9 13.8 20.7 24.2 36.3 40.6 44.9 1400 (27.6) (55.3) (69.1) 70.8 (84.6) 700 4.3 8.6 12.9 15 22.5 25.2 27.9 1400 (17.1) (34.3) (42.8) (43.9) (52.5) 700 2.7 5.5 8.2 9.6 14.4 16.1 17.8 1400 (11) (21.9) (27.4) (28.1) (33.6) 700 11 21.9 32.9 38.4 57.6 64.4 71.3 1400 (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) 112.4 (134.4) 700 6.9 13.8 20.7 24.2 36.3 40.6 44.9 1400 (27.6) (55.3) (69.1) 70.8 (84.6) 700 4.3 8.6 12.9 15 22.5 25.2 27.9 1400 (17.1) (34.3) (42.8) 43.9 (52.5) 700 2.7 5.5 8.2 9.6 14.4 16.1 17.8 1400 (11) (21.9) (27.4) 28.1 (33.6) Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04 183

Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN 150 200 300 95 80 145 100 205 125 85...250 150 155 100 230 125 3.5 150 135...480 200 230 125 305 150 480 200 1000 250 700 1400 2800 2x2800 Actuator in cm 2 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) 0.4...1.2 (0.8...1.2) 0.8...2.4 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 0.8...2.4 (1.6...2.4) 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 1.4...2.3 2.1...3.3 2.35...3.8 2.6...4.3 1.0...3.0 (2.0...3.0) 1.2...3.6 (2.4...3.6) 1.4...2.7 2.05...2.7 1.1...3.6 (2.4...3.6) Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 1.1...1.8 (1.25...1.6) 1.8...3.8 (2.8...3.8) 1.7...3.2 (2.45...3.2) 2.8...3.2 (2.8...3.8) 700 4.3 8.6 12.9 15 22.5 25.2 27.9 1400 (17.1) (34.3) (42.8) 43.9 (52.5) 2800 120 107.1 120 700 2.7 5.5 8.2 9.6 14.4 16.1 17.8 1400 (11) (21.9) (27.4) 28.1 (33.6) 2800 76.8 68.6 76.8 1400 3.5 7 8.8 12.3 14.9 2800 (14) (28.1) (35.1) (42.1) (22.8) (49.1) 2x2800 (28.1) (56.2) (45.6) 1400 2.4 4.9 6.1 8.5 10.4 2800 (9.8) (19.5) (24.4) (29.3) (15.8) (34.1) 2x2800 (19.5) (39) (31.7) 700 2.7 5.5 8.2 9.6 14.4 16.1 18.8 1400 (11) (21.9) (27.4) 28.1 (33.6) 2800 76.8 68.6 76.8 1400 3.5 7 8.8 12.3 14.9 2800 (14) (28.1) (35.1) (42.1) (22.8) (49.1) 2x2800 (28.1) (56.2) (70.2) (84.2) (45.6) 1400 2.4 439 6.1 8.5 10.4 2800 (9.8) (19.5) (24.4) (29.3) (15.8) (34.1) 2x2800 (19.5) (39) (48.8) (58.5) (31.7) 1400 1.4 2.7 3.4 4.8 5.8 2800 (5.5) (11) (13.7) (16.5) (8.9) (19.2) 2x2800 (11) (21.9) (27.4) (32.9) (17.8) 1400 3.5 7 8.8 12.3 14.9 2800 (14) (28.1) (35.1) (42.1) (22.8) (49.1) 2x2800 (28.1) (56.2) (70.2) (84.2) (45.6) 1400 2.4 4.9 6.1 8.5 10.4 2800 (9.8) (19.5) (24.4) (29.3) (15.8) (34.1) 2x2800 (19.5) (39) (48.8) (58.5) (31.7) 1400 1.4 2.7 3.4 4.8 5.8 2800 (5.5) (11) (13.7) (16.5) (8.9) (19.2) 2x2800 (11) (21.9) (27.4) (32.9) (17.8) 2800 1.8 3.5 4.4 5.3 4.8 7.9 2x2800 3.5 7 8.8 10.5 9.7 15.8 184 Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04

Table 5b Series 250 Valves with fail-safe position Valve OPEN (FE) Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 700 0.2 1.0 1400 0.4 2.0 2800 (0.3 1.1) 2x2800 Required supply pressure 2.4 3.6 4.0 5.0 6.0 DN K VS SB DN 50 PN 16...40 DN 50 PN 63...160 DN 80 PN 16...40 DN 80 PN 63...160 DN 100 PN 16...40 DN 100 PN 63...160 DN 150 Actuator in cm 2 Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 35 50 700 38.4 35 50 35 50 50 63 16...70 80 35 50 50 63 16...70 80 38 50 55 63 75 80 35...100 100 38 50 55 63 75 80 35...100 100 95 80 145 100 205 125 85...250 150 700 38.4 71.3 82.3 109.7 1400 (71.3) 700 38.4 71.3 82.3 1400 (71.3) 700 24.2 44.9 51.8 1400 (44.9) 700 15 27.9 32.1 1400 (27.9) 700 38.4 71.3 82.3 109.7 137.1 1400 (71.3) (137.1) (159.1) 700 24.2 44.9 51.8 69.1 86.4 1400 (44.9) (86.4) (100.2) 700 15 27.9 32.1 42.8 53.6 1400 (27.9) (53.6) (62.1) 700 38.4 71.3 82.3 109.7 137.1 1400 (71.3) (137.1) 700 24.2 44.9 51.8 69.1 86.4 1400 (44.9) (86.4) 700 15 27.9 32.1 42.8 53.6 1400 (27.9) (53.6) 700 9.6 17.8 20.6 27.4 34.3 1400 (17.8) (34.3) 700 38.4 71.3 82.3 109.7 137.1 1400 (71.3) (137.1) (159.1) 700 24.2 44.9 51.8 69.1 86.4 1400 (44.9) (86.4) (100.2) 700 15 27.9 32.1 42.8 53.6 1400 (27.9) (53.6) (62.1) 700 9.6 17.8 20.6 27.4 34.3 1400 (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) 700 15 27.9 32.1 42.8 53.6 1400 (27.9) (53.6) (62.1) (83.6) (105) 2800 0 0 0 0 0 700 9.6 17.8 20.6 27.4 34.3 1400 (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) (53.5) (67.2) 2800 0 0 0 0 0 1400 3.5 14 17.6 26.3 35.1 2800 (22.8) (43.9) (50.9) 2x2800 (45.6) 1400 2.4 9.8 12.2 18.3 24.4 2800 (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) 2x2800 (31.7) Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04 185

Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 700 0.2 1.0 1400 0.4 2.0 2800 (0.3 1.1) 2x2800 Required supply pressure 2.4 3.6 4.0 5.0 6.0 DN K VS SB DN 200 DN 300 155 100 230 125 305 150 135...480 200 230 125 305 150 480 200 1000 250 Actuator in cm 2 Δp when p 2 = 0 bar 700 9.6 17.8 20.6 27.4 34.3 1400 (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) (53.5) (67.2) 2800 0 0 0 0 0 1400 3.5 14 17.6 26.3 35.1 2800 (22.8) (43.9) (50.9) (68.4) (86) 2x2800 (45.6) 1400 2.4 9.8 12.2 18.3 24.4 2800 (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) (47.5) (59.7) 2x2800 (31.7) 1400 1.4 5.5 6.9 10.3 13.7 2800 (8.9) (17.1) (19.1) (26.7) (33.6) 2x2800 (17.8) 1400 3.5 14 17.6 26.3 35.1 2800 (22.8) (43.9) (50.9) (68.4) (86) 2x2800 (45.6) (87.8) 1400 2.4 9.8 12.2 18.3 24.4 2800 (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) (47.5) (59.7) 2x2800 (31.7) (60.9) 1400 1.4 5.5 6.9 10.3 13.7 2800 (8.9) (17.1) (19.9) (26.7) (33.6) 2x2800 (17.8) (34.3) 2800 1.8 7 8.8 13.2 17.6 2x2800 3.5 14 17.6 The following details are required on ordering AC-1 Trim with K V /C V according to Table 2 or AC-2 Trim with K V /C V according to Table 3 Material For tag no. in order/quotation... Operating pressure in bar (a), bar (g) or psi (a), psi (g) with minimum, normal, and maximum flow rate Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in operating state with minimum, normal, and maximum flow rate Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C/ F Vapor pressure in bar Pipe diameter DN or NPS Nominal pressure PN or ANSI Class... Material According to Table 1 Specifications subject to change without notice. 186 Data Sheet T 8082 EN 2004-04

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-3 Trim Application Optimized trim for low-noise and low-wear pressure reduction for liquids with differential pressures up to 100 bar Nominal size DN 15 to 200 NPS ½ to 8 Nominal pressure PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F The optimized three-stage AC-3 Trim is used in Type 3251 Globe Valves or Type 3256 Angle Valves Special features Raised seat Multi-stage parabolic plug Additional plug guiding integrated into the seat Optionally low-wear version equipped with stellited seating surfaces or hardened trim Standard version AC-3 Optimized three-stage trim for Type 3251 Globe Valves and Type 3256 Angle Valves in nominal sizes from DN 15 to DN 200 (NPS ½ to 8) Additional versions AC-3 Trim engineered for special applications for pressure drops over 100 bar (1450 psi) Details available on request Five-stage AC-5 Trim optimized for low-noise and low-wear performance for Type 3254 Globe Valves or Type 3256 Angle Valve Details available on request Fig. 1 Type 3251 Globe Valve with AC-3 Trim Data Sheet T 8083 EN 2006-11 187

Principle of operation The medium flows through the valve in the flow-to-open direction. The valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow. To avoid vibrations, the plug is double guided by a guide bushing at the top and a second guide in the seat. Compared to standard valve trims, the AC-3 Trims considerably reduce the sound pressure level for differential pressure ratios between X F = 0.25 and X F = 0.95 by shifting the point of incipient cavitation. Depending on the valve load, the sound pressure level is reduced to varying degrees. The differential pressure ratio X F is defined as X F = p1 Δp pv with Δp being the differential pressure across the valve, p 1 being the upstream pressure, and p v representing the vapor pressure of the medium. The reduction of the sound pressure level ΔLp Aa compared to a standard valve trim is exemplified in Fig. 3. The diagram illustrates four different valve loads. Table 1 Technical data for AC-3 Trim Fig. 2 Type 3256 Angle Valve with AC-3 Trim and metal bellows seal AC-3 Nominal size DN 15 to 200 NPS ½ to 8 Depending on valve type Nominal pressure PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Depending on valve type Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F Δp max Case 1: < 100 bar 1450 psi, if no restrictions on trim material apply Max. perm. differential pressure Case 2: < 60 bar 870 psi, if any restriction on trim material applies Medium Liquids only Direction of flow Flow-to-open (FTO) only Closure member Double-guided multi-stage parabolic plug Seat-plug seal Leakage class (DIN EN 1349) Characteristic Metal sealing: Class IV IV-S1for SB 100 IV-S2 for SB < 100 Equal percentage or linear Trim materials 1.4571 1.4006 1.4112 Wear resistance Multi-stage pressure relief Stellited seating surfaces Hardening (up to DN 150/NPS 6) Plug balancing DN 100/NPS 4: K V 25/C V 30 and higher, except with hardened plugs DN 100 to 150/NPS 4 to 6: K V 40/C V 47 and higher, except with hardened plugs DN 200/NPS 8: K V 63/C V 75 and higher, except with hardened plugs Valve bonnet Standard Insulating section Bellows seal 188 Data Sheet T 8083 EN 2006-11

Reduction of the sound pressure level The diagram illustrates the reduction of the sound pressure level when using an AC-3 Trim as opposed to a standard trim. Sound pressure level difference ΔLpa [db(a)] between AC-3 Trim and V-port trim ΔLpa 0-5 [db(a)] Valve load 25 % 50 % 75 % 90 % -10-15 -20 [ ] -25 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 XF Fig. 3 Valve DN 80 (NPS 3) and K V 25 (C v 30) Permissible differential pressures for Type 3251 and Type 3256 Valves are available on request The following details are required on ordering Operating pressure in bar (a), bar (g) or psi (a), psi (g) at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C/ F Pipe diameter DN or NPS Nominal pressure PN or ANSI Class... Material According to Table 1 Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8083 EN 2006-11 189

Table 2 AC-3 Trim Nominal sizes with associated K VS and C V coefficients The specified travels must be achieved including an overtravel of 10 %. The use of a mechanical travel stop is recommended for actuators with fail-safe action stem extends. DN/in DN 15 NPS ½ DN 25 NPS 1 DN 40 NPS 1½ DN 50 NPS 2 DN 80 NPS 3 DN 100 NPS 4 DN 150 NPS 6 DN 200 NPS 8 Seat bore [mm] Travel [mm] K V C V Valve Type 12 0.4 0.5 16 0.63 0.75 7.5 18 1.0 1.2 22 1.6 2.0 12 0.4 0.5 16 0.63 0.75 18 1.0 1.2 7.5 1.6 2.0 22 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 16 0.63 0.75 18 1.0 1.2 22 1.6 2.0 7.5 24 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 31 6.3 7.5 18 1.0 1.2 22 1.6 2.0 24 2.5 3.0 15 4 5 31 6.3 7.5 38 10 12 24 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 31 6.3 7.5 15 10 12 38 12 14 50 16 20 63 25 30 4 5 31 6.3 7.5 38 50 16 20 63 25 30 80 40 47 31 6.3 7.5 38 50 16 20 63 25 30 30 80 40 47 100 63 75 15 10 10 12 12 15 12 12 14 14 50 16 20 63 25 30 80 30 40 47 100 63 75 80 95 3256 3251 3256 3251 3256 3251 3256 3251 3256 3251 3256 3251 3256 3251 3256 190 Data Sheet T 8083 EN 2006-11

Silencer Type 3381 DIN and ANSI versions Application Noise attenuation, velocity reduction at valve outlet for gases and vapors Nominal size DN 50 to 400 NPS 2 to 16 Nominal pressure PN 10 to 160 Class 300 to 900 Type 3381 Silencer acting as a fixed restriction to reduce the sound pressure level. One or two attenuation plates in flangeless version (Type 3381-1, see Figs. 3 and 4 or Type 3381-2, see Fig. 5) or System of two to five attenuation plates in a body (Type 3381-3-x, see Figs. 1, 2, 6) Flow velocity reduction of compressible media at the valve outlet Used in conjunction with SAMSON Series 240 and Series 250 Valves Versions Type 3381-1.x Attenuation plates mounted between the valve and the pipe flange. The nominal size of the silencer can either be the same as the nominal valve size (Type 3381-1.1, Fig. 3) or the same as the following expander (Type 3381-1.2, Fig. 4). Depending on the K V /C V coefficient of the attenuation plates either Type 3381-1.1 or Type 3381-1.2 is used. Type 3381-2 A combination of the Type 3381-1.1 and Type 3381-1.2, always with two attenuation plates. This version can only be used with certain K V /C V coefficient combinations as the attenuation plates are mounted directly between the valve and pipe flange, not requiring a separate housing. The pipe expander is not scope of the delivery of both versions (Type 3381-1.x and Type 3381-2). Type 3381-3-x Silencer with two to five attenuation plates located in one housing. The x in the type designation indicates the number of attenuation plates. A pipe expander similar to the Types 3381-1.x and 3381-2 is not required since it is already provided by the housing holding the attenuation plates. The scope of delivery includes all parts necessary for installation including bolts. Fig. 1 Type 3241-7 Control Valve with Type 3381-3 Silencer Other versions for Higher differential pressures On request Fig. 2 Type 3381-3-3 Data Sheet T 8084 EN 2006-07 191

Principle of operation The Type 3381 Silencer provides noise attenuation by acting as a fixed restriction. The silencer raises the pressure of the medium flow at the valve outlet and reduces the pressure downstream of the silencer to the required downstream pressure p 2. As a result, the sound pressure level is reduced. In applications using compressible media, it additionally lowers the flow velocity at the valve outlet. The pressure reduction per attenuation plate (Δp) depends on the flow rate and the prevailing operating temperature. Generally, the pressure reduction is between 5 and 7 bar. A five-stage silencer (Type 3381-3-5) normally provides a maximum pressure drop of 35 bar. Selecting and sizing the silencer and the upstream control valve The silencer should always be sized together with the upstream control valve to achieve the best results. 1. Calculate appropriate K V coefficient according to IEC 60534. 2. Select nominal valve size from Table 2. 3. Select materials, pressure and temperature from Table 1 and from the associated pressure-temperature diagram (see T 8000-2 EN). The number of attenuation plates and the nominal size is determined from the operating data at hand. Fig. 3 Type 3381-1.1 Dimensions The dimensions of Type 3381-3-x depend on the number of attenuation plates and the pressure rating. More details are available on request. Fig. 4 Type 3381-1.2 The following details are required on ordering: Operating pressure in bar (a), bar (g), psi (a), psi (g) at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Flow rate in kg/h m³/h in standard or operating state at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Process medium Density in kg/m³ and temperature in C or F Pipe diameter DN or NPS upstream and downstream of the silencer PN... According to DIN, ANSI or JIS Material According to Table 1 Others All other data required to size the control valve Fig. 5 Type 3381-2 Fig. 6 Sectional drawing of Type 3381-3-5, five-stage 192 Data Sheet T 8084 EN 2006-07

Table 1 Technical data Type 3381-1.x, Type 3381-2 and Type 3381-3.x Silencers Version according to DIN ANSI Material 1) Forged steel P250GH 1.0460 Stainless forged steel 1.4571 Forged steel A105 Stainless forged steel A182 F316 Nominal size (inlet) 2) DN 50 400 NPS 2 16 Nominal pressure 3) PN 10 160 Class 150 900 Type of end connections All DIN flanges Flanges RF Temperature range 4) 50 400 C 58 750 F 1) Other materials on request 2) Available nominal sizes and possible combinations as listed in Table 2 3) Varying pressure ratings for inlet and outlet for Type 3381-3.x on request 4) Other temperature ranges for Type 3381-1.x and Type 3381-2 on request Table 2 Available nominal size combinations Nominal valve size (inlet) Outlet pipe nominal size 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 DN NPS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 50 2 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 80 3 ( ) ( ) ( ) 100 4 ( ) 150 6 200 8 250 10 300 12 400 16 ( ) Special version Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8084 EN 2006-07 193

Steam-converting Valves Series 280 Pneumatic and electric steam converters for process engineering and industrial applications Pressure rating: PN 16 to PN 630 Class 150 to Class 2500 Valve size: DN 50 to DN 500 NPS 2 to NPS 20 Temperature: Up to 560 C Up to 1040 F 195

Series 280 Pneumatic Steam Converter Type 3281-1 and Type 3286-1 Steam-converting Valve Type 3281 and Type 3286 Application Final control element with either globe or angle valve for use in process engineering applications and thermal plants. Nominal size DN 50 to 200 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Temperatures up to 500 C Conversion of valve sizing coefficients: C v (in U.S. gallons/min) = 1.17 K vs (in m 3 /h) K vs (in m 3 /h) = 0.86 C v (in U.S. gallons/min) Steam converters reduce the pressure and the temperature to the set point adjusted on the pressure and temperature controller (Fig. 1). They consist of a Type 3281 or Type 3286 Steam-converting Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3281-1 or Type 3286-1 Steam Converters). The steam-converting valve largely corresponds to a Type 3251 Globe Valve (see Data Sheet T 8051 EN) or a Type 3256 Angle Valve (see Data Sheet T 8065 EN) equipped with a Flow Divider St III. Valve body material Cast steel or High-temperature cast steel. Low-noise valve plug Metal sealing Lapped-in metal or Pressure balanced to handle high differential pressures. Water supply via the Flow Divider St III ensures Full utilization of the kinetic energy of the steam for mixing and splitting up the spray water Fast evaporation independent of the steam flow Homogenous condition of the reduced and desuperheated steam No thermal shock or erosion by the supplied spray water because it has no contact with the valve body Low-vibration and low-noise operation The steam converters are based on the modular principle and can be combined with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures up to 220 C or with an adjustable high-temperature packing up to 350 C; nominal pressure PN 16 to 160; with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (effective diaphragm area 350 to 2800 cm 2, see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN). Type 3281-1 (Fig. 2) DN 50 to 200 Type 3286-1 DN 50 to 200 DN 250/300 on request Water Superheated steam 4 Fig. 2 Type 3281-1 Pneumatic Steam Converter 3 Further versions Nominal pressure PN >160 to 400 on request Welding ends according to DIN EN 12 627 Insulating section for temperatures up to 500 C Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator Effective diaphragm area 350 or 700 cm 2 on request (see T 8310-1 EN) Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN ANSI version NPS 2 to 8, Class 300 to 2500 2 1 Reduced and desuperheated steam 1 Transmitter 3 Steam converter 2 Controller 4 Control valve for spray water Fig. 1 Steam pressure/temperature control with steam converter Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02 197

Principle of operation (Figs. 3 and 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat (2) and the plug (3). The spray water has no contact with the valve body. It is piped to the Flow Divider St III (13) via the connecting pipe (5.5) and the annular chamber formed by the cage element (13.1). Having passed the throttling area between the valve seat and the plug, the steam flow reaches its maximum velocity and contacts the supplied spray water at the inner wall of the flow divider (13). The steam and the entrained water are split up and mixed in the close-mesh wire fabric of the flow divider. At the same time, the steam velocity is reduced, giving up heat which is transferred to the spray water across the the large surface area of the wire mesh coil, leading to quick evaporation. The steam water mixture leaves the flow divider as mist with a high steam content. Evaporation is completed a short distance downstream of the steam valve. The water atomization described is ensured over the entire load range, because the steam velocity at the throttling point is independent of flow. Water Superheated steam 5.5 3 p 3 t3 13.1 2 p 13 1 p t 2 1 t2 Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN), the steam converter provides two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon air supply decrease or failure. "Actuator stem extends" Whenever the air supply fails, the valve closes. "Actuator stem retracts" Whenever the air supply fails, the valve opens. Fig. 3 Type 3281-1 Pneumatic Steam Converter with flanges and Type 3271 Actuator Water p 3 t3 5.5 13.1 p 2 t2 13 3 2 p 1 t 1 Superheated steam Legend of Figs. 3 and 4 2 Seat 3 Plug 5.5 Water connection 13 Flow Divider St III 13.1 Cage element Fig. 4 Type 3286-1 Pneumatic Steam Converter with welding ends and Type 3271 Actuator 198 Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical data of the Type 3281 and Type 3286 Material Cast steel GS-C25 1.0619 Nominal size DN 50 to 200 2) Cast steel GS-17 CrMo 55 1.7357 Nominal pressure 1) PN 16 to 160 16 to 160 Type of connection Flanges All DIN versions Welding ends According to DIN 3239 Part 1 with edge form acc. to DIN 2559 Seat-plug sealing Metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Body without insulating section 10 to 220 Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 10 to 400 10 to 500 Bellows seal 10 to 400 10 to 500 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing 200 to 500 Balanced with graphite ring 220 to 500 Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing IV Balanced 1) Up to PN 400 on request 2) DN 200 in PN 40 to100 Lapped-in metal Metal sealing IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 With graphite ring: III Table 2 Materials Cast steel GS-C25 Standard version Body and flanges 1) 1.0619 Seat and plug 2) Metal-sealing 1.4006/1.4008 Sealing ring when Balanced Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 Packing Body gasket Metal Cast steel GS-17 CrMo 55 1.7357 V-ring packing PTFE with carbon; spring: 1.4310 or high-temperature packing Insulating section 13 CrMo 44 1) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in T 8000-2 EN, materials for temperatures up to 500 C: GS-12 CrMo 910 (1.7380). 2) Seats and plugs also stellited, or plug of solid Stellite Table 3 Available Kvs coefficients Versions highlighted in gray are also available with balanced plug Kvs 3.0 4.8 7.5 12 20 30 47 75 120 190 1) 270 1) Seat 24 31 38 50 63 80 100 125 150 Travel 15 30 60 DN 50 80 100 150 200 Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02 199

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 4a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (FA) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) 350 700 1400 0.2 to1.0 0.4 to 1.2 0.4 to 1.2 (0.8 to 1.2) 0.4 to 2.0 0.8 to 2.4 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.6 to 3.0 0.5 to 2.5 1.2 to 3.6 1.4 to 2.3 2.1 to 3.3 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 1.4 to 2.3 (1.85 to 2.3) 1.1 to 2.4 2.1 to 3.3 (2.7 to 3.3) 1.4 to 2.7 (2.05 to 2.7) 2.35 to 3.8 2.6 to 4.3 (3.05 to 3.8) (3.45 to 4.3) 1.3 to 2.8 1.7 to 3.2 (2.45 to 3.2) 2800 0.4 to 1.2 2x2800 (0.8 to 1.2) Required supply pressure DN 50 80 80 100 80 100 80 100 100 150 Kvs 3 to 7.5 12 20 30 47 150 75 150 120 200 120 200 190 200 270 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 0.9 to 1.6 1.1 to 1.8 (1.25 to 1.6) 1.0 to 2.1 Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 1.25 to 2.35 (1.55 to 2.1) 1.1 to 2.6 1.5 to 3.0 (1.85 to 2.6) 350 8.1 22 22 49.9 35.9 77.7 91.7 140 700 (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) 350 4.3 12.7 12.7 29.4 21 45.1 54.4 83.6 700 (62.7) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) 350 8.1 8.1 19.2 13.6 30.3 35.8 55.3 700 (41.4) (85.8) (130) (99.7) (147) (166) (188) 700 4.3 10.7 10.7 23.6 17.1 36.4 42.8 65.3 73.3 81.3 1400 (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) 700 6.3 6.3 14.4 10.4 22.5 26.5 40.7 45.7 50.8 1400 (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) 700 8.7 6.2 13.7 16.3 25 28.2 31.3 1400 (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) 700 5.4 8.7 10.3 15.9 17.9 19.9 1400 (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) 700 5.4 8.6 10.2 15.8 17.8 19.8 1400 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) 1400 7.4 4.3 9.5 10.5 13.6 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) 1400 5.1 6.5 7.2 9.3 8.6 11.5 2800 (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) 200 Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal Table 4b Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (FE) 350 Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 2800 2x2800 0.2 to 1.0 (0.2 to 0.6) Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 50 350 21.6 91.3 203 342 3 to 7.5 80 700 (105) (244) (400) 80 100 80 100 80 100 100 150 12 20 30 47 150 75 150 120 200 1) 120 200 1) 190 200 1) 270 350 12.4 54.2 121 204 700 (62.5) (146) (280) 350 7.9 35.7 80.1 136 700 (41) (97) (185) 700 10.6 42.7 94.1 158 1400 (49) (113) (216) 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 1400 (30.4) (71) (135) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) 700 10.2 23 39.1 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) 700 10.0 22.9 38.9 1400 (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (69) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) Limits of application The Type 3281 and Type 3286 have a broad range of application. However, optimum operation can only be guaranteed when the following operational conditions are provided (for absolute pressures p abs in bar): Pressure ratio X = Δp/p 1 0.1 Water pressure (p 3) at connecting flange (5.5): p 3 p 2 + 0.15. p 1 The water pressure upstream of the control valve (4) illustrated in Fig. 1 must be higher than p 3. The pressure must be selected carefully so that efficient control of the supplied water is ensured over the entire operating range. The steam converter can only be used when the superheated steam and the spray water contain no or only small-sized suspended matter. For further details, please refer to the Information Sheet T 8250 EN. Selection and sizing of the steam converter The steam converters require particularly careful sizing. SAMSON therefore assumes the final sizing of the valves. 1. The ideal K v coefficient is calculated acc. to IEC 60534. 2. The nominal size and K vs coefficient are selected acc. to Table 3. 3. The permissible differential pressure Δp is determined and the suitable actuator selected acc. to the Tables 4a to 5b. 4. The steam converters are selected considering material, pressures and temperatures acc. to Tables 1 and 2 and also acc. to the associated pressure-temperature diagram (see T 8000-2 EN). 5. Accessories are selected acc. to Tables 1 and 2. 1) Only for Type 3281 Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02 201

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced, metal-seated plug with PTFE ring Without metal bellows seal Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 5a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (FA) Table 5b "Valve OPEN" (FE) 700 0.6 to 3.0 1.2 to 3.6 Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) 1400 2800 2x2800 0.4 to 2.0 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.5 to 2.5 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 0.6 to 3.0 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 0.4 to 2.0 (0.4 to 1.2) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 150 75 700 18.4 58.3 38.4 98.3 18.4 178 378 1400 (298) (378) (218) (400) 150 700 13.9 53.8 33.9 93.8 13.9 174 373 120 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) 200 1) 700 4.6 20.2 12.4 35.8 4.6 67 145 1400 (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 200 1) 190 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 299 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) 200 1) 270 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.3 109 265 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) 1) Only for Type 3281 Table 6 Dimensions and weights for Type 3281-1 Globe Valve in standard version Valve size DN 50 80 100 150 200 Length L PN 10 to 40 230 310 350 480 600 PN 63 to 160 300 380 430 550 650 350 cm 2 457 462 482 H1 700 cm 2 457 462 482 732 805 with actuator 1400 cm 2 517 537 732 805 2800 cm 2 722 817 890 H2 PN 10 to 40 90 100 160 220 250 PN 63 to160 100 120 180 235 270 Weight without actuator (appx. kg) PN 16 to 40 40 68 85 215 450 PN 63 to 160 66 105 140 395 660 202 Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02

Table 7 Dimensions and weights for Type 3286 Angle Valve in standard version Valve size DN 50 80 100 150 200 Length L2 PN 10 to 40 125 155 175 225 275 PN 63 to160 150 190 215 275 325 H1 with actuator 350 cm 2 415 400 410 700 cm 2 415 400 410 628 965 1400 cm 2 455 465 628 965 2800 cm 2 650 713 1050 Weight without actuator (appx. kg) PN 16 to 40 37 63 80 200 440 PN 63 to 160 62 100 130 330 On request Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Actuator size cm 2 350 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm D 280 390 530 770 H 1) 82 196 287 617 1134 H3 2) 110 190 610 648 Thread d M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 Thread a G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) Weights (kg) Without handwheel With handwheel 8 22 70 450 950 13 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN. 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly H3 ØD a ØD a H3 H d H H1 H1 H6 L3 H6 L3 H2 L2 L2 Type 3281-1 Type 3286-1 Dimensions H6 and L3 for spray water connection available on request. Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02 203

Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3281 Globe Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve size DN 50 80 100 150 200 350 cm 2 727 732 752 Height H4 with actuator 700 cm 2 727 732 752 1083 1365 1400 cm 2 787 807 1083 1365 2800 cm 2 992 1168 1450 Weight (kg) w/o actuator for PN 16 to 40 50 78 105 250 475 PN 63 to160 75 115 160 380 685 Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3286 Angle Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve size DN 50 80 100 150 200 350 cm 2 685 670 680 Height H4 with actuator 700 cm 2 685 670 680 978 1400 cm 2 725 735 978 2015 2800 cm 2 920 1063 2100 Weight (kg) w/o actuator for PN 16 to 40 47 70 100 235 PN 63 to 160 70 105 150 365 On request H4 H4 Type 3281-1 with insulating section Type 3286-1 with insulating section Please submit the following details on ordering: Steam converter Type 3281 Globe Valve or Type 3286 Angle Valve Nominal size DN... Nominal pressure PN... Body material As indicated in Table 2 Type of connection Flanges or welding ends Plug Standard or balanced Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Max. and min. flow rate of the superheated and desuperheated steam Steam temperature upstream and downstream of the valve p 1 and t 1 as well as p 2 and t 2 in kg/h or t/h t 1 t 2 Pressure and temperature of spray water upstream of the valve p 3 and t 3 Actuator Type 3271 Effective actuator area... cm 2 Fail-safe position Accessories Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 204 Data Sheet T 8251 EN 2008-02

Series 280 Pneumatic Steam Converter Type 3284-1 Steam-converting Valve Type 3284 Application Final control element with globe valve for use in process engineering applications and thermal plants. Nominal size DN 100 to 400 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Temperatures Up to 500 C Steam converters reduce the pressure and temperature to the set point adjusted on the pressure and temperature controller (Fig. 1). They consist of a Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type 3284-1 Steam Converter). The steam-converting valve largely corresponds to a singleseate Type 3254 Globe Valve (see Data Sheet T 8060 EN) equipped with a Flow Divider St III. Valve body material Cast steel or High-temperature cast steel Low-noise valve plug Metal-sealing or Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures Additional plug stem guide in the lower body flange Water supply via the Flow Divider St III ensures Full utilization of the kinetic energy of the steam for mixing and splitting up the spray water Fast evaporation independent of the steam flow rate Homogenous condition of the reduced, desuperheated steam No thermal shock or erosion by the supplied spray water because it has no contact with the valve body Low-vibration and low-noise operation The steam converters are based on the modular principle and can be equipped with the following accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures up to 220 C, or with an adjustable high-temperature packing up to 350 C; nominal pressure PN 16 to 160; with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (effective diaphragm area 350 to 2800 cm 2, see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN). Type 3284-1 (Fig. 2) DN 100 to 400 Water Superheated steam 4 Fig. 2 Type 3284-1 Steam Converter 3 Additional versions Nominal pressure PN >160 to 400 On request Welding ends according to DIN EN 12 627 Insulating section for temperatures up to 500 C Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T 8310-1/-2 EN ANSI version NPS 4 to 16, ANSI Class 300 to 2500, details on request. 2 1 Reduced and desuperheated steam 1 Transmitter 3 Steam converter 2 Controller 4 Control valve for spray water Fig. 1 Steam pressure/temperature control with steam converter Data Sheet T 8254 EN 2008-02 205

Principle of operation (Figs. 3 and 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat (2) and the plug (3). The spray water does not have contact with the valve body. It is piped to the Flow Divider St III (13) through the connecting pipe (5.5) and the annular chamber formed by the cage element (13.1). After having passed the throttling point between the valve seat and the plug, the steam flow reaches its maximum velocity and contacts the supplied water at the inner wall of the flow divider (13). The steam and the entrained water are split up and mixed in the close-mesh wire fabric of the flow divider. At the same time, the steam velocity is reduced, giving up heat which is transferred to the spray water across the large surface of the wire mesh coil, leading to quick evaporation. The steam-water mixture leaves the flow divider as mist with a high steam content. Evaporation is completed a short distance downstream of the steam-converting valve. Water atomization as described above is ensured over the entire load range, because the steam velocity at the throttling point is independent of flow. Water Superheated steam 5.5 p 3 t3 p 1 p 2 t t2 1 2 13.1 13 3 Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN), the steam converter provides two different fail-safe positions which become effective when the air supply decreases or fails. "Actuator stem extends" Whenever air supply fails, the valve closes. "Actuator stem retracts" Whenever air supply fails, the valve opens. Fig. 3 Type 3284-1 Pneumatic Steam Converter with flanges, standard plug and Type 3271 Actuator 5.5 Water p 3 t3 13.1 13 Superheated steam p 1 p 2 t 1 t2 2 3 Legend of Figs. 3 and 4 2 Seat 3 Plug 5.5 Connecting pipe 13 Flow Divider St III 13.1 Cage element Fig. 4 Type 3284-1 Pneumatic Steam Converter with flanges and balanced plug 206 Data Sheet T 8254 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical data for Type 3284 Material Cast steel GS-C25 1.0619 Nominal size DN 100 to 400 Cast steel GS-17 CrMo 55 1.7357 Nominal pressure 1) PN 16 to 160 16 to 160 Type of connection Flanges All DIN versions Welding ends According to DIN 3239 Part 1 with edge form acc. to DIN 2559 Seat-plug seal Metal-sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T 8000-2 EN) Body without insulating section 10 to 220 Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 10 to 400 10 to 500 Bellows seal 10 to 400 10 to 500 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing 200 to 500 Balanced Graphite ring 220 to 500 Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Valve plug Standard Metal-sealing IV Lapped-in metal IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 Metal-sealing With graphite ring: III 1) Up to PN 400 on request Table 2 Materials Cast steel GS-C25 Standard version Body and flanges 1) 1.0619 Seat and plug 2) Metal-sealing 1.4006/1.4008 Sealing ring when Balanced Graphite Guide bushings 1.4112 Packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 13 CrMo 44 1) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in T 8000-2 EN, materials for temperatures up to 500 C: GS-17 CrMo V511 (1.7706). 2) Seats and plugs also stellited, or plug of solid Stellite Cast steel GS-17 CrMo 55 1.7357 PTFE V-ring packing with carbon, spring of 1.4310, or high-temperature packing Table 3 Available K vs coefficients Versions highlighted in gray also available with balanced plug Kvs 47 75 120 190 270 480 750 1100 Seat mm 63 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 Travel mm 30 60 120 DN 100 150 200 250 300 400 Data Sheet T 8254 EN 2008-02 207

Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. at rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 4a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (FA) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 0.2 to 1.0 2800 0.4 to 1.2 2x2800 (0.8 to 1.2) 0.4 to 1.2 (0.8 to 1.2) 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.4 to 2.0 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 0.6 to 3.0 0.5 to 2.5 0.9 to 1.6 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 1.1 to 1.8 (1.25 to 1.6) 1.4 to 2.3 (1.85 to 2.3) 1.1 to 2.4 1.0 to 2.1 2.1 to 3.3 (2.7 to 3.3) 1.4 to 2.7 (2.05 to 2.7) 1.25 to 2.35 (1.55 to 2.1) 2.35 to 3.8 2.6 to 4.3 (3.05 to 3.8) (3.45 to 4.3) 1.3 to 2.8 1.1 to 2.6 1.7 to 3.2 (2.45 to 3.2) 1.5 to 3.0 (1.85 to 2.6) Required supply pressure DN Kvs 100 47 150 47 150 75 150 to 250 120 Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 700 6.5 6.5 14.5 10.5 22.6 26.7 40.8 45.9 50.9 1400 (30.7) (63) (79.2) (81.2) (97.4) 700 6.2 6.2 14.3 10.2 22.4 26.4 40.6 45.6 50.7 1400 (30.4) (62.8) (78.9) (81) (97.1) 700 8.6 6.2 13.7 16.2 24.9 28.1 31.2 1400 (18.7) (38.7) (48.8) (50) (60) 700 5.2 8.4 10 15.6 17.7 19.7 1400 (11.6) (24.5) (30.9) (31.7) (38.1) 200 to 300 200 to 400 250 to 400 300 to 400 190 270 480 750 1400 7.3 4.2 9.4 10.4 13.5 12.5 16.6 2800 (15.5) (32) (40.2) (48.4) (24.7) (30.9) (37.1) 2x2800 (33) (64) (80.2) (96.8) (49.4) (61.8) (74.2) 1400 5 6.4 7.1 9.3 8.6 11.4 2800 (10.7) (22.1) (27.8) (33.5) (17.1) (21.4) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.2) (55.6) (67) (34.2) (42.8) (51.4) 1400 5.1 4.7 6.3 2800 (5.9) (12.3) (15.5) (18.8) (9.5) (11.9) (14.3) 2x2800 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (37.6) (19) (23.8) (28.6) 2800 4.8 5.8 4.2 5.3 4.8 6 5.3 7.3 2x2800 7.4 9.6 11.6 8.4 10.6 9.6 12 10.6 14.6 400 1100 2800 4 4.1 5 2x2800 5 6.6 8 5.8 7.2 6.6 8.2 7.2 10 208 Data Sheet T 8254 EN 2008-02

Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" Table 4b Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (FE) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 2800 2x2800 0.2 to 1.0 (0.2 to 0.6) Required supply pressure 1.4 2.4 4.0 6.0 DN Kvs 100 47 150 47 150 75 150 250 200 to 300 200 to 400 250 to 400 300 to 400 120 190 270 480 750 Actuator (cm 2 ) Δp when p2 = 0 700 6.5 26.7 59 99.4 1400 (30.7) (71) (136) 700 6.2 26.4 58.7 99.2 1400 (30.6) (71) (136) (216) 700 16.2 36.2 61.3 1400 (18.7) (43.7) (83.8) (134) 700 10.2 23 39.1 1400 (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) 1400 13.5 29.9 50.4 2800 (15.5) (36.1) (68.9) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) 1400 9.3 20.7 34.9 2800 (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) 1400 5.1 11.5 19.6 2800 (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) 2800 6.8 15 25.3 2x2800 13.6 30 50.6 Limits of application The Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve has a broad range of application. However, optimum operation can only be guaranteed when the following operational conditions are provided (with absolute pressures p abs in bar): Pressure ratio X = Δp/p 1 0.1 Water pressure (p 3) at the connecting flange (5.5): p 3 p 2 + 0.15. p 1 The water pressure upstream of the control valve (4) illustrated in Fig. 1 must be higher than p 3. The pressure must be selected carefully so that efficient control of the supplied water is ensured over the entire operating range. The steam converter can only be used when the superheated steam and the spray water contain no or only small-sized suspended matter. For further details, refer to the Information Sheet T 8250 EN. Selection and sizing of the steam converter The steam converters require particularly careful sizing. SAMSON therefore assumes the final sizing of the valves. 1. The ideal K v coefficient is calculated acc. to IEC 60534. 2. The nominal size and K vs coefficient are selected acc. to Table 3. 3. The permissible differential pressure Δp is determined and the suitable actuator selected acc. to Tables 4a to 5b. 4. The steam converters are selected considering material, pressure and temperature acc. to Tables 1 and 2, and also acc. to the associated pressure-temperature diagram (see T 8000-2 EN). 400 1100 2800 4.7 10.4 17.5 2x2800 9.4 20.8 35 Data Sheet T 8254 EN 2008-02 209

Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with metal-seated plug balanced by PTFE ring Without metal bellows seal Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. at rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 5a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) 700 1400 2800 2x2800 0.4 to 2.0 0.8 to 2.4 0.6 to 3.0 1.2 to 3.6 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.5 to 2.5 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 0.6 to 3.0 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 5b "Valve OPEN" 0.4 to 2.0 (0.4 to 1.2) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 0.2 bar 2.4 4.0 6.0 DN 100 150 Kvs 47 150 75 150 250 200 to 300 120 190 Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 700 57.4 155 106 252 57.4 400 400 1400 (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) 700 18.4 58.3 38.4 98.3 18.4 178 378 1400 (297) (378) (218) (400) (400) 700 13.9 53.9 33.9 93.8 13.9 173 373 1400 (293) (373) (213) (400) (400) 1400 18 49.2 25.8 64.8 18 143 298 2800 (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) (400) 200 to 400 250 to 400 300 400 270 480 750 1400 15.8 47 23.6 62.6 15.8 140 296 2800 (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (400) 1400 11.4 42.6 19.2 58.2 11.4 136 292 2800 (230) (292) (355) (167) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) (400) 2800 38.3 100 53.9 132 69.4 163 38.3 288 400 2x2800 76.6 200 107.8 264 138.8 326 76.6 400 400 Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type 3284-1 in standard version Valve size DN 100 150 200 250 300 400 Length L PN 10 to 40 350 480 600 730 850 1100 PN 63 to 160 430 550 650 775 900 1150 H1 700 cm 2 482 732 805 with actuator 1400 cm 2 537 732 805 860 2800 cm 2 722 817 890 1094 1290 1290 H2 PN 10 to 40 207 288 390 410 480 560 PN 63 to 160 249 338 390 410 480 650 Actuator cm 2 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Diaphragm D 390 530 770 H 196 287 617 1134 H3 1) 190 610 648 Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) a2 (Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) 1) Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly 210 Data Sheet T 8254 EN 2008-02

Table 7 Weights for Type 3284 in standard version Valve size DN 100 150 200 250 300 400 Valve without PN 16 to 40 115 260 500 830 1100 1950 actuator (approx. kg) PN 63 to 160 170 375 On request Actuator cm 2 700 1400 2800 2 x 2800 Type 3271 (approx. kg) Without - 22 70 450 950 With handwheel 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T 8310-2 EN Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3284 in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve size DN 100 150 200 250 300 400 Height H4 with actuator Weight (kg) w/o actuator for 700 cm 2 752 1083 1365 1400 cm 2 807 1083 1365 1485 2800 cm 2 992 1168 1450 1719 1810 1870 PN 16 to 40 125 280 PN 63 to160 175 410 On request H3 ØD a H H4 H1 H6 H2 Type 3284-1 Type 3284-1 with insulating section Dimensions H6 and L3 for spray water connection on request Please submit the following details on ordering Steam converter Type 3284 Globe Valve Nominal size DN... Nominal pressure PN... Body material As indicated in Table 2 Type of connection Flanges or welding ends Plug Standard or balanced Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Max. and min. flow rate of the superheated and desuperheated steam p 1 and t 1 as well as p 2 and t 2 in kg/h or t/h Steam temperature upstream and downstream of the valve Pressure and temperature of spray water upstream of the valve t 1 t 2 p 3 and t 3 Actuator Type 3271 Effective actuator area... cm 2 Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" or "Valve OPEN" Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8254 EN 2008-02 211

W&T Series Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C3 Application Steam-converting valve for power stations and industrial plants Inlet: DN 80 to 500 NPS 3 to 20 PN 16 to 630 Class 150 to 2500 (4500) Outlet: DN 100 to 1600 NPS 4 to 64 PN 16 to 100 Class 150 to 900 Temperatures: up to 560 C up to 1040 F Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (refer to T 8310-1/-2 EN) Valve body made of Forged steel 1.0460 (A105) Heat-resisting forged steel 1.5415, 1.7335 (A 182 F12) or 1.7380 (A 182 F22) Special features Perforated plug with controlled pressure reduction in two or more stages One or more attenuation plates providing uncontrolled pressure reduction Integrated atomizing steam cooler Welding ends Angle-style valve body Pure graphite packing Versions Standard version Angle valve body with welding ends for steam temperatures up to 560 C (1040 F) Inlet: nominal sizes DN 80 to 500 (NPS 3 to 20), nominal pressures PN 16 to 630 (Class 150 to 2500 (4500)) Outlet: nominal sizes DN 100 to 1600 (NPS 4 to 64), nominal pressures PN 16 to 100 (Class 150 to 900) Further versions On request Pressure-balanced plug Electric actuator Hydraulic actuator Temperatures >560 C (>1040 F) Fig. 1 Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Data Sheet T 9934 EN 2008-02 213

Principle of operation When the perforated plug leaves its seat, the steam inlet bores of the first controlled stage are opened, and steam is admitted into the central chamber. From there, it passes into the atomizing steam cooler through bores at the bottom of the chamber. As the perforated cylinder has only moved a short distance (<20 % of the total travel), the bores for the second stage pressure drop are not yet released. This ensures that adequate steam always flows to the atomizing steam cooler, eliminating the risk of water droplets inadvertently being injected into the system. As the perforated plug continues to lift, more steam inlet bores are released in a pattern corresponding to the desired opening characteristic. Once the perforated plug has lifted more than 20 %, the bores for the second controlled stage are opened, allowing steam to flow from the central chamber through the second stage bores, and into the throttling cylinder. This pressure reduced steam flows through the uncontrolled perforated attenuation plates for further pressure reduction, and continues downstream to the temperature sensor. When the steam comes into contact with the temperature sensor, a signal is sent to the spray water control valve, opening the valve and admitting spray water into the steam cooler. This spray water is atomized by the kinetic energy of the steam, which is continuously flowing through the cooler. The atomized water is instantly vaporized by the superheated steam. The flow from the second controlled stage passes through the perforated attenuation plates, and comes in contact with the flow from the atomizing steam cooler. Here the two flows mix, ensuring total evaporation of the spray water. This completes both the pressure and temperature reduction. The perforated attenuation plates installed after the second controlled stage, provide additional pressure drop, noise reduction, and lower outlet velocity. Fig. 2 Cutaway of the Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve Figures 2 and 3 show possible versions of the Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve. Fig. 3 Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve 214 Data Sheet T 9934 EN 2008-02

Table 1 Technical data Inlet Outlet Nominal size DN 80 to 500 NPS 3 to 20 DN 100 to 1600 NPS 4 to 64 Materials 1.0460/A 105 1.5415 1.7335/A 182 F12 1.7380/A 182 F22 End connection Welding ends in all versions Min. pressure ratio 1) p2 p1 Three stages: <0.25 Four stages: <0.15 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 630 Class 150 to 2500 (4500) PN 16 to 100 Class 150 to 900 Seat-plug seal Characteristic Pressure reduction Metal sealing Leakage class IV Equal percentage or linear Perforated plug provides controlled pressure reduction in two stages Additionally, one or two attenuation plates provide uncontrolled pressure reduction Rangeability 1 : 50 1) For different pressure ratios, contact SAMSON. Table 2 Materials Standard version Inlet Outlet Nominal pressure PN 16 to 630 Class 150 to 2500 (4500) PN 16 to 100 Class 150 to 900 Body 1.0460/A 105 1.5415 1.7335/A 182 F12 1.7380/A 182 F22 Seat and plug 1.4122 Guide bushing 1.7380 Packing Body gasket Pure graphite Camprofile (serrated) gasket Table 3 K vs and C v coefficients available K vs 23 30.5 52 85.5 112 161 252 374 441 580 673 C v 26.9 35.7 60.8 100 131 188 294.8 437.6 516 678 787 Seat Ø mm 45 55 65 80 90 110 135 160 180 230 260 Travel mm 35 40 50 60 75 75 100 120 120 150 150 Flow cross-section First stage Second stage cm² 8 10.5 18 29.5 38.5 55.5 87 129 152 200 232 in² 1.24 1.63 2.79 4.60 5.97 8.60 13.48 19.99 23.55 30.99 35.95 cm² 14 18 32.5 52 68 97 152 225 268 350 405 in² 2.17 2.79 5.04 8.06 10.54 15.03 23.55 34.86 41.52 54.23 62.75 Data Sheet T 9934 EN 2008-02 215

Table 4 Dimensions for Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve (in mm and inch) K vs C v Seat Ø in mm Inlet: DN E DN NPS A Outlet: DN A DN NPS B C D E Spray water Ø 200 8 225 mm/9 23 26.9 45 50 2 65 2½ 80 3 100 4 225 mm/9 250 10 300 12 350 14 400 16 475 mm/19 350 mm 13.78 300 mm/12 325 mm/13 750 mm 29.53 25 mm 1 200 8 225 mm/9 30.5 35.7 55 65 2½ 80 3 100 4 250 mm/10 250 10 300 12 350 14 400 16 475 mm/19 350 mm 13.78 300 mm/12 325 mm/13 885 mm 34.84 25 mm 1 52 60.8 65 80 3 100 4 125 5 150 6 250 mm/10 275 mm/11 300 12 350 14 400 16 550 mm/22 400 mm 15.75 325 mm/13 350 mm/14 500 20 375 mm/15 900 mm 35.43 40 mm 1½ 85.5 100 80 80 3 100 4 125 5 250 mm/10 150 6 275 mm/11 300 12 350 14 400 16 575 mm/23 425 mm 16.73 325 mm/13 350 mm/14 500 20 375 mm/15 900 mm 35.43 40 mm 1½ 112 131 90 100 4 125 5 275 mm/11 150 6 300 mm/12 300 12 325 mm/13 350 14 400 16 575 mm/23 425 mm 350 mm/14 16.73 500 20 400 mm/16 600 24 450 mm/18 1150 mm 45.28 40 mm 1½ 161 188 110 125 5 150 6 200 8 375 mm/15 300 12 350 14 400 16 600 mm/24 450 mm 17.72 325 mm/13 350 mm/14 500 20 650 mm/26 500 mm/19.69 400 mm/16 600 24 700 mm/28 525 mm/20.67 475 mm/19 1100 mm 43.31 40 mm 1½ 700 28 500 mm/20 800 mm/32 625 mm/24.61 800 32 525 mm/21 400 16 650 mm/26 525 mm/20.67 350 mm/14 252 294.8 135 150 6 200 8 250 10 400 mm/16 425 mm/17 450 mm/18 500 20 400 mm/16 750 mm/30 550 mm/21.65 600 24 450 mm/18 700 28 800 mm/32 600 mm/23.62 500 mm/20 800 32 850 mm/34 650 mm/25.59 550 mm/22 1700 mm 66.93 50 mm 2 900 36 900 mm/36 700 mm/27.56 575 mm/23 1000 40 1000 mm/40 750 mm/29.53 600 mm/24 216 Data Sheet T 9934 EN 2008-02

K vs C v Seat Ø in mm Inlet: DN E DN NPS A Outlet: DN A DN NPS B C D E Spray water Ø 400 16 750 mm/30 575 mm/22.64 350 mm/14 500 20 775 mm/31 600 mm/23.62 400 mm/16 374 437.6 160 200 8 250 10 300 12 500 mm/20 525 mm/21 550 mm/22 600 24 825 mm/33 625 mm/24.61 450 mm/18 700 28 850 mm/34 650 mm/25.59 500 mm/20 800 32 875 mm/35 675 mm/26.57 550 mm/22 1850 mm 72.83 50 mm 2 900 36 900 mm/36 700 mm/27.56 575 mm/23 1000 40 1000 mm/40 750 mm/29.53 600 mm/24 500 20 850 mm/34 400 mm/16 675 mm/26.57 600 24 875 mm/35 450 mm/18 441 516 180 200 8 250 10 300 12 525 mm/21 550 mm/22 575 mm/23 700 28 900 mm/36 700 mm/27.56 500 mm/20 800 32 950 mm/38 550 mm/22 775 mm/30.51 900 36 1000 mm/40 575 mm/23 2100 mm 82.68 65 mm 2½ 1000 40 1050 mm/42 800 mm/31.50 600 mm/24 600 24 925 mm/37 750 mm/29.53 450 mm/18 580 678 230 300 12 400 16 500 20 550 mm/22 575 mm/23 625 mm/25 700 28 500 mm/20 950 mm/38 775 mm/30.51 800 32 550 mm/22 900 36 1025 mm/41 575 mm/23 800 mm/31.50 1000 40 1050 mm/42 600 mm/24 2500 mm 98.43 65 mm 2½ 1100 44 1075 mm/43 825 mm/32.48 650 mm/26 600 24 975 mm/39 800 mm/31.50 450 mm/18 673 787 260 300 12 400 16 500 20 575 mm/23 600 mm/24 650 mm/26 700 28 500 mm/20 1000 mm/40 825 mm/32.48 800 32 550 mm/22 900 36 1075 mm/43 575 mm/23 850 mm/33.46 1000 40 1100 mm/44 600 mm/24 2500 mm 98.43 65 mm 2½ 1100 44 1125 mm/45 875 mm/34.45 650 mm/26 Data Sheet T 9934 EN 2008-02 217

C DNE D A DNA Fig. 4 Dimension diagram of Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve with Type 3271Pneumatic Actuator E B Ordering text Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C3 Body material acc. to Table 3 End connection welding ends Inlet: nominal size DN... nominal pressure PN... Outlet: nominal size DN... nominal pressure PN... Perforated attenuation plates... pieces Perforated plug... stages standard or pressure-balanced plug Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 (T 8310-1 EN or T 8310-2 EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or OPEN Flow rate in kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating status Pressure p 1 in bar absolute pressure p abs p 2 in bar absolute pressure p abs at minimum, standard or maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner, position transmitter, limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 218 Data Sheet T 9934 EN 2008-02

Type 994-0001 Water Bath Desuperheater for desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature General Water bath desuperheaters are used if processes have to be heated with saturated steam, but where only superheated steam is available which must be desuperheated to saturated steam temperature. This is not possible with steam converting valves or injection desuperheaters, since it is possible to desuperheat only down to approx. 5 C above saturated steam temperature with these. If the pressure of the available steam is too high or an adjustable saturated steam pressure is required, the water bath desuperheater can be designed in addition with pressure control. Processes which are heated with saturated steam frequently require only small quantities of steam, but with delivery fluctuations between 0 and 100 %. Here the water bath desuperheater is ideally suitable, since it guarantees perfect desuperheating over the entire load range. Applications in which the product has to be heated directly with saturated steam are for example: Agers and decatizing vessels in the textile industry Pasteurizers in the food industry Sterilizers in the chemical industry Steam boxes in the paper industry Applications in which the products have to be heated through heat exchanger surfaces where overheating of the product must be surely avoided are for example: Heat exchangers for pasteurizers and sterilizers in the food industry Heating systems for dry rolls in the paper industry Heating systems for reaction vessels and pipelines in the chemical industry The Type 994-0001 water bath desuperheater has the following features: Desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature Pressure reduction of superheated steam Control range 0... 100 % Operating overpressure max. 11 bar, higher pressure on request Saturated steam pressure max. 11 bar, higher pressure on request Saturated steam temperature max. 187 C Steam throughput max. 40 t/h, depending on the saturated steam pressure Pressure vessel made from H II (mat. no. 1.0425) or CrNiTi (mat. no. 1.4541) Pressure vessel with German Technical Inspectorate Certificate, other certificates on request Version with fastening supports Version with liquid level control Version with liquid level control and pressure control Version with liquid level control, pressure control and process temperature control Version as complete system, ready for connection assembled in a frame Construction The Type 994-0001 water bath desuperheater consists of a pressure vessel [1], which is protected against thermal losses with an insulation [2]. The superheated steam flows from above through a pipe [7] into the interior of a flow divider [4], which is com- Fig. 1 Construction 6 5 4 3 Fig. 2 Superheated steam Cooling water 7 Saturated steam 8 Overflow pletly surrounded by cooling water. The cooling water is fed in from below through a pipe [3] into the pressure vessel [1]. The steam arising bubbles out from the flow divider [4] at the water surface and escapes as saturated steam. The saturated steam is carried out from the pressure vessel [1] through a pipe [8]. The liquid level of the cooling water is monitored with two limit switches [5] and [6]. An overflow [9] is fitted above the maximum liquid level in order to avoid overfilling of the pressure vessel [1] on failure of the liquid level control system. 9 1 2 Data Sheet B 016 EN 2007-03 219

Operation Water bath desuperheater with liquid level control The superheated steam is introduced into the cooling water. In this case the superheating heat is transferred into the cooling water which is converted into saturated steam when the boiling temperature is reached. The evaporated portion is replaced by cooling water with a liquid level control system. On reaching the minimum liquid level, the condensate valve [1.4] is opened via a limit switch [1.3] and closed when the maximum liquid level is reached. On failure of the liquid level control system the cooling water is diverted through a condensate diverter [1.6]. Pressure regulation Saturated steam pressure and saturated steam temperature are associated with one another physically. In the version with pressure regulation, the saturated steam pressure is converted into a measurement signal which is conducted to a pressure controller [2.3] through a pressure transmitter [2.2]. The output signal of the pressure controller [2.3] operates the steam pressure control valve [2.5] through a positioner [2.4]. Thus the pressure of the superheated steam can be reduced and cooled to desuperheated steam temperature. Process temperature control In the version with process temperature control the measurement signal of a temperature sensor [3.1] is conducted to a temperature controller [3.2], the output signal of which operates the temperature control valve [3.4] through a positioner [3.3]. In this case the pressure drop at the temperature control valve [3.4] must be kept low so that the saturated steam temperature is as close as possible to the load temperature to be controlled. Safety equipment The operating pressure in the pressure vessel [1.1] of the water bath desuperheater is limited to the permissible value by means of a safety valve [2.6.3]. A safety pressure limiter [2.7.1] and a safety temperature limiter [2.7.2] ensure that the pressure and temperature at the saturated steam outlet do not exceed the permissible values. Whenever the pressure and temperature reach the respective limit values, the steam pressure control valve [2.5] is closed via a solenoid valve [2.7.3]. Operating diagram 2.7.3 P 2.6.4 P 2.4 2.6.2 2.6.3 PIC 2.3 3.2 TIC Superheated steam 2.6.1 2.5 2.6.5 T 2.7.5 2.7.4 T P 2.7.2 2.7.1 STB SDB 2.2 P 1.1 2.1 1.3 1.2 Saturated steam 3.4 3.3 1.6 2.7.6 3.1 T 1.7.4 P 1.7.2 1.7.1 Overflow 1.7.3 Process P 4 Cooling water 1.5 1.4 Drain Auxiliary energy Fig. 3 220 Data Sheet B 016 EN 2007-03

Versions and ordering data Versions (Fig. 3) 1. Water bath desuperheater with liquid level control 1.1 Pressure vessel made from material H II (mat. no. 1.0425) CrNiTi (mat. no. 1.4541) 1.2 Liquid level meter 1.3 Limit switch 1.4 Condensate valve 1.5 Strainer 1.6 Condensate diverter 1.7 In addition for the cooling water feed 1.7.1 Non-return valve 1.7.2 Manual shut-off valve inlet 1.7.3 Manual shut-off valve emptying 1.7.4 Pressure gauge 2. Pressure regulation with without 2.1 High pressure shut-off valve 2.2 Pressure transmitter 2.3 Pressure controller 2.4 Positioner 2.5 Steam pressure control valve 2.6 In addition for the steam inlet 2.6.1 Strainer 2.6.2 Manual shut-off valve 2.6.3 Safety valve 2.6.4 Pressure gauge 2.6.5 Thermometer 2.7 In addition for the steam outlet 2.7.1 Safety pressure limiter 2.7.2 Safety temperature limiter 2.7.3 Solenoid valve (in addition for 2.7.1 or 2.7.2) 2.7.4 Pressure gauge 2.7.5 Thermometer 2.7.6 Condensate diverter Operating data Superheated steam p1 min =... bar abs p1 max =... bar abs t1 min =... C t1 max =... C Saturated steam p2 min =... bar abs q m min =... kg/h p2 max =... bar abs q m max =... kg/h Cooling water Drinking water Boiler feed water Boiler feed water, desalinated... p3 min =... bar abs p3 max =... bar abs t3 min =... C t3 max =... C Instrumentation pneumatic electropneumatic electronic, with electrical servo drives Auxiliary energy Instrument air U =... V p =... bar f =... Hz 3. Process temperature control with without 3.1 Temperature sensor 3.2 Temperature controller 3.3 Positioner 3.4 Temperature control valve 4. Service unit with without 5. Control cabinet with without 6. Frame with without 7. Insulation for pressure vessel with without Data Sheet B 016 EN 2007-03 221

Installation examples Heating agers in the textile industry (Fig. 4) P Statement of the problem An ager for coloured textile webs has to be heated with steam in a temperature range of 100 to 110 C. The steam may only be slightly overheated in order to avoid stains forming on the textile webs at the entry places into the ager. In addition, the steam must be dry so that no water stains can occcur. Superheated steam STB SDB PIC P Solution of the problem Superheated steam is reduced in pressure and desuperheated to saturated steam temperature in a water bath desuperheater with liquid level control and electropneumatic pressure regulation. The cooling water is fed into the pressure vessel from a separate water network. The temperature of the ager is kept constant even on load changes (e. g. changing running speeds or changing specific weight of the textile webs) with a a process temperature control. The maximum temperature of the ager is limited by the set saturated steam pressure. In order to avoid overheating of the ager in the case of the fault, the temperature control valve is designed for a slight pressure drop so that the saturated steam temperature is as close as possible to the ager temperature to be controlled. The components of the water bath desuperheater are installed in a frame ready for connection as complete system. Cooling water Overflow Drain Saturated steam Heating vessels and pipelines in the chemical industry (Fig. 5) Statement of the problem The vessel and the pipelines of a SO 3 - conditioning plant have to be heated with steam and the heating temperature must be kept within tight limits. The condensate arising on heating should be used as cooling medium. Fig. 4: Heating agers Solution of the problem Superheated steam is reduced in pressure and desuperheated to saturated steam temperature in a water bath desuperheater with liquid level control and electropneumatic pressure regulation. The hot condensate arising on heating the vessel and the pipelines is conduced into a pressureless collecting vessel and cooled down by the ambient air. Excess condensate is delivered to the condensate network through an overflow. The flash steam arising on condensate diversion is diverted over the roof. The cooled condensate is fed into the pressure vessel of the water bath desuperheater as cooling medium using cooling water pressure elevating pumps. Thus the collecting vessel has to be filled with cooling water only before the first time the plant is started up. A safety pressure limiter is installed at the steam inlet and a safety limiter at the steam outlet to protect the plant. The cooling water pressure elevating pumps are equipped with dry running protection and automatic fault switchover. The components of the water bath desuperheater are installed in a frame ready for connection as complete system. Cooling water PI TI LC SHL LI S SAL SB S SAL Superheated steam SAL M PIC SB S SAL Saturated steam TI SAHL (Subject to modification) Fig. 5: Heating vessels and pipelines 222 Data Sheet B 016 EN 2007-03

Actuators Pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators for control valves and butterfly valves Diaphragm actuators with effective areas up to 2800 cm 2 Electric actuators with nominal thrusts up to 87 kn Electrohydraulic linear actuators with nominal thrusts up to 7.3 kn Hand-operated actuators Information Sheet T 8300 EN 2005-03 223

Selection and application Actuators convert the instrument control signal supplied by an automation device (controller, control station, process control system) into a linear or rotary motion used to position the final control element - e.g., the valve plug of a control valve - in direct proportion to the control signal received. With control valves, this converted motion may be either a linear, upward or downward motion. For butterfly valves, ball valves or rotary plug valves, this may be a rotary motion up to 70 opening angle for control operation. For on-off (two-position) operation, this may be a rotary motion up to 90. The actuator together with the valve constitute the complete control valve assembly, commonly referred to as the control valve. To match system requirements, the actuators can be equipped with a wide range of transfer elements, e.g. positioners, converters, solenoid valves, position transmitters and limit switches. For details on selecting the additional equipment, see Information Sheet T 8350 EN. Application and instrumentation Pneumatic actuators are field-proven, require little maintenance, and are inexpensive devices intended for pneumatic or electropneumatic instrumentation. Accessories, such as positioners or converters, also act as servo-boosters because they convert the low-volume output signal y (0.2 to 1 bar) received from a controller into a powerful signal pressure p st up to 6 bar (90 psi). Electric and electrohydraulic actuators are primarily used in applications where compressed air is not available. A series of modules can also be added to the actuators, permitting them to be customized to specific control tasks. A Pneumatic B Electropneumatic C Electric instrumentation instrumentation instrumentation A1 B1 C1 C3 Instrumentation Instrumentation Instrumentation Electrohydraulic actuator without a positioner with an i/p converter with an AC motor with a three-point stepping Signal range 0.2... 1 bar Signal press. p st < 6 bar 230 V ~ input signal (3... 15 psi) (90 psi) p st 1 0.2 to 1 bar 3 to 15 psi 2 4 to 20 ma y 8 4 A2 B2 C2 C4 Instrumentation Instrumentation Instrumentation Electrohydraulic actuator with a pneumatic positioner with an i/p positioner with a reversing contactor with an electric analog Signal pressure p st < 6 bar Signal pressure p st < 6 bar and three-phase AC motor control signal (90 psi) (90 psi) 380 V ~ 1 0.2 to 1 bar 4 to 20 ma 3 to 15 psi y 4 to 20 ma Also possible with fieldbus control Legend for Figs. A1 to C4 1 Pneumatic controller 3 Electric controller or automation 5 Electric control valve 8 i/p converter 2 Electric controller or automation system with three-point output 6 Electrohydraulic control valve 9 i/p positioner system with ma output 4 Pneumatic control valve 7 Pneumatic positioner 10 Electric positioner 11 Reversing contactor 224 Information Sheet T 8300 EN 2005-03

Pneumatic actuators Pneumatic actuators are diaphragm actuators, equipped with a rolling diaphragm and internal compression springs. They provide the following advantages: Designed for signal pressures up to 6 bar (90 psi) Low overall height Powerful actuator thrusts and fast transit times Minimum friction Various bench ranges No special tools required to change the bench range or reverse the actuator action Fail-safe action Depending on the version, actuators are equipped with two different fail-safe actions that become effective when the pressure acting on the actuator diaphragm is reduced or the air supply fails: Actuator stem extends (marked FA on the actuator) The spring force extends the actuator stem to the lower end position. Actuator stem retracts (marked FE on the actuator) The spring force retracts the actuator stem. Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Figs. 1 and 2) Designed for rated travels from 7.5 to 120 mm and effective diaphragm areas of 60, 80, 120, 240, 350, 700, 1400 and 2800 cm 2. Tandem actuators with twin diaphragms have a total effective area of 2 x 2800 cm 2. Optional version equipped with handwheel (120 cm 2 effective area and larger). Top-mounted handwheel with effective diaphragm areas of 120 to 700 cm 2 ( Fig. 1); side-mounted handwheel with effective diaphragm areas of 1400 to 2800 cm 2. See Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for details. Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Fig. 3) Designed for integral positioner attachment. The positioner is completely protected and fastened to the yoke attached to the bottom diaphragm case. Effective diaphragm areas of 120, 240, 350 or 700 cm 2. Rated travels from 7.5 to 30 mm. Optionally with top-mounted handwheel. See Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN for details. Type 3204-1 and Type 3204-7 Pneumatic Actuators with Rotary Lever (Fig. 4) Pneumatic diaphragm actuators for final control elements with rotary closure members, especially designed for use with butterfly valves and shutters. Diaphragm areas of 350 or 700 cm 2. Optional handwheel. Type 3204-7 is designed for integral positioner attachment. See Data Sheet T 8316 EN for details. Fig. 2 Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator on Type 241 Globe Valve Fig. 4 Type 3204-1 Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 1 Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with top-mounted handwheel on Type 241 Globe Valve Fig. 3 Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator on Type 241 Globe Valve Fig. 5 Type 3278 Rotary Actuator with Type 3331 Butterfly Valve and attached Type 3767 Positioner Type 3278 Pneumatic Rotary Actuator (Fig. 5) Single-acting rotary actuator with spring return mechanism used with butterfly valves and other rotary valves. Nominal opening angle 70 or 90. Effective diaphragm areas of 160 or 320 cm 2. Optional handwheel. See Data Sheet T 8321 EN for details. Pfeiffer Type BR 31a Pneumatic Rotary Actuator (Fig. 6) Single- or double-acting piston actuator for use with rotary valves. Maximum opening angle 90. Optional manual override. For throttling or on-off services. See Data Sheet T 9929 EN for details. Fig. 6 Pfeiffer Type BR 31a Rotary Actuator Information Sheet T 8300 EN 2005-03 225

Electrohydraulic and electric actuators Type 3274-11 to -23 Electrohydraulic Linear Actuators (Fig. 7) Designed for nominal thrusts up to 7.3 kn and rated travels of 15 or 30 mm. Transit times comprise 60 s or faster for connection to threepoint stepping controllers. Also with electric positioner for analog control signals from 4 (0) to 20 ma or 0 (2) to 10 V. Optional electrical or mechanical override. Versions available with fail-safe function. See Data Sheet T 8340 EN for details. Fig. 7 Type 3274-... Electrohydraulic Linear Actuator with mechanical override Type SAM Electric Actuators (Fig. 8) Self-locking, linear motion actuators with reversible AC or three-phase AC motor for nominal thrusts from 2 to 25 kn and rated travels from 15 to 120 mm. Transit times 30 s and faster for connection to three-point stepping controllers. Also with electric positioner for analog control signals from 4 (0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V. Standard versions contain a mechanical override and two torque-dependent/three travel-dependent limit switches. See Data Sheet T 8330 EN for details. Electric actuators of other manufacturers, such as AUMA, available on request. Fig. 8 Type 3241-2 Electric Control Valve with Type SAM Electric Actuator Type 3374 Electric Actuator (Fig. 9) Electric actuator for industrial plants as well as heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems. Optionally with or without fail-safe function. Additional version with digital positioner. See Data Sheet T 8331 EN for details. Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator (Fig. 10) Designed for attachment to final control elements used as manual control valves. Especially designed for Series 240, 250 and 260 Control Valves. Rated travels of 15 and 30 mm. Nominal thrusts up to 32 kn. See Data Sheet T 8312 EN for details. Fig. 9 Type 3374 Electric Actuator Specifications subject to change without notice. Fig. 10 Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator on Type 3241 Globe Valve 226 Information Sheet T 8300 EN 2005-03

Pneumatic Actuators up to 700 cm² Type 3271 and Type 3277 for integral positioner attachment Application Linear actuator for attachment to final control elements, particularly suitable for Series 240, 250, 280 Control Valves and Type 3510 Micro-flow Valves Diaphragm area 60 to 700 cm² Rated travel 7.5 to 30 mm The Types 3271 and 3277 Pneumatic Actuators are diaphragm actuators equipped with a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Special features Low overall height Powerful thrust at high response speed Low friction Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression No special tools required to change the bench range and to reverse the actuator action (also in version with handwheel) Designed for supply pressures up to 6 bar Continuous operation at temperatures from 35 to +90 C Direct attachment of accessories on additional yoke for Type 3277 Actuator with concealed travel pick-off (Fig. 2) Fig. 1 Type 3271 Fig. 2 Type 3277 Versions Type 3271 Diaphragm areas 80, 240, 350, 700 cm² (Fig. 1), optional stainless steel version (1.4301) Type 3277 Diaphragm area 240, 350, or 700 cm² for direct attachment of accessories (Fig. 2), optional stainless steel version (1.4301) Type 3271-52 Diaphragm area 60 cm², die-cast aluminum body, particularly for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve (Fig. 3 and Data Sheet T 8091 EN) Type 3271-5 Diaphragm area 120 cm², die-cast aluminum body (Fig. 4), optionally with additional handwheel (Fig. 11a) Type 3277-5 Diaphragm area 120 cm², die-cast aluminum body for direct attachment of accessories (Fig. 9), optionally with additional handwheel (Figs. 5 and 11b) Types 3271 or 3277 Additional handwheel for pneumatic actuators with diaphragm areas of 240, 350, or 700 cm² (Fig. 6 and Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type 3271 Mechanical travel stop (sectional drawing 12), min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable in versions with 240, 350, or 700 cm² Type 3271/7 Fire-Lock version (Fig. 13) fail-safe action in case of fire, diaphragm areas of 240, 350, 700 cm 2 Further versions For other process media (e.g. water or oxygen) Details available on request Fig. 3 Type 3271-52 Fig. 5 Type 3277-5 with additional handwheel Fig. 4 Type 3271-5 Fig. 6 Type 3271 with additional handwheel For high temperatures up to 120 C On request For low temperatures down to 40 C On request Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN 2005-04 227

Principle of operation The signal pressure p st generates a force F=p st A on the diaphragm area A (2). This force is balanced by the actuator springs (4). Taking into account the rated travel, the number of springs and their compression determine the bench range. The travel H is proportional to the signal pressure p st. The operating direction of the actuator stem (7) depends on the arrangement of the springs and the signal pressure connection (1). The stem connector (8) connects the actuator stem (7) with the plug stem (10) of the valve. The adjustable mechanical travel stop (Fig. 12) is suitable for actuators made of sheet steel with effective diaphragm areas of 240, 350, or 700 cm². Using the limit stop, the actuator travel can be limited by up to 50 % in both directions (actuator stem extends or retracts ) and permanently adjusted. A special version with one-sided travel stop for actuators with an effective diaphragm area of 120 cm² is available. 5 1 2 4 7 11 6 Actuators are available with the following fail-safe actions: Actuator stem extends (FA) The springs cause the actuator stem to move to the lower end position (sectional drawings, right) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The springs cause the actuator stem to retract (sectional drawings, left) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Fig. 9 Type 3277-5 for direct attachment of accessories 23 18 1 3 2 5 1 12 6 3 4 5 3 6 9 10 2 1 7 8 2 4 5 3 6 9 10 5 2 1 7 8 Fig. 7 Type 3271 (right: with additional springs) 1 3 Fig. 10 Type 3271 with additional handwheel 2 4 7 11 6 8 5 1 Legend 1 Signal pressure connection 2 Diaphragm 3 Vent 4 Springs 5 Diaphragm cases 6 Annular nut 7 Actuator stem 8 Stem connector 9 Coupling nut 10 Plug stem 11 Yoke 12 Actuator stem to handwheel 14 Cap 15 Nut 16 Spindle 17 Plain bearing 18 Lock nut 23 Handwheel Fig. 8 Type 3277 for direct attachment of accessories 228 Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN 2005-04

1 2 14 18 16 15 17 3 5 4 5 3 6 9 2 1 7 8 10 Fig. 12 Type 3271 with adjustable travel stop Figs. 11a, 11b Type 3271-5 and Type 3277-5, fail-safe action stem extends, both with additional handwheel Fig. 13 Fire-Lock version, in fail-safe position (right) Table 1a Technical data for Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Version Type 3271 Type 3271 Stainless steel Type 3277 Type 3277 Stainless steel Type 3271-52 for micro valve Type 3271-5 Type 3277-5 Diaphragm area cm² 80 240 350 700 240 350 700 60 120 Max. supply pressure 6 bar See restrictions in on/off service on page 232 Permissible temperatures in continuous operation 35 to 90 C made of standard material NBR 40 to 120 C made of special material EPDM, for air free of oil and grease and actuator versions with 240, 350, and 700 cm² Up to 80 C in Fire-Lock version (for 240, 350, and 700 cm²) 35 to 80 C 35 to 90 C Materials Rolling diaphragm NBR (nitrile rubber) with fabric insert NBR with fabric insert EPDM with fabric insert Actuator stem 1.4305 1.4305/1.4571 1.4305 Actuator stem sealing NBR NBR NBR EPDM Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, Sheet steel, Stainless steel Stainless steel Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish powder-varnish 1.4301 1.4301 powder-varnish coated coated coated Table 1b Technical data for additional handwheel Version for actuator Type 3271-5 Type 3277-5 Type 3271 Type 3277 Diaphragm area 240 cm², 350 cm² 120 cm² 700 cm² (only for initial spring value 2.1 bar) Materials Body Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish coated St 37-2, powder-varnish coated Spindle 1.4305 Stainless steel 1.4104 Handwheel Aluminum, powder-varnish coated Aluminum Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN 2005-04 229

Table 2 Bench ranges for pneumatic actuators up to 700 cm² Effective diaphragm area [cm²] Rated travel [mm] Travel volume at rated travel [dm³] Dead volume [dm³] 1) 2) Max. travel [mm] Bench range [bar] (signal pressure range at rated travel) Additionally possible spring compression [%] Operating range with spring compression [bar] Number of springs Spring force at 0 mm travel [kn] 1) Spring force at rated travel [kn] Thrust [kn] at rated travel and a supply pressure [bar] of 1.4 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 0.2...1.0 2 0.12 0.6 0.24 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 60 7.5 0.09 0.1 10.5 0.4...2.0 4 0.24 1.2 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 0 1.4...2.3 3) 4 0.84 1.38 1.02 1.62 2.22 2.1...3.3 3) 8 1.26 1.98 0.42 1.02 1.62 0.2...1.0 0.3...1.1 3 0.16 0.8 0.32 0.8 1.6 2.4 3.2 4 80 15 0.12 0.13 16 0.4...2.0 12.5 0.6...2.2 6 0.32 1.6 0.8 1.6 2.4 3.2 0.6...3.0 0.9...3.3 12 0.48 2.4 0.8 1.6 2.4 0.4...0.8 3 0.48 0.96 0.72 1.44 2.64 3.84 5.04 6.24 120 7.5 0.09 0.12 9 Version for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve 0.8...1.6 6 0.96 1.92 0.48 1.68 2.88 4.08 5.28 0 1.7...2.1 3) 1.7...2.1 6 2.04 2.52 1.08 2.28 3.48 4.68 2.4...3.0 3) 2.4...3.0 12 2.88 3.6 1.2 2.4 3.6 120 15 0.2 0.10 16 (17) 15 (17) 0.2...1.0 0.3...1.1 3 0.24 1.2 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 6 12.5 0.4...2.0 0.6...2.2 6 0.48 2.4 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 1.4...2.3 3) 1.4...2.3 6 1.68 2.76 0.84 2.04 3.24 4.44 0 2.1...3.3 3) 2.1...3.3 12 2.52 3.96 0.84 2.04 3.24 0.2...1.0 0.3...1.1 3 0.48 2.4 0.96 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 240 15 0.36 0.38 17 0.4...2.0 12.5 0.6...2.2 6 0.96 4.8 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 0.6...3.0 0.9...3.3 12 1.44 7.2 2.4 4.8 7.2 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 3 0.7 3.5 1.4 3.5 7 10.5 14 17.5 22 0.4...2.0 25 0.8...2.4 6 1.4 7 3.5 7 10.5 14 350 15 0.53 0.6 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 12 2.1 10.5 3.5 7 10.5 15 1.4...2.3 3) 1.4...2.3 6 4.9 8.05 2.45 5.95 9.45 13 0 2.1...3.3 3) 2.1...3.3 12 7.35 11.6 2.45 5.95 9.45 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 3 1.4 7 2.8 7 14 21 28 35 38 0.4...2.0 25 0.8...2.4 6 2.8 14 7 14 21 28 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 12 4.2 21 7 14 21 700 30 2.1 2.4 1.4...2.3 3) 1.4...2.3 8 9.8 16.1 4.9 11.9 18.9 25.9 30 2.1...3.3 3) 2.1...3.3 12 14.7 23.1 4.9 11.9 18.9 0 2.35...3.8 3) 4) 2.35...3.8 15 16.5 26.6 1.4 8.4 15.4 2.6...4.3 3) 4) 2.6...4.3 18 18.2 30.1 4.9 11.9 1) Based on lower bench range value, taking zero travel (to unseat the plug) into account 2) Zero travel as in Table 3 depending on fail-safe action 3) Pretensioned springs 4) Version not available with additional handwheel 230 Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN 2005-04

ØD ØD a H1 H1 H H a H6 H4 14 H5 ØD2 Ød Fig. 14 Type 3271-5 Ød M14x1 10.5 max. 58 at 7.5 mm travel Fig. 14a Types 3271-5/3277-5 with 7.5 mm travel for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve H6 H4 ØD2 Ød Fig. 15 Type 3277-5 with additional handwheel H7 ØD a H7 ØD a1 H H H6 H4 ØD2 Ød a H5 H6 H4 a2 ØD2 Ød Fig. 16 Type 3271 (700 cm² version with lifting ring) Fig. 17 Type 3277 (700 cm² version with lifting ring) ØD1 ØD1 a H2 H1 a1 H2 H1 H H H4 H6 a H5 a2 55 ØD ØD2 Ød H4 H6 ØD ØD2 Ød Fig. 18 Type 3271 with additional handwheel Fig. 19 Type 3277 with additional handwheel Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN 2005-04 231

Table 3 Dimensions and weights Actuator Type 3271 3271 3271 3271 3277 3277 Version -52-5 -5 Diaphragm area cm² 60 80 120 240 350 700 120 240 350 700 Height H 63 62 69 62 82 134 70 65 82 135 H1 213 300 320 490 293 400 420 590 H2 max 208 345 365 540 445 465 640 H4 rated FA 51 75 75 75 75 90 75 75 75 90 H4 max FA 52.5 78 78 78 78 95 78 78 78 90 H4 max FE 52.5 78 78 78 85 104 78 78 85 104 H5 84 101 101 101 H6 23.8 34 34 34 34 34 14 34 H7 62 65 H8 75 85 115 75 85 115 Diameter Ø D 120 150 168 240 280 390 168 240 280 390 Ø D1 80 180 250 250 180 250 250 Ø D2 10 10 10 10 16 16 10 16 Ø d (thread) 20 30 20 30 a (optional) G 1 8 G ¼ G 1 8 G ¼ G 3 8 ¼ NPT 1 8 NPT ¼ NPT 3 / 8 NPT G 1 8 G ¼ G 3 8 a2 G 3 8 Weight in kg Without handwheel 1.3 2 2 5 8 22 3.2 9 12 26 With handwheel 4 9 13 27 5.2 13 17 31 Throttling or on/off service In throttling service, the pneumatic actuators can be used for supply pressures up to max. 6 bar. In on/off service, the supply pressure must be reduced. For fail-safe action Actuator stem retracts (FE), the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 3 bar. Actuators to be used with reduced supply pressures are labeled accordingly. H8 H H4 H6 ØD a a ØD2 Ød Example Fig. 20 Type 3271 with adjustable travel stop Bench range Fail-safe action Max. supply pressure 0.2 1.0 bar 4 bar 0.4 2.0 bar Actuator stem retracts 5 bar 0.6 3.0 bar 6 bar For fail-safe action Actuator stem extends (FA) and travel stop, the supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 1.5 bar. Ordering text Actuator Optional Diaphragm area Travel Bench range Fail-safe action Signal pressure connection Rolling diaphragm Type 3271 or Type 3277 for direct attachment of accessories Handwheel Travel stop Fire-Lock version... cm²... mm... bar Actuator stem extends (FA) or Actuator stem retracts (FE) G... /... NPT NBR/EPDM Specifications subject to change without notice. 232 Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN 2005-04

Pneumatic Actuators 1400, 2800, and 2 x 2800 cm² Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 Application Linear actuator for attachment to final control elements, particularly suitable for Series 240, 250 and 280 Control Valves Diaphragm area 1400 and 2800 cm² Travel Up to 160 mm The Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuators are diaphragm actuators equipped with a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Special features Low overall height Low friction Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression No special tools required to change the bench range and to reverse the actuator action (also for tandem actuator and version with handwheel) Continuous operation at temperatures from 35 to +90 C Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator for travels up to 80 mm Versions Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Figs. 1 and 2), effective diaphragm area of 1400 cm², versions with 60 mm travel (1400-60) or 120 mm travel (1400-120) and effective diaphragm area of 2800 cm² Type 3271 Pneumatic Tandem Actuator (Fig. 3), effective diaphragm area of 2 x 2800 cm² Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for travels up to 80 mm using side-mounted handwheel (Fig. 13), effective diaphragm area of 1400 or 2800 cm² Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with Handwheel, using side-mounted handwheel (Fig. 14) for travels up to 160 mm, effective diaphragm areas of 1400 cm² with 120 mm travel, 2800 or 2 x 2800 cm² Type 3271 Actuator with Travel Stop (sectional drawing 7), minimum or maximum travel mechanically adjustable for 1400 cm² actuators with 60 mm travel and 2800 cm² actuators as well as 2 x 2800 cm² tandem actuators Fig. 1 Type 3271 (1400-60) with Type 3251 Control Valve Fig. 2 Type 3271 (1400-120) Further versions For other process media (e.g. water) For high temperatures up to 120 C or low temperatures down to 40 C On request Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator without pneumatic actuator, operated using side-mounted handwheel for travels up to 80 mm On request Fig. 3 Type 3271 Tandem Actuator with 2 x 2800 cm 2 Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN 2005-04 233

Principle of operation The signal pressure p st generates a force F=p st A on the diaphragm area A (2). This force is balanced by the actuator springs (4). Taking into account the rated travel, the number of springs and their compression determine the bench range. The travel H is proportional to the signal pressure p st. The operating direction of the actuator stem (7) depends on the arrangement of the springs. The stem connector (8) connects the actuator stem (7) with the plug stem (10) of the valve. Fig. 12 shows the side-mounted Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator for actuators with effective diaphragm areas of 1400 and 2800 cm² and a maximum travel of up to 80 mm. The handwheel (23) is fixed to the worm-geared shaft (20) and moves the actuator stem over the worm-geared wheel (21) and the threaded bushing (22). A side-mounted handwheel as illustrated in Fig. 14 is available for valves with 120 mm travel. The adjustable mechanical travel stop (Fig. 7) is suitable for actuator version 1400-60 as well as 2800 cm² and tandem actuators. The actuator travel can be limited by up to 50 % in both directions (actuator stem extends or retracts ) and permanently adjusted. The tandem actuator (Fig. 6) contains two coupled diaphragms; they produce a positioning force that is twice as high as the force of a single-acting actuator. Actuators are available with the following fail-safe actions: Actuator stem extends (FA) The springs cause the actuator stem to move to the lower end position (sectional drawings, right) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The springs cause the actuator stem to retract (sectional drawings, left) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Legend 1 Signal pressure connection 2 Diaphragm 3 Vent 4 Springs 5 Diaphragm cases 6 Annular nut 7 Actuator stem 8 Stem connector 9 Coupling nut 10 Plug stem 14 Cap 15 Nut 16 Spindle 17 Plain bearing 18 Lock nut 20 Worm-geared shaft 21 Worm-geared wheel 22 Threaded bushing 23 Handwheel 1 2 3 1 4 5 3 6 8 9 10 1 2 4 5 3 6 9 10 Fig. 5 Sectional drawing of actuator version 1400-120 Fig. 6 Tandem actuator with 2 x 2800 cm² 3 5 2 1 7 8 3 1 3 2 1 7 1 2 4 5 3 6 9 10 3 5 2 1 7 8 1 2 4 5 3 6 9 14 18 16 15 17 3 5 2 1 7 8 10 Fig. 4 Sectional drawing of Type 3271 Actuator (right-hand section of diaphragm with additional springs) Fig. 7 Type 3271 Actuator with adjustable travel stop 234 Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN 2005-04

Throttling or on/off service In throttling service, the Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuators can be used for supply pressures up to max. 6 bar. In on/off service, the supply pressure must be reduced. For fail-safe action Actuator stem retracts (FE), the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 3 bar. Actuators to be used with reduced supply pressures are labeled accordingly. Example 23 20 21 22 Bench range Fail-safe action Max. supply pressure 0.2 1.0 bar 4 bar 0.4 2.0 bar Actuator stem retracts 5 bar 0.6 3.0 bar 6 bar For fail-safe action Actuator stem extends (FA) and travel stop, the supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 1.5 bar. Fig. 8 Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator with side-mounted handwheel for max. 80 mm travel, up to 80 kn 9 10 Table 1a Technical data for Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Version cm² 1400-60 1400-120 2800 2 x 2800 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar 1) 6 bar 1) Permissible temperatures in continuous operation Materials Rolling diaphragm Standard material NBR 35 to 90 C Special material EPDM (for air free of oil and grease) 35 to 120 C NBR (nitrile rubber) Butyl with fabric insert EPDM with fabric insert Standard material NBR 35 to 90 C NBR with fabric insert Standard material NBR 35 to 90 C Actuator stem 1.4571 1.4548.4 1.4548.4 Actuator stem sealing NBR (nitrile rubber) NBR EPDM NBR Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, EN-JS1030 (GGG-40) powder-varnish coated 1) Observe restrictions as specified above Table 1b Technical data for Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator Version 3273 (Fig. 8, 13) 3273 (Fig. 14) Max. travel range 80 mm 160 mm Permissible force 80 kn 210 kn Permissible temperature 100 C 100 C Materials Body EN-JS1030 (GGG-40) EN-JS1030 (GGG-40) Spindle and threaded nut 1.4104/G-CuSn12Pb EN-GJS-500-7 (GGG-50)/1.0503 Handwheel Aluminum EN-JL1040 (GG-25) Table 1c Available versions Version 1400-60 1400-120 2800 cm² 2 x 2800 cm² Travel stop, on both sides Type 3273 Hand-operated (max. 3 bar) Actuator, max. 80 mm travel Side-mounted Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator, max. 120 mm travel Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN 2005-04 235

Table 2 Bench ranges for 1400 and 2800 cm² Pneumatic Actuators All pressures in bar (gauge) Values highlighted in gray apply to standard operation, i.e. operation at rated travel. The maximum travel can be achieved by increasing the signal pressure. Pretensioned springs cannot be used with fail-safe action Actuator stem retracts for Series 240, 250, and 280 Control Valves. Effective diaphragm area [cm²] Rated travel [mm] Travel volume at rated travel [dm³] Dead volume [dm³] Max. travel [mm] 1) 1400 60 8.3 5.7 80 Bench range [bar] (signal pressure range at rated travel) 0.2...1.0 Additionally possible spring compression [%] Operating range with spring compression [bar] Number of springs Spring force at 0 mm travel [kn] 2) Spring force at rated travel [kn] 2) Thrust [kn] 2) at rated travel and a supply pressure [bar] of 1.4 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 0.4...1.2 6 2.8 14 5.6 14 28 42 56 70 0.4...2.0 0.8...2.4 12 5.6 28 14 28 42 56 0.5...2.5 25 1.0...3.0 18 7 35 7 21 35 49 1.1...2.4 1.4...2.7 18 15.4 33.6 8.4 22.4 36.4 50.4 1.3...2.8 1.7...3.2 24 18.2 39.2 2.8 16.8 30.8 44.8 1400 120 16.6 4.7 130 0.4...1.2 3 5.6 16.8 2.8 11.2 25.2 39.2 53.2 67.2 0.8...2.4 6 11.2 33.6 8.4 22.4 36.4 50.4 0 3) 1.0...3.0 9 14 42 14 28 42 1.2...3.6 12 16.8 50.4 5.6 19.6 33.6 2800 120 33 16.5 160 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 3 5.6 28 11.2 28 56 84 112 140 0.4...2.0 0.8...2.4 6 11.2 5.6 28 56 84 112 25 0.5...2.5 1.0...3.0 9 14 70 14 42 70 98 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 12 16.8 84 28 56 84 0.9...1.6 1.1...1.8 6 25.2 44.8 11.2 39.2 67.2 95.2 123 1.0...2.1 25 4) 1.25...2.35 9 28 58.8 25.2 53.2 81.2 109 1.1...2.6 1.5...3.0 12 30.8 72.8 11.2 39.2 67.2 95.2 1.1...2.3 1.4...2.6 6 30.8 64.4 19.6 47.6 75.6 104 1.2...2.8 25 1.6...3.2 9 33.6 78.4 5.6 33.6 61.6 89.6 1.3...3.3 1.8...3.8 12 36.4 92.4 19.6 47.6 75.6 2 x 2800 120 66 33 160 78.4 0.2...1.0 0.4...1.2 6 11.2 56 22.4 56 112 168 224 280 0.4...2.0 0.8...2.4 12 22.4 11.2 56 112 168 224 25 0.5...2.5 1.0...3.0 18 28 140 28 84 140 196 0.6...3.0 1.2...3.6 24 33.6 168 56 112 168 0.9...1.6 1.1...1.8 12 50.4 89.6 22.4 134.4 190.4 246 1.0...2.1 25 4) 1.25...2.35 18 56 117.6 50.4 106.4 162.4 218 1.1...2.6 1.5...3.0 24 61.6 145.6 22.4 78.4 134.4 190.4 1.1...2.3 1.4...2.6 12 61.6 128.8 39.2 95.2 151.2 208 1.2...2.8 25 1.6...3.2 18 67.2 156.8 11.2 67.2 123.2 179.2 1.3...3.3 1.8...3.8 24 72.8 184.8 39.2 95.2 151.2 1) Based on lower bench range value, not taking zero travel (to unseat the plug) into account (see Table 3a) 2) Specified forces refer to the bench range 3) Springs are already pretensioned 4) The maximum compression at 50 % rated travel is 50 % 236 Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN 2005-04

Table 3 Dimensions and weights Table 3a Versions without handwheel Actuator cm² 1400-60 1400-120 2800 2 x 2800 Height H 197 380 520 1020 H4 Rated FA 165 285 315 H4 max FA 169 288 325 H4 max FE 185 315 355 H6 54 85 85 H7 90 110 110 H8 180 500 Diameter Ø D 530 534 770 ØD2 22 40 40 Ø d (thread) 60 x 1.5 100 x 2 100 x 2 100 x 2 a (optional) G ¾ G ¾ G 1 ¾ NPT ¾ NPT 1 NPT Weight in kg Without handwheel 70 175 450 950 a H7 H8 a H H a H6 H4 a H6 H4 ØD ØD2 Ød ØD ØD2 Ød Fig. 11 Version with mechanical travel stop Fig. 9 Type 3271 Actuator, version 1400-60 a H7 a a H7 H a a H a a H6 H4 a H6 Ød ØD ØD2 H4 ØD ØD2 Ød Fig. 10 Version with mechanical travel stop Fig. 12 Type 3271 as tandem actuator Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN 2005-04 237

Table 3b Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator with side-mounted handwheel Travel 80 mm Control valve DN 50 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 Seat bore mm 100 150 200 200 Travel mm 30 60 60 60 Actuator cm² 1400-60 2800 1400-120 1400-60 2800 1400-120 1400-60 2800 1400-120 1400-60 2800 1400-120 H3 mm 932 1202 1202 1032 1202 1202 1032 1202 1202 1117 1222 1222 H5 mm 295 480 480 395 480 480 395 480 480 480 500 500 H9 mm 395 480 480 395 480 480 395 480 480 395 480 480 Weight with actuator kg 140 575 300 155 575 300 155 575 300 175 575 300 Weight w/o actuator kg 70 70 70 70 H H9 350 172 H3 80 242 162 Ø 315 H5 Fig. 13 1400 and 2800 cm² version for max. 80 mm travel, up to 80 kn Table 3c Pneumatic actuator and hand-operated actuator with side-mounted handwheel Travel up to 160 mm Actuator cm² 1400-120 2800 2 x 2800 H10 mm 1105 1105 1105 H11 mm 220 220 220 Weight w/o actuator kg 250 250 250 H10 120 500 Ø500 Ordering text Actuator Type 3271 Handwheel Travel stop Tandem actuator Diaphragm area... cm 2 Travel... mm Bench range... bar Fail-safe action Actuator stem extends/retracts Signal pressure connection G... /... NPT Rolling diaphragm NBR/EPDM H11 Fig. 14 1400 and 2800 cm² version for travel > 60 to 120 mm Specifications subject to change without notice. 238 Data Sheet T 8310-2 EN 2005-04

Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 Application Hand-operated actuator for attachment to valves, especially for Series 240, 250 and 260 Control Valves. Rated travels of 15 and 30 mm. Nominal thrusts up to 32 kn The Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator is a spindle actuator equipped with a non-rising handwheel. Special features Low overall height Simple connection to the control valve Manual forces specified in DIN 3230, Part 2 Locking mechanism securing the valve stem position against accidental adjustment Replaceable with a pneumatic or electric actuator Versions Type 3273-1 Handwheel diameter of 180 mm and a maximum nominal thrust of 18 kn Type 3273-2 Handwheel diameter of 250 mm and a maximum nominal thrust of 32 kn Actuators for valves with travels > 30 mm and/or required nominal thrusts > 30 kn upon request Combination options: Series 240 Valves, nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 150 (max. travel 30 mm), see Table 3a. Series 250 Valves, nominal sizes DN 15 to 100 (DN 100 to 200 with maximum travel of 30 mm), see Table 3b. Series 260 Valves, DN 80 to 150, see Table 3c. Fig. 1 Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator attached to Type 3241 Valve 2 1 3 Principle of operation The hand-operated actuator is connected to the yoke using the supplied nut (5). The coupling element (6) connects the threaded spindle (1) to the plug stem of the valve. The locking mechanism (4) locks the handwheel (3) and protects the valve stem position against accidental adjustment. Adjustment of the valve is only possible after releasing the locking mechanism (4). Ordering text Type 3273-1 or 3273-2 Hand-operated Actuator For Type... Control Valve DN... PN... Seat bore...mm, Δp...bar Fig. 2 Type 3273 Actuator, sectional view 1 Threaded spindle 2 Threaded nut 3 Handwheel 4 5 6 4 Locking mechanism 5 Nut 6 Coupling element Data Sheet T 8312 EN 2005-04 239

Table 1 Technical data Type 3273-1 3273-2 Rated travel mm 15/30 Maximum travel mm 23/38 Maximum thrust kn 18 32 Req. manual force N 230 300 Max. temperature C 100 Spindle force versus manual force diagram Spindle force s Handwheel 250 mm Handwheel 180 mm Table 2 Materials Spindle and threaded nut Body Handwheel Stainless steel 1.4104 or 1.4006 Sheet steel St 37-2, powder coated Aluminum Table 3 Hand-operated actuator and valve allocation Table 3a Series 240 Δp in bar Valve seat in mm 40 30 20 Actuator 12 On request 24 3273-1 31 3273-1 38 3273-1 48 3273-1 63 3273-1 80 3273-2 3273-1 100 3273-2 110 3273-2 130 3273-2 Table 3b Series 250 Δp in bar Valve seat in mm 160 100 63 40 Actuator 12 On request 24 3273-1 31 3273-1 38 3273-2 3273-1 50 3273-2 3273-1 63 3273-2 80 3273-2 100 3273-2 1 1 1 1 Dimensions in mm and weights ØD1 Max. manual force acc. to DIN 3230 Manual force H3 (valve closed) Rated travel H4 D1 D2 d H1 H Weight appr. kg Type H1 15 mm 30 mm 3273-1 110 75 90 22 180 16 M30x1.5 2 3273-2 110 75 90 22 250 16 M30x1.5 2.5 Table 3c Series 260 Valve seat in mm Δp = 6 bar Actuator 15 65 3273-1 80 3273-1 100 3273-1 125 3273-1 150 3273-1 Ød ØD2 H4 H3 Specifications subject to change without notice. 240 Data Sheet T 8312 EN 2005-04

Electric Actuators Linear Actuator Type SAM Application Electric actuators designed for control valves used in process engineering applications. They are especially suitable for valves of Series 240, 250 and 280. Nominal thrusts 2 kn to 25 kn Rated travels 15 to 120 mm These electric linear actuators contain reversible AC or threephase AC motors. The rotary motion of the motor is transferred to the actuator stem via a gear unit and the corresponding transfer elements. Versions are available with 230 V AC or 400 V three-phase AC motor for connection to three-point stepping controllers. Transit times range from 18 to 144 seconds. The standard versions include a mechanical handwheel. The following limit switches and signalizing components are included in the standard hardware: Two torque-dependent switches Three travel-dependent switches Optional electrical equipment: Brake motors (required for positioners) One or two potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000 Ω One electronic position transmitter with an output signal from 4(0) to 20 ma One positioner with input signals from 4(0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V Fig. 1 Type SAM Electric Actuator attached to Type 3241 Valve Versions Standard version with surface-cooled squirrel-cage motor for 230 V AC or 400 V three-phase alternating current. Equipped with two torque-dependent limit switches and three limit contacts. Motor with temperature monitor (optional for Type SAM -01 to -23). Type SAM -01 and SAM -1x Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 2 kn (SAM -01 and SAM -10) to 6 kn (SAM -13). Type SAM -2x Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 6 kn (SAM -20) to 15 kn (SAM -23). Type SAM -3x Electric actuator with 60 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 6 kn (SAM -30) to 15 kn (SAM -33). Type SAM -4x Electric actuator with 60 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 15 kn (SAM -40) to 25 kn (SAM -42). Type SAM -5x Electric actuator with 120 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 15 kn (SAM -50) to 25 kn (SAM -52). All actuators are available with the optional electrical equipment described above. For further technical details, see overleaf. Fig. 2 Type SAM Electric Actuator attached to Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve Data Sheet T 8330 EN 2001-03 241

Principle of operation The actuator motor converts the output pulses of the three-point stepping controller into steps of travel. The length of these steps and the direction of rotation depend on the quantity and the sign of the control deviation. The rotary motion of the motor is transferred to the gear wheel via the gearing; the gear wheel is shrunk on a bushing with female thread. The top section of the actuator stem which is provided with the matching male thread engages the female thread. Due to the rotary motion of the gear wheel and bushing, the actuator stem screws into the female thread and performs a lifting, linear motion. The actuators can be adjusted manually after disengagement of the motor. All versions are equipped with two torque-dependent and three travel-dependent limit switches which stop the motor when the predetermined limits are reached. These electrical components are housed below the sealed cover where they are separated from the gearing and protected from moisture and dust. They can be easily accessed after lifting off the cover. The torque-dependent switches (S1 and S2 in Fig. 4) switch off the motor when the adjusted force is reached, e.g., when the valve plug rests against the seat or when the linear motion is obstructed in any way. The three floating travel-dependent switches (S3 to S5) issue a limit signal when the adjusted limit values are exceeded. Usually, one switch (S3) is used to limit the travel in the opening direction of the control valve. Whereas the other two switches (S4 and S5) indicate intermediate or end positions. The electric actuators can optionally be equipped with two potentiometers and/or an electric position transmitter with an output signal from 4 (0) to 20 ma. They are used for analog remote transmission of the valve position. It is also possible to install a positioner with input signals 4 (0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V when AC brake motors for 230 V, 50 Hz are used. The installation and start-up for three-phase AC brake motors involve considerably more work because additional external reversing contactors are required. Fig. 3 Type SAM Electric Actuator Table 1 Technical data SA Type M - 01 10 11 12 13 20 21 22 23 30 31 32 33 40 41 42 50 51 52 Nominal thrust kn 2 2 3.5 4.5 6 6 8 12 15 6 8 12 15 15 20 25 15 20 25 Rated travel Standard 30 60 120 Optional 15 30 60 Speed of response mm/min 15 17 25 50 1) Actuators with positioner require brake motors 17 34 13.5 25 50 13.5 22 40 13.5 25 50 13.5 22 40 25 50 Connecting thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 1.5 Degree of protection IP 65 Perm. ambient temperature 20 to +60 C Table 2 Electrical connection data Type SAM - 01 10 11 12 13 20 21 30 31 22 23 32 33 23 33 20 21 22 30 31 32 23 33 40 41 42 50 51 52 Speed of response mm/min 15 17 25 50 17 34 13.5 25 13.5 22 50 40 25 50 Motor and 230 V/50 Hz 0.029 0.16 0.18 0.16 0.18 0.1 0.225 0.145 0.225 0.7 0.7 0.66 0.93 power consumption 400 V/50 Hz 0.015 0.11 0.08 0.11 0.08 0.062 0.11 0.85 0.11 0.29 0.29 0.4 0.7 [A] Version Synchronous motor Asynchronous motor 1) Temperature monitoring Only on request, not required Bimetallic release 242 Data Sheet T 8330 EN 2001-03

Table 3 Electrical equipment Standard version 2 torque-dependent switches 3 travel-dependent switches Motor coil with temperature monitor (see Table 2) Options 1 or 2 potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000 Ω 1 position transmitter with output 4(0) to 20 ma 1 positioner with input 4(0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V (only with brake or synchronous motor) 1 heating resistor with temperature monitor Electrical connection The electric actuators can be connected in three ways: 1) via internal terminal blocks (standard version), 2) via 32-pin terminal blocks in a terminal box or 3) via a compact connector. A 10-pin plug insert (silver-plated sockets and pins) is used to connect the motor; a 24-pin unit containing either silver or gold-plated contacts is used to connect the limit switches and signalizing equipment. When a plug connector is used, only one potentiometer (R1) can be provided in case a fourth travel-dependent switch (S6) is desired. The travel-dependent switch S3 must be adjusted in such a way that the travel of the final control element is limited in the opening direction by switching off the motor. SAM -01 to -33 SAM -20 to -52 SAM -20 to -33 SAM -40 to -52 Klemmenanschluß Terminal connection Klemmenanschluß Terminal connection Steckeranschluß Plug connection Steckeranschluß Plug connection bis up 380 to 380 V V Steckeranschluß Plug connection bis up 500 to 500 V V DE Torque-dependent switch ES Electronic position transmitter (not for SAM 1.) a with four-wire/three-wire connection b with two-wire connection HZ Heating resistor with temperature monitor POT Potentiometer TW WE Temperature monitor Travel-dependent switch S 3 for travel limitation S 4 to S 6 for indication of intermediate positions The wiring diagram in the cover of the linear actuator is binding! Fig. 4 Connection diagrams Data Sheet T 8330 EN 2001-03 243

Dimensions in mm and weights Type SAM -01 to -13 1) SAM -20 to -23 SAM -30 to -33 SAM -40 to -42 SAM -50 to -52 Rated travel 30 30 60 60 120 H 248 319 304 385 395 H4 max. 90 90 165 165 315 H6 34 34 54 54 92 ø D 144 188 188 216 216 ø D2 16 16 22 40 40 ø d (thread) M 30x1.5 M 30x1.5 M 60x1.5 M 60x1.5 M 100x2 Approx. weight in kg 5 6 7 15 19 1) Without positioner and position transmitter ES, otherwise the same as for SAM -20. Ordering text Electric Actuator Type SAM -... AC motor 230 V, 50 Hz AC brake motor 230 V, 50 Hz Three-phase AC motor 400 V, 50 Hz 3-phase AC brake motor 400 V, 50 Hz Attached to Control Valve Type... Valve travel 15/ 30/ 60/ 120 mm Options: Potentiometers 1 or 2 100, 200 or 1000 Ω 1 electric position transmitter Output 1 positioner Input 4 to 20 ma 4 to 20 ma 0 to 10 V Specifications subject to change without notice. 244 Data Sheet T 8330 EN 2001-03

Electrohydraulic Actuators Type 3274-11 to -23 Application Actuators for positioning control valves. The electrohydraulic actuators receive three-point stepping or continuous-action output signals from electric controllers. Nominal thrust up to 7300 N. Rated travels 15 and 30 mm The actuators are available with different thrusts. Special features Compact design including electric, or optionally mechanical override. Safe functioning due to force-dependent disconnection of the motor when reaching final positions, or when overload occurs. Installation of positioner, potentiometers, and electric or inductive limit switches in the terminal box. Optionally, fail-safe action for version with electric override. Fig. 1 Type 3274-11 to -14 Electrohydraulic Actuator with electric override; optionally with fail-safe position: Operating direction Versions with electric override (Fig. 1) Electric override activated using two push buttons on the terminal box Type 3274-11 Electrohydraulic Actuator with nominal thrust F in of 2100 N in operating direction "In", and nominal thrust F out of 1800 N in operating direction "Out" Type 3274-12 F in of 500 N and F out of 3000 N Type 3274-13 F in and F out of 4300 N Type 3274-14 F in of 500 N and F out of 7300 N "Out" "In" Versions with mechanical override (Fig. 2) Mechanical override adjusted with an Allen key (width across flats/sw 24) at the additional gearing housing Type 3274-15 F in of 2100 N and F out of 1800 N Type 3274-16 F in of 500 N and F out of 3000 N Type 3274-17 F in and F out of 4300 N, respectively Type 3274-18 F in of 500 N and F out of 7300 N Fig. 2 Type 3274-15 to -18 Electrohydraulic Actuator with mechanical override Versions with fail-safe action and electric override, operating direction of the spring return mechanism according to Fig. 1 Type 3274-21 F in of 2100 N and F out of 1800 N operating direction of fail-safe position: "Out" Type 3274-22 F in of 1800 N and F out of 2100 N operating direction of fail-safe position: "In" Type 3274-23 F in of 500 N and F out of 3000 N operating direction of fail-safe position: "Out" Typetested versions Type 3274-21 and Type 3274-23 Actuators with fail-safe position (operating direction "Out") have been typetested together with various SAMSON valves by German TÜV according to DIN 32 730. Register number available on request. Other certifications CSA for version 110 V/60 Hz NE MA 3 Data Sheet T 8340 EN 2002-04 245

Principle of operation (Fig. 3) The pressure-tight actuator housing (1) also serves as oil reservoir and incorporates the cylinder housing (2), cylinder (5.1) and piston, motor (6.1), pump (6.2) and solenoid pilot valves (6.4). The required electric lines are oil-tight and pressure-tight and led from the terminal box (3) to the actuator housing. The oil pump (6.2) driven by the motor (6.1) feeds compressed oil to the corresponding cylinder chamber via the check-valve (6.3) and pilot valve (6.4). Disconnected from current, the solenoid valves are closed. They open, when the controller issues a signal. Depending on the version, the actuators are equipped with or without one or two compression springs (5.10, 5.11). These springs are used to reset the actuator, and they are part of the fail-safe position. The motor is controlled by a relay in its electronics section and is directly connected to the power supply. Therefore, the contacts of the controller are subjected to a load of maximum two solenoid valves, and the electronics section of the motor is subjected to only minimum load. When reaching final positions, or external forces cause the nominal force of the actuator to be exceeded, the force-dependent switches (4.3) or (4.4) deactivate the motor. CAUTION: Do not open housing cover (1.1)! The hydraulic equipment need not be maintained; oil change is not necessary. 3.1 3 5.2 5.11 5.10 4.3 4.4 1.1 1 6.4 6.3 6.2 6.1 5.1 2 Versions with fail-safe action have a spring return mechanism and an additional safety solenoid valve which opens when power supply is interrupted, thus reducing the pressure on the cylinder chamber. In this process, electric override is not possible. Manual override The actuators possess an electric or optionally a mechanical override as standard. Versions with fail-safe position are supplied with electric override only. Electric override There are two push buttons on the terminal box (3). Any travel position can be reached independent of the control signal. After the push button is released, the actuator reacts again according to the controller signal. The control signal can be interrupted by opening the isolator terminal (81 in Figs. 4 to 6). Mechanical override The release button on the top side of the actuator housing must be activated. An Allen key (SW 24) can be used for adjustment. As soon as the release button is deactivated, the actuator reacts again according to the controller signal. 1 Actuator housing and oil reservoir 1.1 Housing cover 2 Cylinder housing 3 Electric terminal box 3.1 Cover 4.3 Limit switch (extending) 4.4 Limit switch (retracting) 5.1 Cylinder 5.2 Piston 5.10 Compression spring 5.11 Compression spring 6.1 Motor 6.2 Oil pump 6.3 Check-valve 6.4 Pilot valve Fig. 3 Functional diagram of Type 3274 Actuator Additional electrical equipment The entire electrical equipment can be accessed in the terminal box (3). Table 2 shows the maximum amount of equipment. The housing cover (1.1) is secured by special screws and must not be opened! Electric positioner The positioner compares the controller signal to the signal issued by a potentiometer. The potentiometer signal is proportional to the travel. The output variable produced by the positioner is a three-point stepping control signal. Zero and span for normal and split-range operation are adjustable within broad limits. The operating direction (increasing/increasing or increasing/decreasing) can be chosen. Via an external make contact, the final position "In" or "Out" can be reached. This does not affect the safety function. The positioner has an additional output for valve position feedback. Electric position transmitter Output signal 0(2) to 10 V or 0(4) to 20 ma with potentiometer 0 to 1000 Ω for versions with three-point stepping signal. Potentiometer Actuators can be equipped with one or two potentiometers. Versions with positioner require a potentiometer for valve position feedback to the positioner. Electric limit switch Actuators are equipped with maximum three overridable electric or inductive limit switches on request. The limit switches are activated via infinitely adjustable cam disks. The transistor relays necessary for operation are not included in the delivery. Heating resistor Heating the hydraulic oil increases the lower temperature range. The heating resistor is not protected by the internal fuse. We recommend that an external fuse be used in accordance with the power consumption data indicated on the nameplate. Please also note the instructions for mounting positions in the Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8340 EN. 246 Data Sheet T 8340 EN 2002-04

Table 1 Technical data Actuator Type 3274- -11-12 -13-14 -15-16 -17-18 -21-22 -23 Version with manual override Electric - Mechanical - Electric - Fail-safe action With Without Operating direction "Out" "In" "Out" Rated travel 15 or 30 mm Nominal actuating time Speed of response for fail-safe action [mm/s] Thrust (N) at travel Electrical connection Power consumption 15 mm Stem: 30 mm Stem: 60 s for 15 mm; 120 s for 30 mm (depending on temperature and required thrust 1/2 actuating time on request) Standard 1 1 1.3 Optional 4.3 4.3 5.6 "In" 2100 500 4300 500 2100 500 4300 500 2100 1800 500 "Out" 2000 3400 4300 7700 2000 3400 4300 7700 2000 2300 3400 "In" 2100 500 4300 500 2100 500 4300 500 2100 1800 500 "Out" 1800 3000 4300 7300 1800 3000 4300 7300 1800 2100 3000 230 V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (±10 % resp.) 90 to 200 VA (maximum in version with 1/2 actuating time and heating) Permissible ambient temperature 10 C to +60 C Wider range (with heating resistor): 35 C to +60 C Permissible storage temperature 25 C to +70 C Degree of protection IP 65 Control operation Duty cycling S4 according to VDE 0530/IEC 34 with 50% on-time Electronics section of motor Radio interference level according to DIN VDE 0875 Mounting Central attachment M 30 x 1.5 Special version for Type 3214 Valve, DN 150 to 250 Weight approx. kg 12 15 12 Additional electrical equipment Electric positioner Potentiometer (additional ranges on request) Power supply 230 V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (±10 % resp.) Control signal 4 to 20 ma, 0 to 20 ma (Ri = 50 Ω) 0 to 10 V, 2 to 10 V (Ri = 10 kω) Zero shift 0 to 100 % Change of span 30 to 100 % Output (feedback) 4(0) to 20 ma, R 200 Ω 0(2) to10 V, R 2 kω 0 to 1000 Ω; 0 to 200 Ω; 0 to 100 Ω; 0 to 275 Ω; 0 to 138 Ω (when rated travel is 80 % of final value); permissible load 0.5 W Electric limit switch Maximum three separately adjustable limit switches (see Table 2) Permissible load 250 V~, 5 A Inductive limit switch Proximity switch SJ 2-N Control circuit Values according to downstream transistor relay (not included in delivery) Heating resistor, approx. 45 W With thermostat, "on" at approx. 10 C, "off" at approx. 0 C Table 2 Additional electrical equipment Additional equipment Max. equipment combination (arranged by columns) Electric positioner Electric positioner Potentiometer 1 1000 Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) Potentiometer 2 Electric limit switch 1 Electric limit switch 2 Electric limit switch 3 Inductive limit switch 1 Inductive limit switch 2 1) Required for position transmission to the positioner Data Sheet T 8340 EN 2002-04 247

Table 3 Materials Housing and housing cover Cylinder Piston Piston stem Actuator stem 1.4104 Die-cast aluminum, plastic-coated Hydraulic cylinder tube Steel-NBR combination C45, chromium-plated Electrical connection (Figs. 4 and 5) Figs. 4 and 5 schematically illustrate the different means of connection, depending on how the respective version is equipped. The electric limit switches are provided with screwed connections. They are connected directly, not via the terminal block. Especially for 24 V actuators, lines of sufficient cross-section must be laid in order to guarantee that the permissible voltage tolerances of ±10 % are kept. The heating resistor is connected without additional terminals to L and N in the circuit. Hydraulic oil Special HLP, silicone-free Electrical connections Heating resistor M F e F a Type 3274-13,-14,-17,-18,-22 Type 3274-11...-18,-21,-23 In Out "e" "a" e a a e 1 4 2 N L al el a43 e53 81 1.31 1.32 1.33 2.31 2.32 2.33 Controller PE N L Safety interlock circuit, only with Type 3274-2x Fig. 4 Circuit diagram for actuators without positioner Heating resistor M F e F a Type 3274-13, -14, -17, -18,-22 Type 3274-11... -18, -21,-23 Priority position In "e" Out "a" a 1 e 4 2 PE N L Fig. 5 Circuit diagram for actuators with positioner N L al el a43 e53 82 83 81 12 11 13 32 31 33 2.31 2.32 2.33 green brown white Safety interlock circuit, only with Type 3274-2x - + (0)4 to 20 ma - + (0)4 to 20 ma - + - + (0)2 to 10V (0)2 to 10V Input Control signal Output Jumper essential for 0(2) to 10 V 248 Data Sheet T 8340 EN 2002-04

Electrical connections Heating resistor M F e F a Type 3274-13, -14, -17, -18, -22 Type 3274-11 to -18, -21, -23 In "e" Out "a" a 1 e 4 2 N L al el a43 e53 82 83 81 12 11 13 32 31 33 2.312.32 2.33 - + (0)4 to 20 ma - + Jumper essential for 0(2) to 10 V PE N L Safety interlock circuit, only with Type 3274-2x Controller Fig. 6 Circuit diagram for actuators with position transmitter Dimensions in mm. 75 for 15mm travel 90 for 30mm travel.. 75 for 15mm travel 90 for 30mm travel. Type 3274-... Actuator with electric override Type 3274-... Actuator with mechanical override Ordering text Type 3274-... Electrohydraulic Actuator Rated travel 15/30 mm Fail-safe action (only available with electric override) Operating direction "In" or "Out" Electrical connection 230/110/24 V; 50/60 Hz Version for Type 3214 Valves, DN 150 to 250, if needed. Additional electrical equipment (see Table 2) Positioner Input signal 0(2) to 10 V / 0(4) to 20 ma Position transmitter 0(2) to 10 V / 0(4) to 20 ma Potentiometer 0 to 1000 Ω 0 to... Ω Limit switch electric/inductive Heating resistor for wider temperature range Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8340 EN 2002-04 249

TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator Interface Software 251

TROVIS-VIEW Software TROVIS 6661 Application Uniform configuration and operation of various smart SAMSON devices TROVIS-VIEW is a standard operator interface, allowing the user to configure and parameterize various SAMSON instruments using a device-specific database module. Data is transferred between the TROVIS-VIEW software and the SAMSON device either directly (e.g. using a connecting cable or infrared adapter; also see Table 1) or indirectly using a memory pen or memory module. A direct connection enables both online and offline operation. This means that data can be changed in the device immediately, or they can be saved on the PC first and later downloaded to the device on site. The device-specific modules contain a database providing the characteristic properties of each device type, such as parameters, data points, user levels, etc. The various user levels can be protected with passwords. The available modules are being extended constantly. Data Sheet T 6661 EN 2007-12 253

Learning to operate TROVIS-VIEW is easy, as it uses the look and feel of Windows Explorer. It includes features such as: Tree structure List view Select Context-sensitive menus by clicking the right mouse button Open and save Hardware requirements A PC with the following minimum requirements is needed: Pentium II processor or equivalent (300 MHz or faster), 500 MHz recommended RS-232 serial interface or USB/RS-232 adapter (USB Converter 3 for TROVIS 5500 Series) and, depending on the SAMSON device used, the suitable hardware as specified in Table 1 Min. 96 MB RAM, 192 MB RAM recommended Min. 150 MB of available hard disk space. Additionally, 10 to 15 MB of available hard disk space per SAMSON module SVGA graphics card (min. 800 x 600) CD-ROM drive Software requirements Operating system: Windows 2000 (min. SP2), Windows XP, Windows Vista Microsoft.NET Framework Version 2.0 or higher (included on installation CD-ROM) Internet browser: MS Internet Explorer Version 6 or higher Scope of delivery The TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator Interface and the device-specific modules are delivered on a CD-ROM together with the associated online documentation. Software updates can be downloaded from the Support & Downloads section of our website at http://www.samson.de. Accessories (Figs. 1 to 3) Hardware package (memory pen, modular adapter, connecting cable) Order no. 1400-7704 Serial interface adapter Order no. 1400-7700 Memory pen Order no. 1400-7697 Memory pen 64 Order no. 1400-9753 Memory module Order no. 1400-9379 Connecting cable Order no. 1400-7699 FSK modem RS-232 EEx (ia) Order no. 8812-0129 RS-232 (not explosion-protected) Order no. 8812-0130 PCMCIA (not explosion-protected) Order no. 8812-0131 USB (not explosion-protected) Order no. 8812-0132 Infrared adapter Order no. 8864-0900 Holding fixture for infrared adapter Order no. 1400-9769 Isolated USB interface adapter Order no. 1400-9740 USB/RS-232 adapter Order no. 8812-0016 USB 1.1 serial adapter Order no. 8812-2001 USB Converter3 Order no. 1400-9377 USB dongle for EXPERT+ diagnostics Order no. 1400-9555 Ordering text TROVIS-VIEW 6661-1 TROVIS 5431 Heating Controller 0 0 1 TROVIS 5432 Heating Controller 0 0 2 TROVIS 5433 Heating Controller 0 0 3 TROVIS 5575 Heating Controller 0 1 1 TROVIS 5576 Heating Controller 0 1 2 TROVIS 5579 Heating Controller 0 1 3 TROVIS 6493 Compact Controller 0 3 1 TROVIS 6495 Industrial Controller 0 3 3 Type 3730-2 Positioner 0 5 1 Type 3730-3 Positioner 0 5 6 Type 3730-4 Positioner 0 5 7 Type 3730-5 Positioner 0 5 8 Type 3731-3 Positioner 0 6 3 Type 3731-5 Positioner 0 6 5 Type 3780 Positioner 0 5 2 Type 3785 Positioner 0 5 3 Type 3787 Positioner 0 5 4 Digital positioner with Type 3374 Actuator 0 5 5 Digital positioner with Type 5824/ 0 5 9 Type 5825 Actuator Digital positioner with Type 5857 Actuator 0 6 1 Type 5724/5725 Controller with 0 6 0 Electric Actuator Type 5757 Controller with 0 6 2 Electric Actuator Type 5757-7 Controller with 0 6 6 Electric Actuator Media 6 0 8 1 USB Fig. 1 Accessories USB Converter 3 (1400-9377) RS-232 USB/RS-232 adapter (8812-0016/8812-2001) Memory pen (1400-7697) Memory pen 64 (1400-9753) 254 Data Sheet T 6661 EN 2007-12